advertisement
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130 to 17A
IBM
Maintenance Information Procedures
SY33-2070-09
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130 to 17A
IBM
Maintenance Information Procedures
SY33-2070-09
Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices” on page xv.
Tenth Edition (June 1997)
The information contained in this manual is subject to change from time to time. Any such changes will be reported in subsequent revisions.
Changes have been made throughout this edition, and this manual should be read in its entirety.
Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality. Publications are not stocked at the address given below.
A form for readers' comments appears at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed, address your comments to:
IBM France
Centre d'Etudes et de Recherches
Service 0798 - BP 79
06610 La Gaude
France
FAX: 33 4 93 24 77 97
E-mail: FRIBMQF5 at IBMMAIL
IBM Internal Use: LGERCF at LGEPROFS
Internet: [email protected]
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a non-exclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1989, 1997. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents
Figures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
Notices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
European Union (EU) Statement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
Electronic Emission Notices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
Trademarks and Service Marks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
Product Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
General Safety
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
Service Inspection Safety Procedures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
Service Inspection Safety Procedures for the 3745, 3746-900, and Controller
Expansion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
Introduction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
Control Panel LED Status Versus 3746-900 States
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxx
3745/3746-900 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference
. . . . . . . . . .
xxx
Controller Expansion Fuse Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxx
Sicherheitsüberprüfungen für IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der
Steuereinheit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxi
Einführung
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxi
Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900
. . . . . . . . . . . .
xlii
Stromversorgung der 3745/3746-900, Sicherungsautomaten (CB),
Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und Sicherungen (F)
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
xliii
Sicherungen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xliii
Safety Label Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lvii
Safety Labels on the 3745
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lvii
Safety Label on the 3746-900
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lix
Safety Label on LCB
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lix
3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lx
LCB Safety Label
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxii
Controller Expansion Label Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxii
Safety Label Part Numbers by Country
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxiii
Preface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxv
About this Manual
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxv
Who Should Read this Manual
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxv
How this Manual Is Organized
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxv
Summary of Changes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxvii
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Console Use for Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Service Processor Window Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Selection Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
3745 Maintenance Actions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
Selection Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
Symptom Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
General Verbal Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
iii
3745 Console Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
3745 Control Panel Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
3745 Power Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
Miscellaneous Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-13
Using Reference Codes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
3745 Control Panel Codes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
Using the MIP FRU Group Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
3745 FRU Group Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-49
3745 Cable Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-52
3745 FRU List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-53
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance Using a CPN
. . . . . . . . . .
1-55
Service Processor Maintenance Using an SRC Sequence Number
. . . .
1-57
Engineering Data Transfer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-58
Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-58
Transferring Engineering Data from the Local Service Processor
. . . . .
1-58
Transferring 3745 Engineering Data to MOSS-E
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-58
Logon on the Remote Service Processor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-58
Transferring Engineering Data to the Remote Service Processor
. . . . .
1-59
3745 Diagnostic Requirement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-60
Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance
. . . . . . . .
1-61
Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance 1-62
Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the
MOSS for Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-65
Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance
. . . . . .
1-66
Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for
Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-69
LIC/Line Address Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-73
3745 Control Panel Use
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-78
Purpose of the Control Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-78
Uses of the Control Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-78
Explanation of 3745 Panel Keys, LEDs, and Switches
. . . . . . . . . . . .
1-79
Power On Indicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-79
Control Panel Display Description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-79
How to Perform 3745 Control Panel Operations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-82
Power On Reset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-82
General IPL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-82
MOSS IML
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-82
MOSS Dump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-82
Request Local Console
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-83
Force Local Console
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-83
Panel Test and Console Link Tests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-83
Load from Diskette
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-83
Loop on MOSS Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-83
Display Stacked Errors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-83
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
IOC Bus MAPs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
3745 MOSS MAPs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
MAP 3200: MOSS Control Panel Code 001
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
MAP 3210: MOSS Control Panel Code 059
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
MAP 3220: Undefined Panel Message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
MAP 3230: Console Link Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
3745 Line Adapter MAPs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
iv
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line Errors on the TSS
. .
2-7
MAP 3520: Activate/Deactivate Ring Problems or Ring Errors on the TRSS 2-8
MAP 3530: Activate/Deactivate Line Problems or Line Errors on the
HPTSS/ESS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
3745 Channel MAPs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
MAP 3700: CA Isolation Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
3745 Power MAPs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
MAP 3900: Overcurrent on Power Supply 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
MAP 3905: Power ON Problem in Host Mode or Host Power Sequence
Problem
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
MAP 3910: Overcurrent on Power Supply 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
Power MAP 3920: Air Flow Detector Fault
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
Power MAP 3925: Scheduled Power on Problems
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem Problems
. . . . . . . . . .
2-21
Power MAP 3935: Power OFF not Possible in Host Mode
. . . . . . . . .
2-25
Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in Local Mode
. . . . . . . .
2-26
Power MAP 3950: PCC-Detected Error on MOSS Reset
. . . . . . . . . .
2-27
Power MAP 3960: Power OFF not Possible in Network Mode
. . . . . . .
2-28
Power MAP 3970: PCC-Detected Error on CCU Reset or on Remote
Power OFF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
3745 LAN MAP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
MAP 4500: 3745 Models 17A Permanent Console Link Problem
. . . . .
2-31
3745 Control Panel Code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
3745 RSF MAP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37
MAP 5200: 3745/3746-900/Service Processor/Network Node Processor
Icon Color Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37
MAP 5205: LAN Checking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-41
Service Processor MAPs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service Processor 2-42
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Diagnostic Description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3745 Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Errors During Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Diagnostic Monitoring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Checkout Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
CBA Diagnostic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
How to Run MOSS Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
How to Loop MOSS Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170
.
3-6
Local/Remote or Alternate/RSF Link Tests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
How to Run the Control Panel Test
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
How to Run Internal Function Tests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
How to Run the LIC Wrap Test with IFTs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900
. . . . . . .
3-15
Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16
Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
Available Wrap Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
How to Run the Channel Wrap Test
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Contents
v
Exchange Precautions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
List of 3745 FRUs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
FRU Physical Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
3745 Frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Basic Board, Cards, Connectors, and Crossovers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
LIC Board Type 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
LIC Board Type 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
LIC Board Type 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
DMUX and SMUX Packaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
LIC Board Type 1 Packaging for LICs Type 1 to 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (Low Speed)
. . . . . . . . .
4-19
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (High Speed)
. . . . . . . . .
4-20
LIC Board Type 3 Packaging for LIC Types 1 to 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
Ethernet Lines Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
High Speed Lines Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
Token-Ring Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
Channel Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
Console Operator Tailgate For 3745 Models 1X0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
Console Operator Tailgate for 3745 Model 17A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
EPO Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
3745 Control Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
Flexible Diskette Drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
Hard Disk Drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
Primary Power Box
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Power Supply 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
3745 Power Supply Cross Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
Power Supply 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-32
Fan 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
Fan 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
3745 FRU Exchange Procedures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
Card Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
DCREG Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-38
DMUX Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41
LIC Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-44
Control Panel Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-46
Battery Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-48
Fan 1 Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-50
Fan 2 Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-51
FDD Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-52
HDD Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-56
TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-61
TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-62
ESS Tailgate Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-64
PS1 Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-67
PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-69
EPO Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-73
Basic Board Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-77
LIC Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-84
LIC Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-88
MOSS Board Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-92
Channel Tailgate Exchange Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-96
vi
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange
. . . . . . . . . .
4-99
Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-99
CE Leaving Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-102
Appendix A. Maintenance Aids
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Contacting Support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Control Program Maintenance Aids
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
MOSS Microcode Maintenance Aids
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Scanner Microcode Maintenance Aids
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
Special Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
General Purpose Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
ESD Kit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-3
Shipping Group Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-4
PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance Aids for LIC 5 and 6
. . . . . .
A-5
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Service Personnel Definitions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Customer Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A) and 3746 (Model 900)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
Service Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A) and 3746 (Model 900)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-6
Related Signal Converter Product Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-9
Related NCP Service Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-10
World Wide Web
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-10
List of Abbreviations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-1
Glossary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-7
Contents
vii
viii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Figures
0-1.
3745/3746-900 Power Control Cable Routing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xx
0-2.
Ground Wire Connection on Controller Expansion
. . . . . . . . . . .
xxi
0-3.
Ground Wire Connection Between Attached Controller Expansions
.
xxii
0-4.
Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at Less than Six Meters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiii
0-5.
Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at More than Six Meters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiv
0-6.
Ground Pin on Mainline ac/dc Power Cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxv
0-7.
Ground Pin of the Controller Expansion ac Outlet Distribution Box
. .
xxv
0-8.
LCB Grounding Via Screws
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxvi
0-9.
LCB Grounding Via Ground Wire
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxvi
0-10.
Ground Wire Connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxvii
0-11.
Führung des Stromversorgungskabels bei der 3745/3746-900
. . .
xxxiii
0-12.
Schutzleiteranschluß an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
. . . . .
xxxiv
0-13.
Schutzleiteranschluß zwischen angeschlossenen Erweiterungen der
Steuereinheit.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxv
0-14.
Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand von weniger als 6 Meter zwischen den Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit
. . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxvi
0-15.
Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand über 6 Meter zwischen den
Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxvii
0-16.
Schutzleiterkontakt am Hauptstromversorgungskabel
. . . . . . . .
xxxviii
0-17.
Schutzleiterkontakt des Wechselstromverteilerkastens der
Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxviii
0-18.
Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schrauben
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxix
0-19.
Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schutzleiter
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxix
0-20.
Schutzleiteranschluß
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xl
0-21.
3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Back)
. . . . . . . . .
lvii
0-22.
3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Front)
. . . . . . . . .
lviii
0-23.
3746 Model 900 (Frame 07) Label Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lix
0-24.
LCB Safety Label Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lix
0-25.
3745/3746-900 Safety Labels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lx
0-26.
3745/3746-900 Safety Labels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxi
0-27.
LCB Safety Label (PN 80G3928)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxii
0-28.
Controller Expansion Power Rating Plate Location
. . . . . . . . . . .
lxii
1-1.
Reference Code Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-14
1-2.
TSS Service Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-63
1-3.
Select/Release Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-63
1-4.
Mode Control Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-64
1-5.
TSS/HPTSS/ESS Diagnostic Selection Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . .
1-64
1-6.
TRSS Service Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-67
1-7.
Select Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-67
1-8.
Connect/Disconnect Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-68
1-9.
TRSS Diagnostic Selection Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-68
1-10.
TSS/HPTSS Diagnostic Selection Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-72
1-11.
TSS Service Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-74
1-12.
Select/Release Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-74
1-13.
Mode Control Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-75
1-14.
LIC Types 1 and 4 Wrap Plug (PN 65X8927)
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-75
1-15.
LIC Type 3 Wrap Cable (PN 65X8928)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-75
1-16.
LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug (PN 11F4815)
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-76
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
ix
1-17.
LIC Types 1, 3, and 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-76
1-18.
LIC Types 5 and 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-77
1-19.
3745 Control Panel Layout
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-80
2-1.
Console Outputs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
2-2.
EPO Location 01S
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
2-3.
UEPO Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
2-4.
EPO Location 01S
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
2-5.
LAN Attached to the Service Processor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
3-1.
CBA Diagnostic Coverage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-2.
Console Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
3-3.
Cable Configurations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3-4.
Maintenance Functions Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
3-5.
How to Select Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
3-6.
How to Enter Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
3-7.
Error Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
3-8.
LICs Type 1 and 4 (Wrap Plug PN 65X8927)
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
3-9.
LIC Type 3 (Wrap Cable PN 65X8928)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
3-10.
LIC Types 1, 3, and 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
3-11.
LICs Type 5 and 6 (Wrap Plug PN 11F4815)
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
3-12.
LIC Types 5 and 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
4-1.
3745 Frame (Front)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
4-2.
3745 Frame (Back)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4-3.
Card Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
4-4.
3745 Model 17X Basic Board (without TPS, HPTSS, or ESS)
. . . . .
4-6
4-5.
3745 Model 17X (Basic Board with TPS and HPTSS or ESS)
. . . .
4-7
4-6.
3745 Model 130 (Basic Board with TPS)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
4-7.
3745 Model 150 (Basic Board)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
4-8.
3745 Model 160 (Basic Board)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
4-9.
3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170 (MOSS Board, Cards, and
Connectors)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4-10.
3745 Model 17A (MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors)
. . . . . .
4-12
4-11.
3745 LIC Unit Type 1 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and
4 in Models 150, 160, and 170)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
4-12.
3745 LIC Unit Type 2 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 5 and 6 in Models 150 and 170)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
4-13.
3745 LIC Unit Type 3 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and
4 in Model 150)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
4-14.
3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
4-15.
3745 LIC Board 01M-A1 Packaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
4-16.
3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17
4-17.
3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 5)
. . . . . . . . . .
4-18
4-18.
3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC type 5)
. . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
4-19.
3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)
. . .
4-19
4-20.
3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)
. . .
4-19
4-21.
3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed)
. . . .
4-20
4-22.
3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed)
. . . .
4-20
4-23.
3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
4-24.
3745 Ethernet Lines Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
4-25.
3745 High-Speed Lines Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
4-26.
3745 Token-Ring Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
4-27.
3745 Channel Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
4-28.
3745 Channel Tailgate Details. For more details see YZ052 Sheet
2.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
4-29.
3745 Models 1X0 Console Operator Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
x
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
4-30.
3745 Models 17A Console Operator Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
4-31.
3745 EPO
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27
4-32.
3745 Control Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
4-33.
3745 Flexible Diskette Drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
4-34.
3745 Hard Disk Drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-29
4-35.
3745 Primary Power Box Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
4-36.
3745 Power Supply 1 Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
4-37.
3745 Power Supply 2 Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-32
4-38.
3745 Fan 1 Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
4-39.
3745 Fan 2 Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-33
4-40.
CB1 Location.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
4-41.
Covers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
4-42.
Shipping Springs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
4-43.
Channel Tailgate Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
4-44.
Select Out Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
4-45.
Basic Board and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-38
4-46.
Location of the LIC Boards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
4-47.
DMUX Cover
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
4-48.
DMUX Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-40
4-49.
DMUX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-40
4-50.
Location of the LIC Boards Type 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41
4-51.
SMUX Cover
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41
4-52.
SMUX Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-42
4-53.
SMUX Link and Cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-42
4-54.
Location of the LIC Boards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-44
4-55.
LIC 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-44
4-56.
LIC Board Type 1 and 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-45
4-57.
LIC Board Type 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-45
4-58.
Panel, MOSS, and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-46
4-59.
MOSS Right Cover
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-46
4-60.
Panel Cable Location on MOSS Board
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-47
4-61.
Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-47
4-62.
Panel Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-48
4-63.
Battery Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-48
4-64.
Power Services Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-49
4-65.
Acknowledge Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-49
4-66.
Fan 1 and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-50
4-67.
Fan 1 Air Flow Detector and Power Cables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-50
4-68.
Fan 2 and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-51
4-69.
Fan 2 Air Flow Detector and Power Cables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-51
4-70.
FDD and CB1 Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-52
4-71.
PS1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-53
4-72.
MOSS Covers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-54
4-73.
FDD Removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-54
4-74.
FDD Connectors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-55
4-75.
HDD and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-56
4-76.
HDD Removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-57
4-77.
New Type of HDD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-58
4-78.
HDD Installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-58
4-79.
HDD Connectors and Jumpers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-60
4-80.
HDD Connectors and Jumpers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-60
4-81.
Basic Board and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-61
4-82.
CB1 Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-62
4-83.
Basic Board Grid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-62
Figures
xi
4-84.
Terminator Card Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-62
4-85.
CB1 Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-64
4-86.
ESS Tailgate Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-64
4-87.
ESS Tailgate and Basic board
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-65
4-88.
ESS Cables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-65
4-89.
EAC Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-65
4-90.
Power Supply 1 (PS1) and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-67
4-91.
Power Supply 1 (PS1) Cover
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-67
4-92.
Primary Power Box
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-68
4-93.
Power Supply 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-68
4-94.
Primary Power Box, Power Supply 2, and CB1 Locations
. . . . . .
4-69
4-95.
Cable Locations on Primary Power Box
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-70
4-96.
PS2 in Primary Power Box
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-70
4-97.
PS2 and Primary Power Box Assembly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-71
4-98.
Primary Power Box and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-73
4-99.
EPO Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-73
4-100.
Cables on Primary Power Box
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-74
4-101.
Primary Power Box and PS2 Cover Removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-74
4-102.
EPO Assembly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-75
4-103.
Basic Board, MOSS Board, and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . .
4-77
4-104.
Basic Board and MOSS Covers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-78
4-105.
Basic Board Grid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-78
4-106.
FDS and Multivoltage Cable Locations on the PS1
. . . . . . . . . .
4-78
4-107.
Fan2 Air Flow Detector and Power Connectors
. . . . . . . . . . . .
4-79
4-108.
MOSS to Basic Cable Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-79
4-109.
Basic Board Enclosure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-79
4-110.
Basic Board Cables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-80
4-111.
Basic Assembly 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-81
4-112.
Basic Assembly 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-82
4-113.
Y and Z Rows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-83
4-114.
CB1 Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-84
4-115.
LIC Board Type 1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-84
4-116.
DMUX Cover
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-85
4-117.
LIC Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-86
4-118.
LIC Board Assembly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-87
4-119.
CB1 Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-88
4-120.
SMUX Cover
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-88
4-121.
LIC Board Type 2 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-89
4-122.
SMUX Link and Cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-89
4-123.
LIC Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-90
4-124.
LIC Board Assembly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-90
4-125.
MOSS Board and CB1 Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-92
4-126.
MOSS Board Covers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-92
4-127.
MOSS Board Cards and Cables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-93
4-128.
MOSS Board Enclosure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-94
4-129.
CB1 Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-96
4-130.
Select Out Switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-96
4-131.
Channel Tailgate and Basic Board Grid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-97
4-132.
Channel Tailgate, Cables, and Basic Board
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-97
xii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Tables
0-1.
Part Numbers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxviii
0-2.
ac Input Adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxviii
0-3.
LED Status Versus 3746-900 States
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxx
0-4.
3745 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . .
xxx
0-5.
Teilenummern
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xli
0-6.
Einstellung der Spannung des Wechselstromeingangs
. . . . . . . . .
xli
0-7.
Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900
. . . . . . . .
xlii
0-8.
Stromversorgung der 3745, Sicherungsautomaten (CB),
Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und Sicherungen (F)
. . . . . . . . . .
xliii
0-9.
Safety Label Numbers by Country
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lxiii
1-1.
General Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
1-2.
3745 Console Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
1-3.
Control Panel Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
1-4.
Power Symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
1-5.
Panel Codes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
1-6.
3745 FRU Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-49
1-7.
3745 Cable Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-52
1-8.
3745 Diagnostic Requirements
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-60
1-9.
Diagnostic Selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-65
1-10.
Panel Display Values
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-81
2-1.
Wrap plug PN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
2-2.
3745 Control Panel Code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
2-3.
Icons Color Selection Table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
3-1.
Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly A and ARC Assembly B (with
Cable)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
3-2.
Wrap Plugs for LIC Testing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
3-3.
Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly B (without Cable)
. . . . . .
3-22
4-1.
TIC Position and Ring Address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
4-2.
Basic Board Configurations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
4-3.
DMUX Packaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
4-4.
SMUX Packaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
4-5.
3745 Ethernet Line Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
4-6.
3745 High-Speed Line Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-23
4-7.
3745 Token-ring Line Locations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
4-8.
Channel Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
4-9.
3745 Power Supply Cross Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
4-10.
Select Out Switches According to CADR Cards
. . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
4-11.
Voltage Test Points
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-53
B-1.
Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746
Model 900
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
B-2.
Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746
Model 900
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-6
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
xiii
xiv
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Notices
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates.
Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM's intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service.
Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, except those expressly designated by IBM, is the user's responsibility.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of
Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, New York 10594,
U.S.A.
European Union (EU) Statement
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM can not accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.
Electronic Emission Notices
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
xv
Industry Canada Compliance Statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
Avis de conformité aux normes d'Industrie Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Japanese Voluntary Control Council For Interference (VCCI) Statement
This equipment is in the 1st Class category (information equipment to be used in commercial and/or industrial areas) and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment aimed at preventing radio interference in commercial and industrial areas.
Consequently, when used in a residential area or in an adjacent area thereto, radio interference may be caused to radios and TV receivers, and so on.
Read the instructions for correct handling.
Korean Communications Statement
Please note that this device has been approved for business purpose with regard to electromagnetic interference. If you find this is not suitable for your use, you may exchange it for a non-business one.
New Zealand Radiocommunications (Radio) Regulations
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Trademarks and Service Marks
The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*), used in this publication, are trademarks or service marks of IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries:
ESCON
NetView
IBM
RETAIN
OS/2
The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**), used in this publication, are trademarks of other companies:
Hayes
Tektronix
Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
Tektronix, Incorporated.
xvi
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Product Safety Information
General Safety
Safety
This product meets IBM safety standards.
For more information, see the following manual:
IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Models
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950
Safety Information, GA33-0400.
Service Inspection Safety Procedures
Service Inspection Safety Procedures for the 3745, 3746-900, and Controller Expansion -
English
Sicherheitsüberprüfungen für IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit -
Deutsch xviii xxxi xliii
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
xvii
Safety
Service Inspection Safety Procedures for the 3745, 3746-900, and
Controller Expansion
Important
This procedure addresses the 3745, 3746-900, and the controller expansion. If one of these machines is not present, ignore the statement concerning this machine in the following procedure.
Introduction
A safety inspection procedure for the 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion should be performed:
When it is inspected for an IBM agreement
When IBM service is requested and no service has recently been performed by IBM
When an alterations and attachments review is performed
When changes have been made to the equipment that might affect its safety.
If the inspection indicates unacceptable safety conditions, the conditions must be corrected before IBM services the machine.
Note: The correction of any unsafe condition is the responsibility of the owner of the equipment.
The 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion areas and functions checked through these procedures are:
1. External covers
2. Safety labels
3. Safety covers and shields
4. Grounding (earthing)
5. Circuit breaker and protector rating
6. Input power voltage
7. Power control switch
8. Power ON indicator.
Note: The 3746-900 is powered ON and OFF through the basic 3745 frame, from a host, locally, or from the service processor.
Hazardous voltages are still present in some areas of the 3745 and the 3746-900 when power is
OFF.
Steps 1 through 6 must be performed after power OFF as follows:
CB1s are switched OFF on the 3745 and 3746-900.
All equipment installed in the controller expansion (if present) is powered OFF.
Power supplies for the 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion at customer's premises are switched OFF.
Do not remove the power cord and ground strap
.A/
of the controller expansion in order to maintain the ground protection (see Figure 0-2 on page xxi, Figure 0-3 on page xxii, Figure 0-4 on page xxiii, or Figure 0-5 on page xxiv).
1
External Covers
Check that:
They are all present on the 3745, 3746-900, and controller expansion.
They are locked with two kinds of locks: flat blade screw for the IBM access area and hex head for the customer access area (refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models 130 to
17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012).
They can be fully opened.
xviii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Appropriate service clearance and access are provided around the frames with external covers opened.
Leave all external covers opened to allow further safety inspection steps.
2
Safety Labels
Check that:
All the safety labels are at the places indicated by letters in “Safety Label Locations” on page lvii.
Each label is of the model corresponding to the letter as shown in “3745/3746-900 Safety Label
Identifications” on page lx.
3
Safety Covers and Shields
Referring to the FRU location (Chapter 4), check that:
All the safety covers are present and secured with screws.
All the voltage terminal boards (TBs) are protected by a plastic shield screwed on top of the TB.
4
Grounding (Earthing)
Note
In this book, "ground" means that the equipment must be connected to the earth.
a
Grounding on the 3745
Refer to YZ110 for grounding jumper/contact locations.
.
Check that:
Electrical continuity is assured between the frame ground and the terminals indicated on the ground distribution diagrams.
Electrical continuity is assured between the 3745, frame grounds, and to the premises grounding system, through the 3745 power cord.
b
Grounding on the 3746-900 and Controller Expansion to the Premises Grounding
System
Electrical continuity is assured between their frame ground and premises grounding system through their power cords.
The 3746-900 is grounded to the 3745 via the power control cable (see Figure 0-1 on page xx).
For the controller expansion, an additional ground wire
.A/
is also used (see Figure 0-2 on page xxi, Figure 0-3 on page xxii, Figure 0-4 on page xxiii, or Figure 0-5 on page xxiv).
1
3745/3746-900 Power Control Cable
Check that the power ground cable is correctly connected in the 3745
.D/
and in the
3746-900
.C/
.
Safety
xix
Safety
Figure 0-1. 3745/3746-900 Power Control Cable Routing
Notes:
a)
.D/
Lock washer (PN 17G5853) and nut (PN 1622404).
b)
.C/
Screw (PN 61F4511), star washer (PN 17G5852), and lock washer
(PN 1622318).
2
Controller Expansion Ground Wire Cable
If you have only one controller expansion installed, check that the ground wire
.A/
is installed (see Figure 0-2 on page xxi).
If you have several controller expansions installed, check that the ground wires
.A/ are installed according to your configuration (see Figure 0-3 on page xxii,
Figure 0-4 on page xxiii, or Figure 0-5 on page xxiv).
xx
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Figure 0-2. Ground Wire Connection on Controller Expansion
Safety
xxi
Safety
Controller
Expansion
Detail
B
Screw M5
Lock Washer
Star Washer
A
B
B
B
A
A
To Permanent Connection of Building Ground
(Protective Earthing)
Figure 0-3. Ground Wire Connection Between Attached Controller Expansions
xxii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Figure 0-4. Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at Less than Six Meters
Safety
xxiii
Safety
Figure 0-5. Ground Wire Connection Between Controller Expansions at More than Six Meters
Notes:
a)
.A/
Ground wire (PN 58G5691) b)
.B/
Screw (PN 61F4513), star washer (PN 1622347) or (PN 17G5853), and lock washer (PN 1622319).
3
ac/dc Power Cable Ground Wire
Check the mainline ac/dc power cable for damaged or burned pins and broken insulation.
Measure the resistance of the disconnected mainline ac/dc power cable from ground pin on one end to the ground pin on the other end.
The measurement should be 0.1 ohm or less.
xxiv
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Ground Pin
Figure 0-6. Ground Pin on Mainline ac/dc Power Cable
c
Internal Grounding in the 3746-900 and Controller Expansion
On the 3746-900
Check that electrical continuity is assured between the LCB housing and 3746-900 frame, if LCBs are present. This operation must be performed before any network connection.
On the Controller Expansion
Check that electrical continuity is assured between each machine installed in the controller expansion (service processor, network node processor, modem, optical disk drive, and so on) and the ground pin of the ac outlet distribution box (see Figure 0-7).
Check that electrical continuity is assured between the ground pin of the ac outlet distribution box and the controller expansion mount frame.
Ground Pin
Figure 0-7. Ground Pin of the Controller Expansion ac Outlet Distribution Box
Check that electrical continuity is assured between the LCB housing and the controller expansion frame, if LCBs are present. This operation must be performed before any network connection (see Figure 0-8 on page xxvi).
Note: All the previous measurements should indicate 0.1 ohm or less.
d
Grounding of Line Connection Boxes (LCBs) not Installed in the 3746-900 or Controller
Expansion
Check that electrical continuity is assured between the LCB housing and the premises grounding system.
There are two ways to ensure proper grounding of the LCB depending on where it is installed:
1) Grounding is ensured by the four screws which secure the LCB on the rack if the frame of the rack is connected to the premises ground system.
Safety
xxv
Safety
Screws for
Grounding
Front View
Figure 0-8. LCB Grounding Via Screws
2) Grounding is ensured by a wire connected from the LCB to the premises ground system.
Bottom View Ground
Wire
To Premises
Grounding
System
Figure 0-9. LCB Grounding Via Ground Wire
IBM does not provide this wire. In order to ensure correct grounding, this ground wire must be made using a wire AWG 12 (minimum 2.5 square millimeters).
Screw: 5 mm in diameter, length from 6 to 10 mm (refer to Figure 0-10 on page xxvii).
Connection of Ground Wire to LCB
xxvi
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Figure 0-10. Ground Wire Connection
This operation must be performed before any network connection.
Note: All the previous measurements should indicate 0.1 ohm or less.
e
Building Grounding
Check that there is less than 1 V ac between the metal housings of plugs, connectors, receptacles, and so on., and any grounded point in the building. This can be any grounded metal structure, such as the stanchions of a raised floor (if they are electrically connected to building ground), a metal water pipe, building steel, and so
on.
Notes:
1) When probing a painted metal part, ensure that the meter probe tip penetrates the paint.
2) Also check plugs of incoming cables.
5
Circuit Breaker and Protector Rating
Refer to Table 0-4 on page xxx for CB and CP locations.
Check that:
All CBs and CPs in the 3745 and 3746-900 are rated at the indicated value in Table 0-4 on page xxx. If the rating is not indicated, check the part number against one of the following:
– IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models 130 to 17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012
– IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900, Parts Catalog, S135-2013
– IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950, Parts Catalog, S135-2015.
The fuses in the controller expansion ac outlet distribution box must be 7 A, 250 V slow
(PN 58G5782).
6
Input Power Voltage
The power rating plate indicates the voltage range available (200/220/240) and the frequency
(50/60 Hz).
3745 Input Power voltage
The voltage label (label J) indicates the input voltage for which the 3745 is wired. This information must be in accordance with Switch 1 on PS2.
Performing a power conversion Inspection.
A power conversion inspection must be performed on any 3745 Communication Controller that has been converted from 50 Hz to 60 Hz, or from 60 Hz to 50 Hz.
The following is used only for the primary power box. Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 for location.
Check Table 0-1 on page xxviii for the correct part numbers for the specified 50 Hz or 60 Hz use. In case of discrepancy, contact your support structure.
Safety
xxvii
Safety
Table 0-1. Part Numbers
Frequencies
50 Hz
60 Hz
Part Numbers
PN 03F4745
PN 03F4569
Refer to Figure 0-21 on page lvii for voltage label and power rating plate location, and to page
YZ060, sheet 1 for the PS2 box voltage adjustment by SW1.
Check that:
The power rating plate and the voltage label of the 3745 are consistent with the frequency and the voltage measured at the customer's power supply. If they are inconsistent, inform your branch office.
3746-900 Input Power voltage
The power rating plate indicates the voltage range available (200/220/240) and the frequency
(50/60&rlb.Hz).
The 3746-900 voltage range is 200/220/240.
Check that:
The power rating plate of the 3746-900 is consistent with the frequency and the voltage measured at the customer's power supply. If they are inconsistent inform your branch office. Refer to
“3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx for the power rating plate location.
dc Input Voltage
For dc input, the customer's voltage must be within -40.0 V to -60.0 V. There is no adjustment for the optional dc input.
ac Input Voltage
For ac input, the customer's voltage must be within 180 V to 260 V.
Adjustment of the input voltage can be done according to the customer voltage on TB1 of the transformers located at the rear of the 3746-900.
Table 0-2. ac Input Adjustment
Voltage
Measured
From 180 to 210 Volts
From 210 to 230 Volts
From 230 to 260 Volts
Wire
Position
TB1-2
TB1-3
TB1-4
Nominal
Voltage
200/208 Volts
220 Volts
240 Volts
Important Note:
Since the 3745 can be remotely powered ON, all the following procedures must be performed with the power control function on the 3745 and the 3746-900 control panel set to local mode.
Controller Expansion Input Power Voltage
The power rating plate indicates the voltage range available (200/240) and the frequency (50/60 Hz).
Check that the power rating plate of the controller expansion is consistent with the frequency and the voltage measured at the customer's power supply. If they are inconsistent inform your branch office.
Refer to “Controller Expansion Label Location” on page lxii for power rating plate location.
7
Test of the Emergency Power OFF
xxviii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
a. Ask the customer to connect the power cord to the customer's mains supply.
b. Put CB1 ON.
c. Power ON the 3745 and the 3746-900 (power control function to Local on the control panel).
d. Operate the EMERGENCY switch to POWER OFF (O) and check that:
1) The 3745 and the 3746-900 are powered OFF.
Note
In the 3746-900, the primary powers (ACDC) or filters section (DCDC) stay energized.
For total disconnection:
1. Turn the CBs OFF.
2. Remove all the power plugs from supply outlets or shutdown the installation.
2) The diskette and disk drives are stopped.
3) All the fans are stopped.
e. Relatch the EMERGENCY switch, then power ON the controller.
8
Power ON Indicator
Once the controller is powered ON, check that: a. The Power ON indicator on the 3745 control panel is lit.
b. The Ready LED and the Standby LED (on the 3746-900 control panel) are lit according to the table shown in “Control Panel LED Status Versus 3746-900 States” on page xxx.
Safety
xxix
Safety
Control Panel LED Status Versus 3746-900 States
Table 0-3. LED Status Versus 3746-900 States
Standby
LED
Ready LED 3746-900
State
Blinking OFF AC ON
Comment
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Blinking
ON
Standby
Power ON
Ready
Initialization of the CBSP hardware, and the 3746-900 waits for first recognition by the MOSS-E on LAN connection.
The 3746-900, initially recognized by the MOSS-E, waits for a power ON condition (only the CBSP EEPROM code is running).
IML loading in all 3746-900 processors.
The 3746-900 is now available.
3745/3746-900 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference
Table 0-4. 3745 Power Supply CP/CB and Fuse Reference
Frame CB/CP/F Location
Frame 1 CB1 01H-A1
CP2
CP3
F1
01H-A1
01H-B1
01H-B1
Frame 7:
3746-900
CB1 AC
CB1 DC
CP1
CP2
CP3
CP4
CP5
07K-A1/07J-A1
07J-A1
07K-A1/07J-A1
07H-A1
07H-A1
07H-A1
07H-A1
Rating
10 A
1,5 A
2 A
0.2 A
15 A/220 V
50 A
5 A
12 A
12 A
12 A
12 A
PS
ALL
PS2
Fans
PS2
ac Power
dc Power
dc Power
dc Power
dc Power
dc Power
dc Power
Controller Expansion Fuse Reference
The ac outlet distribution box of the controller expansion contains two fuses: 7 A 250 V slow.
xxx
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Sicherheitsüberprüfungen für IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
Wichtige Informationen
Dieses Verfahren bezieht sich auf IBM 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit. Sollte eine dieser Maschinen nicht vorhanden sein, die diesbezügliche Anweisung im folgenden Verfahren ignorieren.
Einführung
Sicherheitsprüfungen für 3745, 3746-900 und die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit sind in folgenden
Fällen erforderlich:
Bei einer Prüfung nach Absprache mit IBM
Wenn eine IBM Wartungsleistung angefordert wird und in der letzten Zeit keine Wartung durch IBM durchgeführt worden war.
Wenn Änderungen am Gerät oder Anschlüsse überprüft werden.
Wenn Änderungen am Gerät vorgenommen worden sind, die möglicherweise die Sicherheit beeinträchtigen.
Wenn bei der Überprüfung ein unzureichender Sicherheitszustand festgestellt wird, müssen die Mängel behoben werden, bevor IBM das Gerät wartet.
Anmerkung: Für die Behebung von Sicherheitsmängeln ist der Besitzer des Geräts verantwortlich.
Folgende Bereiche und Funktionen der 3745, 3746-900 und der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit werden geprüft:
1. Äußere Abdeckungen
2. Sicherheitsaufkleber
3. Sicherheitsabdeckungen
4. Erdung
5. Sicherungsautomat und Überstromschutzschalter
6. Netzeingangsspannung
7. Netzkontrollschalter
8. Betriebsanzeige
Anmerkung: Die IBM 3746-900 wird über den Grundrahmen der IBM 3745, von einem Host, lokal oder vom Serviceprozessor aus ein- und ausgeschaltet.
Auch nach dem Ausschalten liegt in einigen Bereichen der 3745 und 3746-900 eine gefährliche
Spannung an.
Vor der Ausführung der Schritte 1-6 muß die Stromzufuhr wie folgt unterbrochen werden:
Die Sicherungsautomaten (CB1) der 3745 und 3746-900 ausschalten (Stellung: OFF).
Alle Geräte in der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit (wenn vorhanden) ausschalten.
Stromversorgungen der 3745, 3746-900 und der controller expansion beim Kunden ausschalten
Netzkabel und Schutzleiter
.A/
der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit nicht entfernen, damit die Erdung gewährleistet ist (siehe Figure 0-12 on page xxxiv, Figure 0-13 on page xxxv, Figure 0-14 on page xxxvi bzw. Figure 0-15 on page xxxvii).
1
Äußere Abdeckungen
Prüfen, ob
Safety
xxxi
Safety
alle äußeren Abdeckungen an der 3745, 3746-900 und an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit angebracht sind.
die äußeren Abdeckungen auf zwei Arten verschlossen sind: mit Schlitzschrauben im IBM
Zugriffsbereich und mit Sechskantschrauben im Zugriffsbereich des Kunden (siehe IBM 3745
Communication Controller Models 130 to 17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012).
die Abdeckungen vollständig geöffnet werden können.
um die Rahmen genügend Raum und Zugänge für Wartungsarbeiten sind, wenn die äußeren
Abdeckungen geöffnet sind.
Alle äußeren Abdeckungen für weitere Überprüfungen offen lassen.
2
Sicherheitsaufkleber
Prüfen, ob
sich alle Sicherheitsaufkleber an den mit Buchstaben gekennzeichneten Stellen befinden, wie unter “Safety Label Locations” on page lvii beschrieben.
die Aufkleber dem jeweiligen Buchstaben gemäß “3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx entsprechen.
3
Sicherheitsabdeckungen
Bezüglich des Standorts der durch den Kundendienst austauschbaren Funktionseinheit (Kapitel 4) prüfen, ob
alle Sicherheitsabdeckungen vorhanden und mit Schrauben gesichert sind.
alle Spannungsklemmleisten durch eine Plastikabdeckung an der Oberseite der Klemmleiste geschützt sind.
4
Erdung
Hinweis
Im vorliegenden Handbuch bedeutet "erden", daß das Gerät mit der Schutzerdung verbunden werden muß.
a
Erdung der 3745
Positionen der Erdungsbrücken/Kontakte siehe YZ110.
.
Prüfen, ob
der elektrische Durchgang zwischen der Rahmenerdung und den Anschlüssen, die
auf den Schemazeichnungen für Erdung eingezeichnet sind, sichergestellt ist .
der elektrische Durchgang zwischen 3745, den Rahmenerdungen und dem Erdungssystem des Gebäudes durch das Netzkabel der 3745 sichergestellt wird.
b
Schutzleiterverbindung der 3746-900 und der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit an das
Erdungssystem des Gebäudes
Der elektrische Durchgang zwischen der Rahmenerdung und dem Erdungssystem des
Gebäudes wird über die Netzkabel sichergestellt.
Die 3746-900 wird über das Stromversorgungskabel an der 3745 geerdet (siehe
Figure 0-11 on page xxxiii).
Bei der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit wird zusätzlich ein Schutzleiter
.A/
verwendet (siehe
Figure 0-12 on page xxxiv, Figure 0-13 on page xxxv, Figure 0-14 on page xxxvi bzw.
Figure 0-15 on page xxxvii).
1
Stromversorgungskabel für 3745/3746-900
Prüfen, ob der Schutzleiter des Stromversorgungskabels ordnungsgemäß an die 3745
(
.D/
) und die 3746-900 (
.C/
) angeschlossen ist.
xxxii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
D
3746
3745
Hinteransicht
3745
C
Vorderansicht
3746
Figure 0-11. Führung des Stromversorgungskabels bei der 3745/3746-900
Anmerkungen:
a)
.D/
Sicherungsring (Teilenummer 17G5853) und Mutter (Teilenummer 1622404).
b)
.C/
Schraube (Teilenummer 61F4511), Zahnscheibe (Teilenummer 17G5852) und
Sicherungsring (Teilenummer 1622318)
2
Schutzleiter für die Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
Wenn nur eine Erweiterung der Steuereinheit installiert ist, prüfen, ob der
Schutzleiter
.A/
angeschlossen ist (siehe Figure 0-12 on page xxxiv).
Wenn mehrere Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit installiert sind, prüfen, ob die
Schutzleiter
.A/
gemäß Konfiguration angebracht wurden (siehe Figure 0-13 on page xxxv, Figure 0-14 on page xxxvi bzw. Figure 0-15 on page xxxvii).
Safety
xxxiii
Safety
Figure 0-12. Schutzleiteranschluß an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
xxxiv
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Figure 0-13. Schutzleiteranschluß zwischen angeschlossenen Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit.
Safety
xxxv
Safety
Figure 0-14. Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand von weniger als 6 Meter zwischen den Erweiterungen der
Steuereinheit
xxxvi
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Figure 0-15. Schutzleiteranschluß bei einem Abstand über 6 Meter zwischen den Erweiterungen der Steuereinheit
Anmerkungen:
a)
.A/
Schutzleiter (Teilenummer 58G5691) b)
.B/
Schraube (Teilenummer 61F4513), Zahnscheibe (Teilenummer 1622347) oder
(Teilenummer 17G5853) und Sicherungsring (Teilenummer 1622319).
3
Schutzleiter des AC/DC Stromversorgungskabels
Hauptstromversorgungskabel auf beschädigte oder verbrannte Kontakte und beschädigte Isolierung prüfen.
Den Widerstand des nicht angeschlossenen Hauptstromversorgungskabels zwischen dem Schutzleiterkontakt am einen und dem Schutzleiterkontakt am anderen Ende messen.
Der Widerstand darf maximal 0,1 Ohm betragen.
Safety
xxxvii
Safety
Figure 0-16. Schutzleiterkontakt am Hauptstromversorgungskabel
c
Interne Erdung in der 3746-900 und der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
An der 3746-900
Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Gehäuse des Verteilerkastens und dem Rahmen der 3746-900 gewährleistet ist, sofern Verteilerkästen vorhanden sind.
Dieser Schritt muß vor dem Anschluß von Signalkabeln erfolgen.
An der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen allen in der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit installierten Einheiten (Serviceprozessor, Netzknotenprozessor, Modem, optisches
Plattenlaufwerk usw.) und dem Schutzleiterkontakt des Wechselstromverteilerkastens gewährleistet ist (siehe Figure 0-17).
Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Schutzleiterkontakt des
Wechselstromverteilerkastens und dem Montagerahmen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit gewährleistet ist.
Figure 0-17. Schutzleiterkontakt des Wechselstromverteilerkastens der Erweiterung der
Steuereinheit
Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Gehäuse des Verteilerkastens und dem Rahmen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit gewährleistet ist, sofern Verteilerkästen vorhanden sind. Dieser Schritt muß vor dem Anschluß von Signalkabeln erfolgen (siehe
Figure 0-18 on page xxxix).
Anmerkung: Bei allen vorherigen Prüfungen sollten maximal 0,1 Ohm gemessen werden.
d
Erdung der nicht in der 3746-900 oder in der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit installierten
Verteilerkästen
Prüfen, ob der elektrische Durchgang zwischen dem Gehäuse des Verteilerkastens und dem
Erdungssystem des Gebäudes gewährleistet ist.
Je nach Installationsort kann der Verteilerkasten auf zweierlei Arten geerdet werden:
1) Erdung über die vier Schrauben, mit denen der Verteilerkasten am Gehäuse befestigt ist, falls der Gehäuserahmen mit dem Erdungssystem des Gebäudes verbunden ist.
xxxviii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Figure 0-18. Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schrauben
2) Erdung über einen Schutzleiter, der den Verteilerkasten mit dem Erdungssystem des
Gebäudes verbindet.
Figure 0-19. Erdung des Verteilerkastens über Schutzleiter
IBM liefert diesen Schutzleiter nicht mit. Der Schutzleiter muß aus einem
AWG12-Leiter (mind. 2,5 mm2) bestehen, damit eine korrekte Erdung gewährleistet ist.
Schraube: Durchmesser 5 mm, Länge 6 bis 10 mm (siehe Figure 0-20 on page xl).
Verbindung des Schutzleiters mit dem Verteilerkasten
Safety
xxxix
Safety
Figure 0-20. Schutzleiteranschluß
Dieser Schritt muß vor dem Anschluß von Signalkabeln erfolgen.
Anmerkung: Bei allen vorherigen Prüfungen sollten maximal 0,1 Ohm gemessen werden.
e
Gebäudeerdung
Sicherstellen, daß zwischen den Metallgehäusen von Steckern, Buchsen usw. und jeder geerdeten Stelle im Gebäude eine Wechselspannung von weniger als 1 V anliegt. Dies kann jedes geerdete Metallteil sein, wie z.B. die Stützen eines
Doppelbodens (wenn sie mit dem Gebäudeerder verbunden sind), ein metallisches
Wasserrohr, Baustahl usw..
Anmerkungen:
1) Beim Prüfen an einem lackierten Metallteil sicherstellen, daß die Prüfspitze die Farbe durchbohrt.
2) Stecker der anzuschließenden Kabel ebenfalls prüfen.
5
Sicherungsautomat und Überstromschutzschalter
Positionen der Sicherungsautomaten (CB) und Überstromschutzschalter (CP) siehe Table 0-8 on page xliii.
Prüfen, ob
alle Sicherungsautomaten und Überstromschutzschalter in der 3745 und 3746-900 die unter
Table 0-8 on page xliii angegebene Leistung haben. Wenn die Leistung nicht aufgeführt ist, die
Teilenummer in einem der folgenden Kataloge prüfen:
– IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models 130 to 17A, Parts Catalog, S135-2012
– IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900, Parts Catalog, S135-2013
– IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950, Parts Catalog, S135-2015.
Bei den Sicherungen im Wechselstromverteilerkasten der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit muß es sich um träge Sicherungen mit 7 A, 250 V handeln (Teilenummer 58G5782).
6
Eingangsspannung
Der zulässige Spannungsbereich (200/220/240V) und die Frequenz (50/60 Hz) sind dem
Typenschild zu entnehmen.
Eingangsspannung an der 3745
Der Aufkleber für die Versorgungsspannungen (Aufkleber J) gibt die Eingangsspannung für die 3745 an. Die Angaben müssen Schalter 1 an PS2 entsprechen.
Stromumwandlung prüfen
Die Stromumwandlung muß bei jeder DFV-Steuereinheit IBM 3745 geprüft werden, die von 50
Hz auf 60 Hz oder von 60 Hz auf 50 Hz umgerichtet wurde.
Folgendes bezieht sich ausschließlich auf das Netzspannungsgehäuse. Die Position kann
Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 entnommen werden.
Die entsprechenden Teilenummern für die Verwendung bei 50 oder 60 Hz sind Table 0-5 on page xli zu entnehmen. Bei Unstimmigkeiten das KD-Unterstützungspersonal benachrichtigen.
xl
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Table 0-5. Teilenummern
Frequenzen
50 Hz
60 Hz
Teilenummern
03F4745
03F4569
Die Positionen des Auflebers für die Versorungsspannungen und des Typenschildes sind
Figure 0-21 on page lvii zu entnehmen. Informationen zur Spannung?? im Netzteil PS-2 durch
SW1 siehe Seite YZ060, Blatt 1.
Prüfen, ob
die Angaben auf dem Typenschild und dem Spannungsaufkleber der 3745 mit der an der
Netzstromversorgung des Kunden gemessenen Frequenz und Spannung übereinstimmen.
Wenn dies nicht der Fall ist, zuständige Geschäftsstelle informieren.
Eingangsspannung an der 3746-900
Der zulässige Spannungsbereich (200/220/240V) und die Frequenz (50/60 Hz) sind dem
Typenschild zu entnehmen.
Der Spannungsbereich für die 3746-900 liegt bei 200/220/240V.
Prüfen, ob
die Angaben auf dem Typenschild an der 3746-900 mit der am Netzteil des Kunden gemessenen Spannung und Frequenz übereinstimmen. Wenn dies nicht der Fall ist, zuständige
Geschäftsstelle informieren. Die Position des Typenschildes ist “3745/3746-900 Safety Label
Identifications” on page lx zu entnehmen.
Spannung am Gleichstromeingang
Am Gleichstromeingang muß die Spannung beim Kunden zwischen -40,0 V und -60,0 V liegen.
Der optionale Gleichstromeingang kann nicht eingestellt werden.
Spannung am Wechselstromeingang
Am Wechselstromeingang muß die Spannung beim Kunden zwischen 180 V und 260 V liegen.
Die Einstellung der Eingangsspannung gemäß der Spannung beim Kunden kann an der
Klemmleiste 1 der Transformatoren an der Rückseite der 3746-900 erfolgen.
Table 0-6. Einstellung der Spannung des Wechselstromeingangs
Gemessene
Spannung
Position des
Leiters
180 bis 210 Volt
Klemmleiste TB 1-2
Klemmleiste TB 1-3 210 bis 230 Volt
230 bis 260 Volt
Klemmleiste TB 1-4
Nenn-
Spannung
200/208 Volt
220 Volt
240 Volt
Wichtiger Hinweis:
Die 3745 kann über Fernsteuerung eingeschaltet werden. Deshalb muß bei Ausführung der folgenden
Verfahren die Stromsteuerfunktion am Bedienungsfeld der 3745 und 3746-900 auf Lokal eingestellt sein.
Eingangsspannung der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
Der zulässige Spannungsbereich (200/240 V) und die Frequenz (50/60 Hz) sind dem Typenschild zu entnehmen.
Prüfen, ob die Angaben auf dem Typenschild an der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit mit der an der
Netzstromversorgung des Kunden gemessenen Spannung und Frequenz übereinstimmen. Wenn dies
Safety
xli
Safety
nicht der Fall ist, zuständige Geschäftsstelle informieren. Die Position des Typenschildes ist “Controller
Expansion Label Location” on page lxii zu entnehmen.
7
Prüfung des Notaus-Schalters
a. Den Kunden bitten, das Netzkabel an die Netzstromversorgung anzuschließen.
b. Sicherungsautomat (CB1) einschalten.
c. Die 3745 und 3746-900 einschalten (Stromsteuerfunktion am Bedienungsfeld muß auf Lokal eingestellt sein).
d. Den NOTSCHALTER ausschalten (O) und prüfen, ob:
1) die 3745 und die 3746-900 ausgeschaltet sind.
Hinweis
In der 3746-900 stehen die primären Versorgungs- (ACDC) oder die Filterbereiche
(DCDC) weiterhin unter Spannung.
Komplettes Abschalten:
1. Die Sicherungsautomaten (CBs) ausschalten.
2. Alle Netzstecker aus den Steckdosen ziehen oder die Netzstromversorgung abschalten.
2) die Disketten- und Plattenlaufwerke angehalten sind.
3) die Lüfter abgeschaltet sind.
e. Notschalter entriegeln und Steuereinheit einschalten.
8
Betriebsanzeige
Nach Einschalten der Steuereinheit prüfen, ob a. die Betriebsanzeige am Bedienungsfeld der 3745 leuchtet.
b. die Betriebs-LED und die Bereitschafts-LED (am Bedienungsfeld des 3746-900) gemäß den
Angaben der Tabelle “Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900” leuchten.
Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900
Table 0-7. Bedeutung der LEDs am Bedienungsfeld der 3746-900
LED
Bereitschaft
LED
Betrieb
Status
3746-900
Kommentar
Blinken AUS
EIN AUS
Wechselstrom
EIN
Bereitschaft
Initialisierung der CBSP-Hardware. Die 3746-900 wartet auf erste Erkennung durch den MOSS-E beim LAN-Anschluß.
Die eingangs vom MOSS-E erkannte 3746-900 wartet auf das
Einschalten (nur das CBSP EEPROM-Programm ist aktiv).
AUS
AUS
Blinken
EIN
Einschalten
Betrieb
Alle 3746-900-Prozessoren werden hochgefahren (IML).
Die 3746-900 ist nun betriebsbereit.
xlii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Stromversorgung der 3745/3746-900, Sicherungsautomaten (CB),
Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und Sicherungen (F)
Table 0-8. Stromversorgung der 3745, Sicherungsautomaten (CB), Überstromschutzschalter (CP) und
Sicherungen (F)
Rahmen
Rahmen 1
CB/CP/F
CB1
Position
01H-A1
Nennwerte
10 A
PS (Stromvers.)
ALLE
CP2
CP3
F1
01H-A1
01H-B1
01H-B1
1,5 A
2 A
0,2 A
PS2
Ventilatoren
PS2
Rahmen 7:
3746-900
CB1 AC
CB1 DC
CP1
CP2
CP3
CP4
CP5
07K-A1/07J-A1
07J-A1
07K-A1/07J-A1
07H-A1
07H-A1
07H-A1
07H-A1
15 A/220 V
50 A
5 A
12 A
12 A
12 A
12 A
Wechselstrom
Gleichstrom
Gleichstrom
Gleichstrom
Gleichstrom
Gleichstrom
Gleichstrom
Sicherungen der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit
Der Wechselstromverteilerkasten der Erweiterung der Steuereinheit enthält zwei Sicherungen: 7 A 250 V träge.
Safety
xliii
Safety xliv
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Safety
xlv
Safety xlvi
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Safety
xlvii
Safety xlviii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Safety
xlix
Safety l
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Safety
li
Safety lii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Safety
liii
Safety liv
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Safety
lv
Safety lvi
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Safety Label Locations
Safety Labels on the 3745
On the following figures, labels are designated by letters. A particular wording corresponds to each letter
(see “3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx).
Figure 0-21. 3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Back)
Safety
lvii
Safety
Figure 0-22. 3745 Label and Power Rating Plate Locations (Front)
lviii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Safety Label on the 3746-900
On the following figures, labels are designated by letters. A particular wording corresponds to each letter
(see “3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications” on page lx).
Power Rat i ng Pl at e
(Under t he cover)
Fr ont Vi ew
Figure 0-23. 3746 Model 900 (Frame 07) Label Locations
Rear View
(Under t he cover)
Safety Label on LCB
Figure 0-24. LCB Safety Label Location
S
Safety
lix
Safety
3745/3746-900 Safety Label Identifications
The safety labels shown in Figure 0-25 on page lx and in Figure 0-26 on page lxi are in the English language. They are also available in other languages. See “Safety Label Part Numbers by Country” on page lxiii for ordering.
LABEL A LABEL C
CAUTION
DUE TO CONNECTED EQUIPMENT
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
MAY BE PRESENT AT ANY TIME
(Same as label A but in local language)
LABEL B
HAZARDOUS AREA
TRAINED SERVICE
PERSONNEL ONLY
LABEL E
LABEL D
(Same as label B but in local language)
LABEL F
LABEL G
> 18 Kg
LABEL H
DO NOT OPEN
NE PAS OUVRIR
NICHT ÖFFNEN
NIET OPENEN
NON APRIRE
NO ABRIR
~
NAO ABRIR
Figure 0-25. 3745/3746-900 Safety Labels
lx
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
L A B E L K 1
HAS AR DOU S AR E A
T R A I N E D S E R V I C E
P E RS ONNE L ONLY
S WI T CH " OF F " CB 1
AT 0 7 K - A1 F OR T HI S
S I D E T R A N S F O R ME R
BE F ORE REMOVI NG T HE COVE R
L A B E L K 2
HAS AR DOU S AR E A
T R A I N E D S E R V I C E
P E RS ONNE L ONLY
S WI CT H " OF F " CB 1
AT 07 J - A1 F OR T HI S
S I D E T R A N S F O R ME R
BE F ORE REMOVI NG T HE COVE R
L A B E L L
LI NE VOLTAGE
P R E S E N T W I T H
MACHI NE POWER OF F
L A B E L M
CAUTI ON
H A Z A R D OU S E N E R GY
I S P R E S E N T W H E R E
T H E C A S S E T E I S
PLUGGED I N
CAUTI ON
R E MOV E P R I MA RY
POWER CORD B EF ORE
REMOVI NG COVER
L A B E L D
L A B E L A
L A B E L N 1
L A B E L N 2
> 18 Kg
> 32 Kg
L A B E L P
CAUTI ON
1 - S WI T CH OF F T HE DC B OX CB 1
2 - S WI T CH OF F T H E CU S T OME R CI R C U I T B R E A K E R
3 - AT TACH A WARNI NG L AB E L DI RE CT LY T O T HE
CI R CU I T B R E AK E R I NDI CAT I NG T HAT
" P OWE R MU S T N OT B E AP P L I E D"
4 - DI S CONNE CT T H E S U P P LY CAB L E F R OM T HE
CUS T OMER J UNCT I ON BOX
5 - L AS T, DI S CONN E CT S U P P LY CAB L E F R OM T H E
DC POWER BOX
Figure 0-26. 3745/3746-900 Safety Labels
L A B E L Q
<
>
60 VDC
240 VA
Safety
Safety
lxi
Safety
LCB Safety Label
LABEL S
HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
Permanent ground connection is mandatory before network connections.
Figure 0-27. LCB Safety Label (PN 80G3928)
Controller Expansion Label Location
K M
8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
AC Outlet
Distribution Box
Power Rating
Plate
Figure 0-28. Controller Expansion Power Rating Plate Location
lxii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Safety
Safety Label Part Numbers by Country
The following table gives the label group part number according to the language(s) of the country in which the 3745 is installed.
Table 0-9. Safety Label Numbers by Country
Language 3745
Frame 1
Part
Number
Canadian French
Danish
Dutch
03F4861
03F4869
03F4872
English
Finnish
French
03F4860
03F4870
03F4862
French/Dutch
German
Italian
Japanese
Norwegian
Portuguese
Spanish
Swedish
03F4871
03F4863
03F4864
03F4867
03F4868
03F4865
03F4866
03F4873
3746-900
Part
Number
72F0673
72F0676
72F0664
72F0674
72F0665
72F0666
72F0667
72F0670
72F0671
72F0668
72F0669
72F0677
3746-900
Label Q
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
17G5876
LCB
Label S
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
80G3928
Safety
lxiii
Safety lxiv
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Preface
Preface
About this Manual
This MIP is a guide for fault isolation and repair of the 3745 Communication Controller. It is expected that the customer has used the .
Problem Determination Guide, SA33-0096 or the 3745 Models A, Problem
Analysis Guide (online document) prior to calling IBM for service. The MIP does not duplicate the tasks done by the
Problem Determination Guide.
The MIP gives the service representative information needed to:
Analyze problems or symptoms reported by the system user.
Restore normal 3745 operation.
Who Should Read this Manual
The person using this manual should be:
Trained to service the 3745 and 3746-900.
Familiar with the configuration of the system to which the 3745 is connected.
Familiar with the operation of the 3745, as described in the
IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance
Reference, SY33-2066 and IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function, SY33-2069, which are part of this Maintenance Library.
The intended audience for this manual are Product-Trained Customer Engineers (PT CE). The Product
Support-Trained Customer Engineer (PST CE) is also expected to refer to this manual when he is required to perform the same tasks as the PT CE.
How this Manual Is Organized
This manual is organized as follows:
Safety information is at the start of the manual.
From Chapter 1 through Chapter 4, this manual is designed so that the information is presented to the user in the same order as he will require it during the majority of service calls. The user is told where to go next for each path through this part of the manual.
At the back of the manual are:
– Appendix A, Maintenance Aids
– Appendix B, Bibliography
– Appendix X: Abbreviation list and glossary.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
lxv
Preface lxvi
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Amendments
Summary of Changes
All MAPs, exchange procedures, and so on, referring to the 3746-900, have been removed in this edition except for the "Service Inspection Safety Procedures".
For information concerning the 3746 Model 900 refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Corrections and improvements relating to the previous edition have also been inserted.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
lxvii
Amendments lxviii
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
START
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
Important
Your personal safety can never be over-emphasized.
You have been taught safety procedures since the earliest phase of your IBM training.
Your safety is part of every maintenance call.
You are the only one who can make a maintenance call safe.
Specific information can be found in “Product Safety Information” on page xvii and “Safety Label
Locations” on page lvii.
Start here when you use this manual to repair a 3745/3746 hardware failure.
Remember that the 3745/3746 are machines which are designed to be repaired while the customer is still using the operational areas. This is called Concurrent Maintenance. Before changing FRUs, you will be directed to ensure that you have the correct area of the machine ready for maintenance.
When a power supply is shared between adapters, the disabling procedures apply to both 'suspected' and 'associated' adapters.
During a call for service, it will normally be necessary to use the 3745 console. To log ON at a
3745 console, proceed as directed in “Console Use for Maintenance.”
Console Use for Maintenance
001
Is the 3745 a Model 17A?
Yes No
002
The 3745 is a Model 130, 150, 160, or 170.
The 3745 has password protection for functions controlled via a console. Several types of password exist for different activities. They are described in the
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide,
SA33-0097.
Obtain the maintenance password from the customer so that you can log on at the 3745 console
(local, remote, or alternate). This password will give you access to Menu 3 Maintenance Func-
tions, in addition to Menu 1 and Menu 2.
If the 3745 failure prevents correct operation of the 3745 console, continue at “Selection Table” on
page 1-4 .
Log ON at the 3745 console as follows:
1. Ensure that the customer is not using the console and that he has logged OFF. The channel enable/disable screen is displayed.
2. Press F4: MOSS FUNCTIONS.
3. The password screen is displayed.
4. Enter the maintenance password.
Note: Remember to log OFF the console and to re-IML the MOSS at the end of the service call.
See “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102 for more information.
Continue with “Selection Table” on page 1-4.
003
The 3745 is a Model 17A.
(Step 003 continues)
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
1-1
START
003 (continued)
Is the service processor operational?
Yes No
004
Continue with “Selection Table” on page 1-4.
005
Obtain the service processor maintenance password from the customer so that you can log ON at the service processor console.
To log ON:
1. On the MOSS-E View window, click on Program (in the action bar).
2. Click on Log On MOSS-E.
3. Enter the password.
Are you here to investigate a RSF problem?
If you do not know, continue with Step 006.
Yes No
006
1. On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the service processor icon.
2. The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.
3. Click on the Configuration Management option.
4. Double-click on the Manage Remote Operations option.
5. On the Remote Operation Management window, select the Remote operations authorization option and click on OK.
6. On the Remote Support Facility window, select the following two options:
Disable Remote Support Facility
Do not generate alerts
7. Click on OK.
8. Continue with Step 007.
007
Continue with “Selection Table” on page 1-4 .
See “Service Processor Window Overview” on page 1-3 for the main panels used to perform the procedures documented in this manual.
1-2
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Service Processor Window Overview
MOSS-E View
Controller
3745 3746
Service Processor
3745 Menu
Function Options Help
MOSS Console
Problem Management
Operation Management
Service Processor Menu
Function Options Help
Configuration Management
Problem Management
Operation Management
Change Management
Manage Ethernet Bridge
Configuration Management
Communications Manager/2
FFST/2
LAPS
Manage Remote Operation
Set Time and Date
Customize DCAF Target Settings
Manage 3745/3746-9x0 Installation/Removal
Start/Configure TCP/IP
Problem Management
Display Alarms
Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs)
Transfer NCP Dump
Connect/Disconnect 3746-9x0 from MOSS-E
Operation Management
Manage Disk and Data Base
Manage Passwords
Display Files
Retrieve Engineering Data
Delete Engineering Data
Capture and Save Screens
START
3746-9x0 Menu
Function Options Help
Configuration Management
Problem Management
Network Node Processor (NNP) Management
Multiaccess Enclosure (MAE) Management
Operations Mangement
Change Management
Performance Management
Functions to Use Under PE Guidance
(For a detailed menu, see the 3746-900
Service Guide)
Problem Management
Display Alarms
Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs)
Report Problem Using Remote Support Facility
Operation Management
Set 3745/MOSS-E Connection Mode
Locate Bypass Card Position
Change Management
Manage Microcode Changes
Change Active Code
Manage Microcode Fixes
Set Automatic Microcode Download Option
Manage Ethernet Bridge
Configure Ethernet Bridge
Configure SNMP
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-3
START
Selection Table
Going from top to bottom in the table, select the first entry point which fits your situation.
If You Have a:
General Verbal Symptoms
Color symptom for 3745/3746-900 icons on MOSS-E View window.
Customer problem number (CPN)
Maintenance actions
Problem during installation
Problem while installing an EC or MES
3745/3746-900 power symptoms
3745 reference code
3745 FRU group number to exchange
3745 FRU list to exchange
3745 control panel code reported
3745 control panel symptoms
3745 service processor link symptom
3745 IOC bus symptoms
3745 console symptoms
3745 'Disk not ready' message on the 3745 console
or 'Disk error' message
or 'Diskette error' message
3745 console message displayed
Then Go to:
The “General Verbal Symptoms” on page 1-8.
“MAP 5200: 3745/3746-900/Service Processor/Network
Node Processor Icon Color Symptoms” on page 2-37
The “3745 and Service Processor Maintenance Using a
CPN” on page 1-55
The “3745 Maintenance Actions” on page 1-6.
The “Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation” on page 1-7.
The “Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation” on page 1-7.
The “3745 Power Symptoms” on page 1-12.
“Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
“Using the MIP FRU Group Table” on page 1-48.
The “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53.
The “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
The “3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.
“MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the
Service Processor” on page 2-42
“MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting” on page 2-1.
The “3745 Console Symptoms” on page 1-10.
“How to Perform 3745 Control Panel Operations” on page 1-82. Perform a MOSS IML, and restart, using the control panel code reported.
Alarm reported on the 3745 Model 17A
3745-XXA apply a microcode fix
3745-XXA RSF link down
Service processor symptom
Network node processor symptom
Service processor system reference code sequence number
Service processor apply a microcode change
Problem with the service processor integrated modem
Problem on the external modem attached at the service processor
Most messages are self explanatory. If necessary, go to the 3745 Problem Determination Guide, 3745 Service
Functions or “3745 Advanced Operations Guide”.
The Problem Analysis Guide (online book)
The
Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual. Use the "Handling the Microcode Change Levels" procedure in the chapter "Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor".
“MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call” on page 2-33
The "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.
The "Network Node Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual.
The “Service Processor Maintenance Using an SRC
Sequence Number” on page 1-57.
"Handling the Microcode Change Level" in the chapter
"Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual.
"How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual, and run the integrated V.32 modem test, or refer to the
IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A; Installation, Operation, and Problem Determination Guide.
Refer to the modem documentation.
For IBM the 7855 modem refer to the problem determination chapter in the 7855 Modem Model 10, Guide to
Operation.
For IBM the 7857 modem refer to the problem determination chapter in the IBM 7857 Modem Guide to Operation.
For the Hayes** modem, refer to the corresponding manual.
1-4
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
START
If You Have a:
Problem on the 3746-900, or attached features
Then Go to:
The IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-5
START
3745 Maintenance Actions
If You Want to:
Run 3745 diagnostics in offline mode (ODG)
Run 3745 diagnostics in concurrent maintenance mode (CDG)
Run the 3745/3746-900 LIC wrap test (WTT)
Find information about using the 3745 control panel
Know the definition of a 3745 control panel code
Install a 3745
Find information about using the 3745 MOSS console
Find information about connected consoles
Find the level of a FRU installed.
Check voltages on 3745
Change parameters for the 3745 LIC type 5 or 6.
Apply a Microcode Fix on the 3745-17A
Find information about using the service processor console
Test the 3745-17A RSF link
Find information about customer console on
3745-17A
Perform Engineering Data Transfer
Run diagnostics on the service processor
Run diagnostics on the network node processor
Apply a microcode change on a service processor
Find the modem setting for RSF
Run diagnostics on the 3746-900 or attached features
Find miscellaneous information
Then Go to:
The “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60.
The “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60.
“How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or
3746-900” on page 3-15.
“3745 Control Panel Use” on page 1-78.
The “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
The
3745/3746-900 Installation Guide, SY33-2067
The 3745 Service Functions Guide, SY33-2069.
The 3745 Console Setup Guide, SA33-0158.
The 3745 Service Functions Guide, SY33-2069.
The 3745 YZ pages
Appendix B, “PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance
Aids for LIC 5 and 6” on page A-5.
"Handling the Microcode Change Level" in the chapter
"Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual.
The 3745 Models A, Basic Operations Guide, SA33-0177.
“MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call” on page 2-33.
The
3745 Console Setup Guide, SA33-0158.
The “Engineering Data Transfer” on page 1-58.
"How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics" in the corresponding
Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.
The "Network Node Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual.
"Handling the Microcode Change Level" in the chapter
"Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" in the corresponding
Service Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual.
The
Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual. Use the "Installing and Connecting the RSF
Modem to the Service Processor" procedure according to your modem type.
The IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Service Guide, SY33-2116.
“Miscellaneous Information” on page 1-13.
1-6
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
START
Problems During Machine, EC, or MES Installation
When installing a 3745, the 3745 Installation Guide, SY33-2067 should be used. When installing an EC or an MES, the supplied instructions should be used. It is possible that the task or diagnostic you were asked to perform during the installation detected an error, and you were requested to start troubleshooting using this manual.
The primary purpose of this manual is to resolve problems that occur in an operational environment after a successful installation. That is, the machine has worked previously and is now failing.
At installation time, or after an EC or MES is installed, it is possible that errors may occur due to conditions which would not exist in an operational environment.
Cables plugged incorrectly
Terminators missing
Mismatch between CDF and machine configuration
Mismatch between line characteristics and setups
Wrong address set
Top card connectors incorrectly installed
Loose cards.
During your path through the MIP, you should remember these possibilities and, when the failing area is identified, check with the aid of the 3745 Hardware Maintenance Reference, SY33-2066 and YZ pages that these conditions do not exist prior to changing FRUs.
Now, starting at the top of the “Selection Table,” work down until you find an entry that matches the symptom detected during the installation.
Be sure to read “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1 before removing any FRUs from this machine.
Selection Table
If You Have a:
Reference code (see the "3745 Problem
Determination/Analysis Guide", Alarms)
3745 control panel code reported
3745 Power Symptoms
IOC bus symptoms
3745 console symptom
3745 control panel symptom
General verbal symptom
Error detected by diagnostics on the 3745
3745 console message displayed
CDF undefined error
Then Go to:
“Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
“3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
“3745 Power Symptoms” on page 1-12.
“MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting” on page 2-1.
“3745 Console Symptoms” on page 1-10.
“3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.
“General Verbal Symptoms” on page 1-8.
“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
Most messages are self explanatory. If needed go to the
"3745 Problem Determination Guide", "3745 Service Functions", or "Advanced Operation Guide".
Correct the CDF using the manual update function (option
S). Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Service Function, SY33-2069.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-7
Symptom Index
Symptom Index
General Verbal Symptoms
Table 1-1 (Page 1 of 2). General Symptoms
If the: Symptom:
Has detected
Host
3745 using a channel
Channel errors on this
3745
Route inop
Missing interrupt
Has detected channel errors on the 3746-900
Is unable to load/dump the control program via the
3745 CA
Is unable to load/dump the control program via the
3746-900 ESCA
Is unable to activate an
ESCA or there is no traffic on the ESCA
3745 using the MOSS HDD
Is unable to load/dump the control program
Then:
Go to “MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line
Problem or Line Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Go to “MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line
Problem or Line Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Refer to the
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Refer to “How to Run MOSS Diagnostics” on page 3-4 and continue with the error detected.
If no error is detected, go to the "Service
Function Guide" for HDD problems.
1-8
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Symptom Index
Table 1-1 (Page 2 of 2). General Symptoms
If the:
3745
Hardware central service
Service processor
Symptom:
Is unable to activate (start) a line or a ring
Has errors while running lines or rings
Then:
1. For TSS: go to “MAP 3500:
Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line
Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.
2. For TRSS : go to “MAP 3520:
Activate/Deactivate Ring Problems or Ring
Errors on the TRSS” on page 2-8.
3. For HPTSS or ESS : go to “MAP 3530:
Activate/Deactivate Line Problems or Line
Errors on the HPTSS/ESS” on page 2-9.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Is unable to activate (start) a ring or has errors while running a ring connected to a 3746-900
Is unable to activate (start) or has a problem on all the lines of a 3746-900 CLP.
Is unable to activate (start) or has a problem on all the lines of a 3746-900 LIC11.
Is unable to activate or has a problem on all the lines of the same ARC group
Is unable to activate or has a problem on all the lines of the same line connection box expansion (LCBE)
Is unable to activate or has a problem on all the lines of a 3746-900 LIC12
Is unable to activate or has a problem on all the lines of a 3746-900 LIC16
Has a suspected program loop or hang
Has unexpected re-IPLs
Is unable to activate an
RSF link
The 3745 Model 17A, has the RSF link down
Is unable to establish a link with a 3745 or 3746-900
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Refer to the
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Call your support structure for assistance with this problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
If a message with a reference code is generated, go to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
If no message with a reference code is generated at the re-IPL, contact your support structure for assistance. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Run the RSF console link test, refer to “How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745
Models 130, 150, 160, and 170” on page 3-6.
If no error is detected suspect the modem or line. Ask the customer to perform problem determination or call the appropriate service representative.
Go to “MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual
Call” on page 2-33.
Go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN
Attached to the Service Processor” on page 2-42.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-9
Symptom Index
3745 Console Symptoms
Table 1-2. 3745 Console Symptoms
If a:
Local/Remote/RSF or alternate console appears not to function or functions incorrectly
"Disk not ready" message or
"Disk error" message or
"Diskette error" message
3745 console message is displayed
On 3745 Models 17A, the RSF link is down
Service processor is failing or
Service processor symptom appears
Then:
Ensure that the Problem Determination Guide has been followed.
Perform a MOSS IML. See “How to Perform
3745 Control Panel Operations” on page 1-82.
Restart using the reported Control Panel code.
Most messages are self explanatory.
If necessary, refer to the:
Problem Determination Guide, SA33-0096
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide,
SA33-0097.
Go to “MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual
Call” on page 2-33.
Refer to the "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding
Service
Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.
1-10
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Control Panel Symptoms
Symptom Index
Table 1-3. Control Panel Symptoms
If the 3745
Control panel displays any wrong character or all segments of all characters are ON
Control panel display has a missing character
Has one or more control panel keys that do not work
MOSS message indicator is always ON without a console pending message
MOSS inoperative indicator is always ON even if
MOSS is operating
Control panel display is blank
"All Channel Adapters Disabled" indicator is in an invalid state
"Console in Use" indicator shows the wrong console
Power On Indicator is not ON
Then:
Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
If no error is detected and the problem still exists, call your support structure for a possible microcode problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
If no error is detected and the problem still exists, call your support structure for a possible microcode problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
If no error is detected and the problem still exists, call your support structure for a possible microcode problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
If no error is detected and the problem still exists, call your support structure for a possible microcode problem. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
If no error is detected, go to “How to Run MOSS
Diagnostics” on page 3-4.
Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem
Problems” on page 2-21.
Run the Control Panel test. Refer to “How to Run the Control Panel Test” on page 3-8.
When a FRU group is called for an error, go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
If no error is detected, go to “How to Run MOSS
Diagnostics” on page 3-4.
Refer to “How to Run MOSS Diagnostics” on page 3-4 and continue with the error detected.
If no error is detected, exchange the FRU group 52.
Go to page 1-49.
Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem
Problems” on page 2-21.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-11
Symptom Index
3745 Power Symptoms
Table 1-4. Power Symptoms
If the: Symptom:
Will not power ON
3745
Will not perform a scheduled power ON
Host power ON sequence stops at the 3745
Power On Indicator is not ON
Control panel display is blank
Will not power OFF
Will not power OFF when a power
OFF command is sent by the control program
Then:
Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem
Problems” on page 2-21.
Go to “Power MAP 3925: Scheduled Power on Problems” on page 2-20.
Go to “MAP 3905: Power ON Problem in Host Mode or
Host Power Sequence Problem” on page 2-16.
Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem
Problems” on page 2-21.
Go to “Power MAP 3935: Power OFF not Possible in Host
Mode” on page 2-25.
or
Go to “Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in
Local Mode” on page 2-26.
Go to “Power MAP 3960: Power OFF not Possible in
Network Mode” on page 2-28.
1-12
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Miscellaneous Information
If You Want to:
Find information about the 3745 console
Maintenance
Setup
Customer MOSS functions
Find the level of an installed FRU
Check voltages
Find information about the maintenance aids for:
Control program
Microcode
Special tools
PKD and LIC5/6
Symptom Index
Then Go to:
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
IBM 3745 Console Setup Guide, SA33-0158
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function,
SY33-2069 CDF chapter.
YZ pages, and IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance
Reference (specifications chapter).
See this manual appendix A
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-13
Reference Codes
Using Reference Codes
Reference Codes (8 digits) are always displayed at the rightmost position of the alarm on the 3745 console. They are generated by the microcode which runs within the MOSS to provide an automatic analysis of box event records (BERs). This function is known as auto-BER and is part of the AUTOMAINT facility. Reference codes are also generated when diagnostics detect an error.
If several alarms have been generated for the same problem, resulting in multiple reference codes, use the reference code beginning with BX, if any. If there are no BX codes, use the reference code given by the earliest alarm.
To analyze a reference code to find the correct action to take, use the following procedure on the 3745 console:
1. From the Maintenance Functions on Menu 3, select the BRC function.
The reference code screen will be displayed (see Figure 1-1).
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM F5:BER CORRELATION
á
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/89 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: BER CORRELATION
REFERENCE CODE INTERPRETATION
ENTER REFERENCE CODE ==>
===>
F6:ADDITIONAL INFO
Figure 1-1. Reference Code Screen
ñ
2. Type in the 8-digit reference code you want to analyze in the input area of the screen. Refer to
Figure 1-1.
3. Press SEND the action you are required to perform will appear on the screen.
Note
When the microcode is a possible cause of the error, it is recommended that you check:
1. If you have the highest level of microcode for your machine.
2. That any applicable MCFs are installed.
Your support structure will have this information.
4. Hit F6 for additional information (on associated components and customer resources for TSS,
HPTSS and ESS), and record the data for later usage.
Note: If the CDF is not correct, this information can be wrong.
5. When the FRU list is given, record the types and location, then use the “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53.
If the reference code is reported as 'INVALID' or 'DUMMY', check that you have entered the same code as reported. If so, an error in the BER analysis or BER logging has occurred. Contact your support structure for assistance. See “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
1-14
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
3745 Control Panel Codes
For the 3746 Model 900 panel code, refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Table 1-5 (Page 1 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
000
SUCCESSFUL IPL COMPLETION: THE CONTROL
PROGRAM IS LOADED AND MOSS IS OPERA-
TIONAL.
No action required
001
002
ROS CODE DOES NOT GET CONTROL OR DOES
NOT EXECUTE SCHEDULED PROCESSING (CODE
DISPLAYED BY THE PCC )
MMIO INTERFACE NOT OK (CODE DISPLAYED BY
THE PCC )
Go to “MAP 3200: MOSS Control
Panel Code 001” on page 2-3
Exchange the FRU group 22
003
004
005
006
MOSS REIML has been initiated . Progression code.
Problem detected with MOSS POR signal (not the same as the PCC one ).
Problem detected with CCU POR signals (not the same as the PCC one ) .
ac input fault detected . (always sent on panel even if
MOSS IMLed). An alarm and reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 22
Go to “Power MAP 3950:
PCC-Detected Error on MOSS Reset” on page 2-27
Go to “Power MAP 3970:
PCC-Detected Error on CCU Reset or on Remote Power OFF” on page 2-30
Power on 3745 if it was previously in
'local mode'.
Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14
CB1 has been set OFF then ON (during an exchange procedure for instance).
Do not take into account the Panel
Code
007
008
PCC battery down . (always sent on panel even if
MOSS IMLed)
Problem detected with RPO signal (always ON : CCU or cable problem)
Exchange the FRU group 39
Exchange the FRU group 49
009 and
00A
00B
Unused
Problem detected on power supply 1 " OVERCUR-
RENT FAULT " .
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Go to “MAP 3900: Overcurrent on
Power Supply 1” on page 2-12
00C
This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds after a power OFF
Problem detected on power supply 1 " POWER
SUPPLY FAULT " (overvoltage, undervoltage) .
This code is normal and no FRUs need to be replaced. Wait at least 10 seconds after power OFF before you try to power ON again
Exchange the FRU group 50
This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds after a power OFF
00D
00E
00F
Unused
This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds after a power OFF
Problem detected on power 2 "OVER-CURRENT
FAULT".
Unused
This code can occur if the 3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds after a power OFF
This code is normal and no FRUs need to be replaced. Wait at least 10 seconds after power OFF before you try to power ON again
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
This code is normal and no FRUs need to be replaced. Wait at least 10 seconds after power OFF before you try to power ON again
Go to “MAP 3910: Overcurrent on
Power Supply 2” on page 2-18
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
This code is normal and no FRUs need to be replaced. Wait at least 10 seconds after power OFF before you try to power ON again
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-15
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 2 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
010
Machine powered OFF because power supply or blower faults
Use the function 'B' to display the four stacked errors. Refer to “Display
Stacked Errors” on page 1-83.
011 to 02F Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
030
031
032
Problem detected with Power supply Fan
Problem detected with MOSS and basic board Fan
Problem detected with MOSS and basic board Fan
Go to “Power MAP 3920: Air Flow
Detector Fault” on page 2-19
033 to 04F
050
051
052
Unused
INITIAL MOSS PROCESSOR RESET STATE NOT OK
Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
.
Exchange the FRU group 1
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
053
054
055
056
INITIAL MOSS PROCESSOR STATE OK
(PROGRESSION CODE) Progression code.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 1 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 2 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 3 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
Exchange the FRU group 3
Exchange the FRU group 4
Exchange the FRU group 3
057
058
059
05A
05B
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 4 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 5 INTERRUPT PRESENT IN
THE IOIRV.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 6 OR 7 INTERRUPT PRESENT
IN THE IOIRV.
MOSS PROCESSOR CONDITIONS CODES NOT OK
Unused
Exchange the FRU group 3
Exchange the FRU group 7
Go to “MAP 3210: MOSS Control
Panel Code 059” on page 2-4
Exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
05C
05D
MOSS PROCESSOR CACHE NOT OK
MOSS PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION TEST PART 1
NOT OK
Exchange the FRU group 2
05E Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
05F
060
ROS CHECKSUM NOT OK
ROS BAD PARITY LOCATION NOT DETECTED
Exchange the FRU group 2
061
062
063
Unused
EIRV DOES NOT REPORT FORCED ERRORS
Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
070
071
072
073
074
075
PIO BUS TEST DID NOT RUN COMPLETELY
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA I/Os.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC AND DFA I/Os.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MCCU OR MCAD
I/Os ON MCC
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os AND ON
MCCU OR MCAD I/Os ON MCC.
.
.
Exchange the FRU group 1
Exchange the FRU group 7
Exchange the FRU group 6
Exchange the FRU group 3
Exchange the FRU group 1
1-16
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 3 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
076
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA I/Os AND ON
MCCU OR MCAD I/Os ON MCC.
Exchange the FRU group 8
077
078
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os AND ON
DFA I/Os AND ON MCCU OR MCAD I/Os ON MCC.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON PCA'S I/Os ON MCC
Exchange the FRU group 6
Exchange the FRU group 3
079
07A
07B
07C
07D
07E
07F
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC AND PCA'S I/Os
ON MCC
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA AND PCA'S I/Os
ON MCC
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC I/Os , DFA I/Os
AND PCA'S I/Os ON MCC.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MCC I/Os
(MCCU,MCAD AND PCA'S).
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON MPC AND MCC I/Os.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST PARTICULARLY ON DFA AND MCC I/Os.
SOME ERROR(S) OCCURRED DURING THE PIO
BUS TEST ERRORS WERE DETECTED ON ALL
ADAPTERS
.
.
.
Exchange the FRU group 1
Exchange the FRU group 8
Exchange the FRU group 6
Exchange the FRU group 3
Exchange the FRU group 1
Exchange the FRU group 8
Exchange the FRU group 1
080 to 096 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
097
098 ñ
PIO TEST PART 1 SUCCESSFUL PROBLEM IN PIO
BUS TEST PART 2
PIO TEST PART 2 NOT SUCCESSFUL
Exchange the FRU group 9
099
09A to 09C
09D
PIO TEST PART 2 SUCCESSFUL Progression code.
Unused
Exchange the FRU group 5
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 12
09E
09F
0A0
0A1
0A2
0A3
0A4
0A5
0A6
0A7
0A8
0A9
0AA
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
0AB to 0AC
PROBLEM WITH PCC
INFORMATION DEFINING THE ORIGIN OF THE
ACTIVATION OF THE MOSS DIAGNOSTICS IS NOT
VALID. (RUN THE PANEL TEST TO CHECK THE
CONTROL PANEL).
CONTROL LOST IN THE MAINLINE CONTROLLER
AFTER CHECKING THE REQUEST
MOSS STORAGE TEST ENTRY CODE Progression code.
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 1
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2
DISABLE THE VALID OPTION KO IN TEST 1
RECONFIGURE BIT IS ALWAYS 'ON' IN TOD
ADAPTER
ADDRESS NOT INCREMENTED IN TEST 2
DIFFERENT LOADED AND STORED CONTENTS IN
TEST 2
INVALID ADDRESS IN THE ROS IN TEST 2
INVALID ADDRESS AFTER 512K OR 1MEG IN TEST
2
NO MEMORY LOCATION WITHOUT ERROR IS
FOUND IN TEST 2
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 4
Unused
Exchange the FRU group 10
Exchange the FRU group 2
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
Exchange the FRU group 2
Exchange the FRU group 11
Exchange the FRU group 12
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 11
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 11
Exchange the FRU group 13
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-17
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 4 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
0AD ñ NO SINGLE ERROR CORRECTION IN TEST 3
Exchange the FRU group 13
0AE ñ BAD SINGLE ERROR CORRECTION IN TEST 3
0AF
0B0
ñ
Unused
NO DOUBLE ERROR DETECTION IN TEST 3
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 13
0B1 ñ
DIFFERENT LOADED AND STORED CONTENTS IN
TEST 4
Exchange the FRU group 11
0B2 ñ
RECONFIGURE BIT IN TOD ADAPTER CAN NOT BE
SET IN TEST 5
Exchange the FRU group 13
0B3 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
0B4
0B5
0B6 ñ
0B7
ñ
0B8 to 0BE
0BF
ñ
ñ
DIFFERENT LOADED AND STORED CONTENTS IN
TEST 7
DOUBLE UNCORRECTABLE ERROR IN TEST 6
ENABLE VALID OPTION KO IN TEST 9
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 9
Unused
MOSS MEMORY TEST EXIT CODE Progression code.
Exchange the FRU group 11
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 12
Exchange the FRU group 13
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
0C0
0C1
0C2
0C3
0C4
0C5
ñ
ñ
ñ
PROBLEM IN ROS MAINLINE CONTROLLER INITIAL-
IZATION
CONTROL LOST AFTER INITIALIZING THE ROS
MAINLINE CONTROLLER
CONTROL LOST DURING PSV SWAP TEST
STORAGE CHECK (WHEN ACCESSING THE REG-
ISTER SPACE)
SCHEDULED PROGRESSION NOT PERFORMED
DURING THE PSV SWAP TEST
CACHE IN/CACHE OUT OPERATION NOT SUC-
CESSFUL
Exchange the FRU group 14
Exchange the FRU group 2
Exchange the FRU group 13
Exchange the FRU group 11
Exchange FRU group 13
0C6
0C7
0C8 to 0CF
0D0
0D1
0D2
ñ
0D3
ñ
ñ
ñ
Unused
PSV SWAP TEST SUCCESSFUL Progression code.
Unused
DISK ADAPTER TEST ENTRY CODE Progression code.
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 1
IOIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 1
ADAPTER NOT IN BUSY STATE OR NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BITS 0,1 ARE NOT B'10' IN TEST 1
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
Exchange the FRU group 54
Exchange the FRU group 15
0D4 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
0D5
0D6
0D7
0D8
ñ
ñ
ñ
0D9 ñ
0DA
ñ
0DB
0DC
ñ
ñ
ñ
0DD ñ
0DE ñ
ADAPTER NOT IN IDLE STATE IN TEST 1 BSTAT
BITS 0,1 ARE NOT B'00'
DIFFERENT LOADED AND READ CONTENTS IN
TEST 2
REGISTER NOT RESET AFTER A RESET COMMAND
IN TEST 2
INVALID PIO COMMAND
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2
IOIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 1 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00'
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 3
IOIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 2
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 3
Exchange the FRU group 15
Exchange the FRU group 15
Exchange the FRU group 15
1-18
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 5 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
0DF
0E0
ñ
ñ
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 2 NO INTER-
RUPT REQUESTED
CHIO TRANSFER KO
0E1
0E2
ñ
ñ
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 4 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RUN DIAGNOSTIC
COMMAND TEST
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO RUN DIAGNOSTIC
COMMAND TEST
Exchange the FRU group 15
0E3
0E4
0E5
0E6
0E7
0E8
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
DIFFERENT CONTENTS IN THE FIRST AND THE
SECOND PART OF THE SECTOR BUFFER RUN
DIAGNOSTIC COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 RUN DIAGNOSTIC
COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 RUN DIAGNOSTIC
COMMAND TEST
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 5 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE DRIVES INITIALIZATION
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 5 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED DRIVES INITIALIZATION
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 5 DRIVES
INITIALIZATION
Exchange the FRU group 15
Exchange the FRU group 21
Exchange the FRU group 15
Exchange the FRU group 16
0E9
0EA
0EB
0ED
0EE
0EF
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND
BEFORE RECALIBRATE TEST
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND BEFORE
RECALIBRATE TEST
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND
TEST
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 6 RECALI-
BRATE COMMAND TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
Exchange the FRU group 16
0F0 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
0F1
0F2
0F3
0F4
0F5
0F6
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION
RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST
NO CYLINDER ZERO IN SSB BYTE0 BIT 7 RECALI-
BRATE COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 RECALIBRATE COMMAND
TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 RECALIBRATE
COMMAND TEST
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 7 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ ID COMMAND TEST
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 7 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ ID COMMAND TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
Exchange the FRU group 16
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-19
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 6 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
0F7
0F8
ñ
ñ
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 7 READ ID
COMMAND TEST
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ ID COMMAND
TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
0F9
0FA
0FB
0FC
0FD
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ERROR ON HEAD ADDRESSING MECHANISM READ
ID COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ ID COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ ID COMMAND
TEST
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND
BEFORE SEEK TEST
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND
BEFORE SEEK TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
0FE Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
0FF ñ
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
100 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
101
102
HARD DISK INITIAL STATE IS NOT OK. A
RECOVERY PROCEDURE IS RUNNING.
HARD DISK INITIAL STATE NOT OK (EVEN AFTER
A RECOVERY PROCEDURE).
Exchange the FRU group 16
103 to 110 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
11A
11B
11C
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND TEST
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 8 SEEK
COMMAND TEST
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO SEEK COMMAND TEST
DIFFERENT HEAD NUMBERS SEEK COMMAND
TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 SEEK COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 SEEK COMMAND
TEST
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 9 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ/WRITE A SECTOR
COMMAND
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 9 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ/WRITE A SECTOR
COMMAND
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 9
READ/WRITE A SECTOR COMMAND
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ/WRITE A SECTOR
COMMAND
DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ SECTORS
READ/WRITE A SECTOR COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ/WRITE A SECTOR
COMMAND
Exchange the FRU group 16
Exchange the FRU group 16
Exchange the FRU group 16
1-20
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 7 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
11D
11E
ñ
ñ
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ/WRITE A
SECTOR COMMAND
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 10 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ/WRITE A FULL
TRACK COMMAND
Exchange the FRU group 16
11F
120
121
ñ
ñ
ñ
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 10 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ/WRITE A FULL TRACK
COMMAND
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 10
READ/WRITE A FULL TRACK COMMAND
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ/WRITE A FULL
TRACK COMMAND
122
123
ñ
ñ
DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ TRACKS
READ/WRITE A FULL TRACK COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ/WRITE A FULL
TRACK COMMAND
Exchange the FRU group 16
124
125
126
127
128
129
12A
12B
12C
12D
12E
12F
130
131
132
133
134
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ/WRITE A FULL
TRACK COMMAND
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 11 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ/WRITE NO DATA
COMMAND
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 11 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ/WRITE NO DATA
COMMAND
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 11
READ/WRITE NO DATA COMMAND
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ/WRITE NO DATA
COMMAND
DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ SECTORS
READ/WRITE NO DATA COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ/WRITE NO DATA
COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ/WRITE NO
DATA COMMAND
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 12 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ CHECK/WRITE
VERIFY COMMAND
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 12 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ CHECK/WRITE VERIFY
COMMAND
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 12 READ
CHECK/WRITE VERIFY COMMAND
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ CHECK/WRITE
VERIFY COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ CHECK/WRITE
VERIFY COMMAND
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ CHECK/WRITE
VERIFY COMMAND
DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ SECTORS READ
CHECK/WRITE VERIFY COMMAND
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 13 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE ECC CORRECTION TEST
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 13 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED ECC CORRECTION TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
Exchange the FRU group 16
Exchange the FRU group 16
Exchange the FRU group 16
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-21
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 8 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
135
136
137
138
139
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 13 ECC COR-
RECTION TEST
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO ECC CORRECTION TEST
ERROR ON A SELECTED SECTOR ECC COR-
RECTION TEST
NO ERROR IN SSB WHILE EXPECTED ECC COR-
RECTION TEST
NO CORRECTION ECC CORRECTION TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
13A ñ
13C
ñ
NO DETECTION ECC CORRECTION TEST
ERROR SSB BYTE 0 ECC CORRECTION TEST
Exchange the FRU group 16
13D
13E
ñ
ñ
ERROR SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 ECC CORRECTION
TEST
DIFFERENT WRITTEN AND READ CONTENTS IN
TEST 13
Exchange the FRU group 16
13F
140
141
142
143
144
145
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
DISKETTE CHANGE INFORMATION IS NOT
PRESENT
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 5 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE DRIVES INITIALIZATION
DISKETTE
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 5 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED DRIVES INITIALIZATION DISKETTE
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 5 DRIVES
INITIALIZATION DISKETTE
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION
DISKETTE
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND
BEFORE RECALIBRATE TEST DISKETTE
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND BEFORE
RECALIBRATE TEST DISKETTE
Exchange the FRU group 18
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
146 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
147
148
149
14A
14B
14C
14D
14E
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 6 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND
TEST DISKETTE
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 6 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 6 RECALI-
BRATE COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO DRIVES INITIALIZATION
RECALIBRATE COMMAND TEST DISKETTE OR NO
DISKETTE (OR BAD DISKETTE) IN DRIVE
NO CYLINDER ZERO IN SSB BYTE0 BIT 7 RECALI-
BRATE COMMAND TEST2DRIVE DISKETTE
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 RECALIBRATE COMMAND
TEST DISKETTE
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 RECALIBRATE
COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 7 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE READ ID COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 21
Exchange the FRU group 17
1-22
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 9 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
14F ñ
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 7 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED READ ID COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
Exchange the FRU group 19
150
151
152
153
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 7 READ ID
COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO READ ID COMMAND
TEST DISKETTE
ERROR ON HEAD ADDRESSING MECHANISM READ
ID COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 READ ID COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 21
154
155
156
158
159
15A
15B
15C
15D
15E
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 READ ID COMMAND
TEST DISKETTE
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE RECALIBRATE COMMAND
BEFORE SEEK TEST DISKETTE
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED RECALIBRATE COMMAND
BEFORE SEEK TEST DISKETTE
ADAPTER IN BUSY STATE IN TEST 8 BSTAT BITS
0,1 ARE NOT B'00' OR ADAPTER NOT ENABLE
BSTAT BIT 6 IS NOT ONE SEEK COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
IOIRV REGISTER IS X'00' IN TEST 8 NO INTER-
RUPT RECEIVED SEEK COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
EIRV REGISTER IS NOT X'00' IN TEST 8 SEEK
COMMAND TEST DISKETTE
DATA TRANSMISSION ERROR HSTAT BITS
0,1,2,3,6,7 ARE NOT ZERO SEEK COMMAND TEST
DISKETTE
DIFFERENT HEAD NUMBERS SEEK COMMAND
TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 0 SEEK COMMAND TEST
ERROR IN SSB BYTE 1 AND 2 SEEK COMMAND
TEST DISKETTE
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 17
Exchange the FRU group 19
Exchange the FRU group 21
15F END OF DISK ADAPTER TEST Progression code.
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
170
171
ROS CODE GETS CONTROL FOR A RE-IML BUT
THE RE-IML RESET SEQUENCE IS NOT PER-
FORMED
RE-IML SEQUENCE COMPLETELY PERFORMED
BUT ERROR IN MOSS PROCESSOR RESET STATE
TEST
Exchange the FRU group 2
172 to 177 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
178
CONTROL LOST DURING THE PROCESSING OF
THE 'MOSS DIAGS BY-PASS' REQUEST. A PCC
ERROR IS ALSO SUSPECTED.
Exchange the FRU group 22
179 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
17A
17B
INFORMATION DEFINING THE ORIGIN OF THE ACTI
VATION OF THE MOSS DIAGNOSTICS IS NOT
VALID. (RUN THE PANEL TEST TO CHECK THE
CONTROL PA NEL).
CONTROL LOST DURING THE PROCESSING OF
THE 'MOSS DIAGS BY-PASS' REQUEST
Exchange the FRU group 10
Exchange the FRU group 23
17C Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
17D
STORAGE ACCESS PROBLEM. DUMP REQUEST
CAN NOT BE PROCESSED
Exchange the FRU group 11
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-23
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 10 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
17E
17F
180
181
182
ñ
183 to 187
Unused
COMPLETION OF ROS PART OF MOSS DIAGNOS-
TICS Progression code.
ENTRY INTO RAM PART OF MOSS DIAGNOSTICS
Progression code.
CURRENT PROGRAM LEVEL NOT AS EXPECTED
(SHOULD HAVE BEEN 6)
RAM DIAG CONTROLLER HAS FULL CONTROL
Progression code.
Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 24
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 25
Exchange the FRU group 25
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 25
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
188
189
18A
18B
18C
ñ
CONTROL LOST DURING INSTRUCTION TEST PART
2
MOSS PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION TEST PART 2
NOT OK
MOSS PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION TEST PART 2
SUCCESSFULLY RUN Progression code.
Unused
CONTROL LOST DURING TOD ADAPTER TEST
Exchange the FRU group 25
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 25
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 6
18D
18E to 18F
END OF TOD TEST (SUCCESSFUL OR NOT)
Progression code.
Unused
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
190 START OF MCC TEST Progression code.
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 9
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
19A
19B
19C
19D
19E
19F
1A0
1A1
1A2
1A3
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
HARDWIRED CONDITIONS IMPOSSIBLE TO GET IN
PCA 1
ERROR IN PCA 1 TEST ASYNCHRONOUS
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INTERRUPT DURING PCA1
TEST
ERROR IN PCA 1 INTERNAL WRAP ASYNCHRO-
NOUS TEST.
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INTERRUPT DURING PCA1
TEST
HARDWIRED CONDITIONS IMPOSSIBLE TO GET IN
PCA 2
ERROR IN PCA 2 TEST ASYNCHRONOUS
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INT. DURING PCA2 TEST
ERROR IN PCA 2 INTERNAL WRAP ASYNCHRO-
NOUS TEST.
UNEXPECTED INT. (<> LEVEL 0) IN PCA2 TEST
HARDWIRED CONDITIONS IMPOSSIBLE TO GET IN
PCA 3
ERROR IN PCA 3 TEST SYNCHRONOUS
UNEXPECTED LEVEL 0 INT. DURING PCA3 TEST
ERROR IN PCA 3 INTERNAL WRAP SYNCHRONOUS
TEST.
UNEXPECTED INT. (<> LEVEL 0) IN PCA3 TEST
WRAP BLOCK DOES NOT SEEM TO BE PRESENT
ON LOCAL PORT , OR SIGNALS TESTED ARE NOT
OK.
LOCAL CONSOLE CABLE DOWN (WHEN WRAP
BLOCK INSTALLED)
LOCAL CONSOLE PCA ERROR
WRAP BLOCK DOES NOT SEEM TO BE PRESENT
ON REMOTE PORT , OR SIGNALS TESTED ARE
NOT OK.
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 6
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 6
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 27
Exchange the FRU group 28
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 27
1-24
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
Table 1-5 (Page 11 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
1A4
1A5
REMOTE/ALTERNATE CONSOLE CABLE DOWN
(WHEN WRAP BLOCK INSTALLED)
REMOTE/ALTERNATE CONSOLE PCA ERROR
Exchange the FRU group 29
Exchange the FRU group 26
1A6
1A7
WRAP BLOCK DOES NOT SEEM TO BE PRESENT
ON RSF PORT , OR SIGNALS TESTED ARE NOT
OK.
RSF CONSOLE CABLE DOWN (WHEN WRAP BLOCK
INSTALLED)
RSF CONSOLE PCA ERROR
Exchange the FRU group 27
Exchange the FRU group 30
1A8
1A9 TO
1AF
Unused
Exchange the FRU group 26
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
1B0 COMPLETION OF MCC TEST Progression code.
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
START OF LOCAL CONSOLE LINK TEST
SUCCESSFUL LOCAL CONSOLE LINK TEST
START OF REMOTE/ALT CONSOLE LINK TEST
SUCCESSFUL REMOTE /ALT CONSOLE LINK TEST
START OF RSF CONSOLE LINK TEST
SUCCESSFUL RSF CONSOLE LINK TEST
INFORMATION ONLY
INFORMATION ONLY
1B7 to 1B9
1D0
1D1
Unused
START OF MCAC TEST.Progression code.
Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
1D2 ñ
1D3
ñ
1D4 ñ
1D5 ñ
1D6
1D7
ñ
ñ
SOLID ERROR IN MCAD REGISTERS (1 FRU )
100 MS TIMER OF MCAD KO
PERMANENT IR 1 IN IOIRV
PERMANENT IR 4 IN IOIRV
IR LEVEL 1 OF MCAD NOT REPORTED TO MOSS
PROCESSOR.
'MOSS INOP BIT' NOT ON AFTER RESET BY THE
RESET LINE IN MCCU
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 26
1D8 ñ Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
1D9
ñ
1DA ñ
1DB ñ
1DC to
1DF
PERMANENT IR 0 IN IOIRV
SOLID ERROR IN MCCU REGISTERS
SOLID ERROR IN MCCU REGISTERS
Unused
Exchange the FRU group 5
1E0
1E1
1E2
1E3
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
1E4 to 1E6
1E7
ñ
1E8 to 1EE
1EF
1F0 to 1FD
1FE
1FF
ñ
IOC TAG RESET FUNCTION KO
Unused
WATCHDOG INTERRUPT BIT ON IN MCCU
MOSS INOP BIT NOT SETTABLE IN MCCU
Unused
NO INTERRUPT REPORTING POSSIBLE IN MCCU
Unused
END OF MCAC TEST Progression code.
Unused
Control lost during return to RAM IML processor
Completion of MOSS diagnostics RAM part
Exchange the FRU group 26
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Go to “MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble
Shooting” on page 2-1
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 26
Exchange the FRU group 5
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 26
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If permanently displayed, exchange the FRU group 2
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 25
Exchange the FRU group 2
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-25
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 12 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
200 to 9FF
Definition
Unused
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A00
A01
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A or SWAD
Adapter is 'down'; Excess spurious errors
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; Adapter is 'down'
Exchange the FRU group 5
A02 ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Bus Check;
Inbound parity
A03
A04
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Bus Check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Address parity check
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
A0A
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA1; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Command/data parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; Adapter is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Bus Check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Bus Check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Address parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA2; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Command/data parity check
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
A0B ñ
A0C
A0D
A0E
A0F
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; Adapter is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Bus Check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Bus Check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Address parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; PCA3; PIO Timeout; Outbound; Command/data parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter is
'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter is
'down'; Excess spurious errors
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter check;
1 usec counter parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Adapter check;
MIOC/CCU timeout parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO Bus check
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO Timeout
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Storage
ECC error;
Register space parity during main store.
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 20
Exchange the FRU group 42
A17
A18
A19
A1A
A1B
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Storage
ECC error;
Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Storage
ECC error; No bits active in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; Address exception on main store data access
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; Operation exception; CHCV Register invalid
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; Register precision; CHP Register bits 0-7 are not zero
Exchange the FRU group 5. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
1-26
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 13 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
A1C
A1D
A1E
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; Specification exception with invalid address on main store data access
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Exception; No bits active in DIV Register
Exchange the FRU group 5. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
A1F
A20
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Internal check; Cache parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Internal check; Invalid address on CHP Register access
Exchange the FRU group 5
A21
A22
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Internal check; Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; Step counter parity
A23
A24
A25
A26
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; Half word/burst counter parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; CCU busy; Time out
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; MIOC time out
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; MIOC parity check - in
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 20
A27
A28
A29
A2A
A2B
A2C
A2D
A2E
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; MIOC parity check - out
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; Multiple bits detected in Stat reg
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Adapter check; No CHIO in progress in Adapter Control Block
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; Multiple bits detected in EIRV reg
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; CHIO; No CHIO in progress in Adapter Control Block
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; Step counter parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; MIOC timeout
Exchange the FRU group 9
Exchange the FRU group 9
Exchange the FRU group 5
A2F
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; MIOC parity check - in
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; MIOC parity check - out
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; Multiple bits detected in Stat reg
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; Device; Adapter check; No Common Adapter Code running
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Bus check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;
Invalid command
Exchange the FRU group 20
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 20
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-27
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 14 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
A38
A39
A3A
A3B
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;
Outbound address parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCCU A; PIO; Timeout;
Multiple bits detected in Stat reg
Exchange the FRU group 20
A3C to A67 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A68 ñ Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter is 'down'
A69
A6A
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter is 'down';
Excess spurious errors
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter check;
Internal clock check 1
Exchange the FRU group 5
A6B
A6C
A6D
A6E
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter check;
Internal clock check 2
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Adapter check;
Multiple bits detected in Disconnect reg
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; State counter parity
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Shift pulse counter parity
Exchange the FRU group 5
A6F
A70
A71
A72
A73
A74
A75
A76
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Ground fault detected on a driver line
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Interface check
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Interface timeout
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Interface parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Multiple bits detected in EB Stat reg
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Switch interface error
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Switch driver fault
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Switch serial link parity
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
A77
A78
A79
A7A
A7B
A7C
A7D
A7E
A7F
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Switch invalid command
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Multiple bits detected in Device stat reg
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; Device; Adapter check; No Common Adapter Code running
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Bus check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;
Invalid command
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;
Outbound address parity check
Exchange the FRU group 5
Exchange the FRU group 5
1-28
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 15 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
A80
A81
A82
A83
A84
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;
Overrun
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; Timeout;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; SWAD; PIO; time out;
Multiple bits detected in Stat register
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; Adapter is 'down'
Exchange the FRU group 5
A85
A86
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; Bus check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter failure
Exchange the FRU group 5
A87
A88
A89
A8A
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter not detected
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out;
Invalid command
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out; Outbound parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out;
Adapter not detected
Exchange the FRU group 5
A8B
A8C
A8D
A8E
A8F
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; MCAD; PIO; time out; Multiple bits detected in Stat reg
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; Adapter is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO Bus check
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO time out
Exchange the FRU group 5
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
A90
A91
A92
A93
A94
A95
A96
A97
A98
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Storage ECC error; Register space parity during main store.
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Storage ECC error; Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Storage ECC error; No bits active in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;
Operation exception; CHCV Reg invalid
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;
Register precision; CHP Reg bits 0-7 are not zero
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;
Specification exception with invalid address on main store data access
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;
Address exception on main store data access
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception;
Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Exception; No bits active in DIV Register
Exchange the FRU group 43
Exchange the FRU group 15. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Exchange the FRU group 15. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
A99
A9A
A9B
A9C
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Internal check; Cache parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Internal check; Invalid address on CHP Reg access
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Internal check; Multiple bits in DIV Register
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; Multiple bits detected in EIRV reg
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-29
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 16 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
A9D
A9E
A9F
AA0
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; CHIO; No CHIO in progress in Adapter Control Block
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; Bus check;
Inbound parity
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter failure
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter not detected
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
AA1
AA2
AA3
AA4
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Invalid command
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Outbound address parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Outbound command/data parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out;
Adapter failure
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
AA5 ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; DFA; PIO; time out; Multiple bits detected in Stat reg
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
AA6
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; Adapter is 'down'
AA7 ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; Bus check;
Inbound parity
Exchange the FRU group 2
AA8 ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; Bus check;
Adapter not detected
AA9
AAA
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; time out; Outbound address parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; TOD; PIO; time out; Outbound command/data parity check
Moss level 0 error detection; PLC; Adapter is 'down'
Exchange the FRU group 2
AAB ñ
AAC to
AAD
Unused
Exchange the FRU group 12
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
AAE ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; PLC; MMIO Interface error
OR Invalid address during main store data access ( ON level 2) exchange the FRU group 12. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AAF ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; PLC; MMIO Parity error
OR Memory storage; Storage ECC; Data parity ( ON level 2)
Exchange the FRU group 12
AB0
AB1 ñ
Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 1
AB2
AB3
AB4
AB5
AB6
AB7
AB8
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; UC Bus; Bus is 'down'
Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; PIO
Storage ECC; Data parity whilst accessing MPC
Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; PIO
Storage ECC; Data parity whilst accessing MSC
Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; PIO
Storage ECC; Unresolved problem
Moss level 0 error detection; Register Storage; Storage
ECC; Check during PSV swap
Moss level 0 error detection; Memory Storage; CHIO
Storage ECC; Data parity
Moss level 0 error detection; Memory Storage; Storage
ECC; Data parity ( NOT ON level 2)
Moss level 0 error detection; Memory Storage; Storage
ECC; Instruction fetch parity
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
1-30
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 17 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
AB9
ABA
ABB
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Loop; Excessive MOSS
IML loop is detected via a TOD interrupt
Moss level 0 error detection; Erroneous MOSS code;
Program error; IO address is not authorized Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by
Moss level 0 error detection; Diag code; Program error;
Power on reset / start; Unresolved
Exchange the FRU group 13 the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
ABC
ABD
ABE
ABF
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Invalid BER set during Checkpoint Retry
Recovery
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Invalid BER set during Postponed Retry Recovery
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Invalid BER set during Transparent Retry
Recovery your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Exchange the FRU group 13. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AC0
AC1
AC2
AC3
AC4
AC5
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Program request dispatcher - module
CHGH0PGM - is in an unexpected state
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Invalid adaptor ID present in module CHGH0BUS
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Ram processor is in an unexpected state
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Ros processor is in an unexpected state your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Call address stack table is full
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Return address stack table is empty
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; The type of BER created does not exist in the
BER table
Exchange the FRU group 13. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AC6
AC7
AC8
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Level 0 code; Program error; Moss already IML'd routine before the IML routine your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; CHIO error detected
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; Level 0 interrupt detected
Exchange the FRU group 13. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AC9
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; Level 0 interrupt in IOIRV detected
Exchange the FRU group 5. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
ACA
ACB
ACC
ACD
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO Bus check; No adaptor found with Last Priority Level
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO Bus check; Instruction was not an IO type
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO Bus check; Detected on level 2
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO Bus check; Detected on level 6
Exchange the FRU group 9. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-31
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 18 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
ACE ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO time out; No adaptor found with Last Priority
Level
ACF
AD0
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO time out; Instruction was not an IO type
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO time out; Detected on level 2
Exchange the FRU group 9. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AD1
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; PIO time out; Detected on level 6
AD2
AD3
AD4
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unexpected spurious interrupt; Program request detected in PIRV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Addressing exception during Instruction fetch
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Addressing exception during Main store data access
Exchange the FRU group 9. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD8
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Fixed point overflow exception
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Invalid address exception during non main store access
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Multiple bits detected in DIV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Multiple bits detected in EIRV
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AD9
ADA
ADB
ADC
ADD
ADE
ADF
AE0
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Operation exception; Invalid opcode detected
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error; Register precision exception
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error;
Specification exception; Invalid address during Instruction fetch
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error;
Specification exception; Invalid address during Main store data access
( NOT ON level 2)
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error;
Specification exception; Invalid address during non
GPR access
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error;
Specification exception; Invalid execution of KI instruction
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Exception error;
Specification exception; PSV bits (40-44-47) are not zero
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal
Check; Cache register parity check
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
1-32
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 19 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
AE1
AE2
AE3
AE4
AE5
AE6
AE7
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal
Check; Invalid address during GPR access
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal
Check; Invalid address during PSV swap
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal
Check; Multiple bits detected in DIV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Internal
Check; Multiple bits detected in EIRV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Storage/ECC
Check; Multiple bits detected in DIV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Storage/ECC
Check; Multiple bits detected in EIRV
Moss level 0 error detection; Unresolved Storage/ECC
Check; No bits detected in DIV
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Exchange the FRU group 11. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
AE8 to BFE Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Exchange the FRU group 55.
B01
B02
B03
MLA internal diagnostic error
Error during MPC-MLA interface test
MOSS LAN adapter (MLA) hardware initialization error
B8D to B8E Hardware MMIO error
Exchange the FRU group 56.
Exchange the FRU group 57.
Exchange the FRU group 55. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange. A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
B8F
B90
Lan adapter check
MOSS LAN adapter (MLA) hardware initialization error
B91
B92
B93
B94
MOSS microcode error
Ring lobe media test failure
Ring signal lost while opening
Ring wire fault while opening
Exchange the FRU group 55.
Exchange the FRU group 55.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Check LAN cable connections, if problem persists: Exchange the FRU group 55.
A LAN ring problem is suspected.
Use the
Token-Ring Network,
Problem Determination Guide
SX27-3710.
Check the LAN cable connections, if the problem persists: A LAN ring problem is suspected. Use the
Token-Ring Network, Problem Determination Guide SX27-3710.
B95
B96
B97
B98
Ring open frequency error
Ring time out while opening
Ring failure while opening
Ring beaconing while opening
A LAN ring problem is suspected.
Use the Token-Ring Network,
Problem Determination Guide
SX27-3710.
B99 Ring duplicate node address
Duplicate Node address. Exchange the FRU group 55. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
B9A
B9B
B9C
B9D
Ring open request parameters
Ring open remove received
Ring open IMPL force received
Ring no monitor for RPL at open
A LAN ring problem is suspected.
Use the
Token-Ring Network,
Problem Determination Guide
SX27-3710.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-33
3745 Panel Codes
BB0
BB1
BB2
BB3
BB4
BB5
BB6
Table 1-5 (Page 20 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
B9E Ring lobe wire fault at open
Check the LAN cable connections, if the problem persists: Exchange the
FRU group 55.
B9F Remote station connection time out
Check that the service processor is powered On, if yes: there was a LAN time out or a LAN problem or a service processor problem is suspected. Go to Service Processor
Installation and Maintenance manual, chapter "Service Processor Problem
Determination".
Communication lost between MOSS and MOSS-E.
BC0
BC1
BC2
BC3
BC4
BD0
BE0
Ring link lost
Ring DM/DISC received/acked
Ring FRMR received
Ring SABME received
Ring TI timer expired
Ring FRMR sent
Ring unexpected SABME received
Permanent ring beaconing
Ring lobe wire fault
Auto removal while beaconing
Ring remove received
Ring auto removal
FSM time out
Watchdog time out
Check the physical connection between the 3745 and the service processor.
Check that the service processor is powered ON.
Review the configuration of stations connected to the LAN.
The MOSS-to-MOSS-E connection will be automatically recovered when the number of broadcast frames goes under 200 per second.
If the problem continues a Service
Processor problem is suspected, go to
Service Processor Installation and
Maintenance manual, chapter
"Service Processor Problem Determination" or a MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
A Service Processor problem is suspected, go to Service Processor
Installation and Maintenance manual, chapter "Service Processor Problem
Determination" or a MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
A LAN ring problem is suspected.
Use the Token-Ring Network,
Problem Determination Guide
SX27-3710.
Check the LAN cable connections, if the problem persists: Exchange the
FRU group 55.
Exchange the FRU group 55.
A LAN problem is suspected. Use the Token-Ring Network, Problem
Determination Guide SX27-3710.
Check the LAN cable connections, if the problem persists: Exchange the
FRU group 55.
A Service Processor problem is suspected. Go to Service Processor
Installation and Maintenance manual, chapter "Service Processor Problem
Determination".
1-34
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 21 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
BFF
ñ
Moss level 0 Incoherence; Problem within the level 0 code
Exchange the FRU group 2. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
C00 to C03 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
C04
C05
C06
C07
C08
C09
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid SVTTRC
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; More than one request
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid SVTDRC
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid TCB ID
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid Adapter ID
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid Timer request
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
C0A
C0B
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Lost BER counter is full
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; BER length null
Refer to logged BERs leading to overflow, or: exchange the FRU group
46.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
C0C
C0D
C0E
C0F
C10
C11
C12
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid macro ID in CHGSUBEM
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Supervisor; Invalid adaptor ID in CHGSUBEA
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Keyboard/Display Support; Invalid function request
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Keyboard/Display Support; End I/O without FRB
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Keyboard/Display Support; Program interrupt without
FRB
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Keyboard/Display Support; Invalid interrupt
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid function request
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
C13
C14 ñ
C15 to C16
C17
C18
C19
C1A
ñ
ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid header label
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid LM elements
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with preemptive request
Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-35
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 22 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
C1B
C1C
C1D
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Control record found
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with exception detected
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Program problem detected by
CAC
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
C1E
C1F
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with error detected
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Invalid completion status with complete but with neither exception nor error detected
C20
C21
C22
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Unexpected completion status or interrupt.
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Bad disk IOCS initialize
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND;
Disk/Diskette Support; Threshold exceeded on unexpected interrupt
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
C23
C24
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; No action for Scanner AC hit
Unused
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C2A
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Undefined interrupt
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Unexpected Mailbox IN rejected
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Invalid ID from scanner selected
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Invalid adaptor address
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Undefined CHIO request
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Switch adaptor CAC requests an ABEND
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
C2B to
C2D
C2E ñ
C2F to C30
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Support; Invalid PCW command
Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
C31
C32
C33
C34
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator
Control; Load module not found
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator
Control; Logical Disk error
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator
Control; Invalid cancel request
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator
Control; Moss IML request by operator
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
1-36
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 23 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
C35
C36
C37
C38
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Operator
Control; Data stream out is greater than 1024 bytes
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Functions; End of DCF application
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Functions; Incorrect load module identified
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Functions; Logical disk error
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
C39
C3A
C3B
C3C
C3D
C3E
C3F
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; CCU
Functions; Unknown operator control return code
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Load module not found
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Logical disk error
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Unknown operator control return code
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Conflicting dump file information
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Scanner not installed or SCB not flagged "auto dump"
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Control program invalid answer
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
C40
C41
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Disconnect not allowed
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Transient
Tasks; Buffer limit reached
C42
C43
C44
C45
C46
C47
C48
C49
C4A
C4B
C4C
C4D
C4E
C4F
C50
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Box Error
Logging; Invalid BER stack
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box
Support; Load module not found
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box
Support; Mail box request rejected
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box
Support;
Unsolicited call
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Mail Box
Support; Invalid RU
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Macro
Invocation; Started bit in request
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; System
IPL; Start IPL refused
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Disk
Functions; Disk unusable
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Disk
Functions; Unable to load CHGDFINT
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Power
Functions; Incorrect access to PCST
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Power
Functions; Invalid data - threshold
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Power
Functions; Next request received before RP
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Level 1;
Permanent HLIR - kill MOSS
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Level 1;
Excess amount of spurious errors
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; Level 1;
Soft checker - snapshot
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-37
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 24 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; MSD;
Invalid frame number
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; IMIN2; No timer IMIN2
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;
NCP pointer not found
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;
Invalid field format received
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;
Invalid TIC storage
Moss level 0 error detection; MOSS ABEND; TRSS;
TRA/TIC not installed or ASB not flagged "Auto TIC
Dump"
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
C57 to C61
C62 to C7A
C7B to D00
Unused
MOSS microcode error
Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D01
D02
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Adapter busy - attn
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; FRB busy
Exchange the FRU group 44
D03 to D04 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D05
D06
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Adapter busy - CHIO
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Adapter busy - reset
Exchange the FRU group 44
D07 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D08
D09
D0A
D0B
D0C
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; SCA 1 not open
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; SCA 2 not open
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Adapter not open
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump;
Pre-emptive request complete
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump;
Pre-emptive request rejected
Exchange the FRU group 45
Exchange the FRU group 46
Exchange the FRU group 44
D0D
D0E
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; SCA 1 already open
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; SCA 2 already open
Exchange the FRU group 44
D0F to D10 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D11
D12
D13
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; FRB Program check
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; BCL Program check
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Invalid PIO command (hardware & equipment checks)
Exchange the FRU group 44
Exchange the FRU group 44
Exchange the FRU group 44
D14to D1F Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
1-38
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 25 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
D20
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump;
Indeterminate equipment check (hardware error in adapt.)
Exchange the FRU group 44
D21
D22 ñ
D23 to D27
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Device (SCA) ready (hardware error in adaptor)
Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D28 ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Seek check (DATA transmission problems)
Exchange the FRU group 44
D29 to D2F
D30
D31
ñ
ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Device (SCA) not ready (no error)
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Control record found (error/not successful class. sequence errors)
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then ensure the diskette is correctly inserted and that the diskette drive operator handle is closed. If no problem in this area, then exchange the FRU group 45
If loading from HDD then exchange the FRU group 46
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
D32
D33
D34
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Disk errors during
IML/Dump; Sector Buffer Parity error
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump;
Termination error with no specific error
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; Cylinder overrun
Exchange the FRU group 44
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45 if loading from HDD then exchange the FRU group 46
D35 ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; Write/Protect fault with FDD
The installed diskette is 'Write protected'. Replace the diskette with an equivalent which permits writing.
D36
D37
D38
D39
D3A
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; Write fault with HDD
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; Halt during a CHIO operation
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; I/O bus parity error
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; CCB with no active CSB
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; Invalid command in CCB or SSB
Go to IBM 3745 Service Functions
Exchange the FRU group 7
Exchange the FRU group 44
D3B ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; ERP invoked by DFA
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
D3C ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; internal parity error
Exchange the FRU group 44
D3D ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; data error (SSB byte 1)
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 21 If loading from
HDD then go to IBM 3745 Service
Functions
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-39
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 26 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
D3E
D3F
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; record not found (L/operator intervention required)
Unused
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then exchange the FRU group 45; if loading from
HDD then exchange the FRU group
46
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D40
D41
D42
D43
D44
D45
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; CRC/ECC error on ID
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; CRC/ECC error on data
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; bad track detected
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; format error detected
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; unable to find ID
Moss level 0 error detection; diskette errors during
IML/dump; format error detected
Go to
Go to
IBM 3745 Service Functions
IBM 3745 Service Functions
Exchange the FRU group 47
D46 to D4F
D50 ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; disk change information
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then ensure the diskette is correctly inserted and that the diskette drive operator handle is closed. If no problem in this area, then exchange the FRU group 45
If loading from HDD then exchange the FRU group 46
D51 to D75 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
D76 ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; PIO MCK (non-recursive)
Exchange the FRU group 7
D77 to DF5 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
DF6 ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; disk errors during
IML/dump; PIO MCK (recursive) - (preemptive request class.)
Exchange the FRU group 7
DF7
DF8
ñ
Unused
Moss level 0 error detection; device errors during
IML/dump; dump directory entry not found
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then the problem may be a possible incorrect diskette in the drive. If OK then try the backup diskette. If problem still exists then exchange the FRU group
18
OR
If loading is from the disk then restore the disk. Refer to IBM 3745 Service
Functions If problem still exists then exchange the FRU group 48. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
1-40
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 27 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
DF9
DFA
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; hard disk not initialized
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; hard disk not formatted
Restore the disk. Refer to IBM 3745
Service Functions If problem still exists then exchange the FRU group
48 go to page 1-49. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange;
A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
DFB
DFC
DFD
ñ
ñ
ñ
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; invalid IML request
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; volume IML check
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; data compare check
If loading from diskette (function 9 from the control panel) then the problem may be a possible incorrect diskette in the drive. If OK then try the backup diskette. If problem still exists then exchange the FRU group
18
OR
If loading is from the disk then restore the disk. Refer to IBM 3745 Service
Functions If problem still exists then exchange the FRU group 48. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
DFE
DFF
F00
ñ
ñ
E00 to EFF
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; disk time out
Moss level 0 error detection; Device errors during
IML/dump; diskette time out
Unused
Status/progression step; Start of MOSS dump
Exchange the FRU group 46. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Exchange the FRU group 45. Record the following action for use if the problem is not corrected by the FRU exchange; A MOSS microcode problem is suspected. Call your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Normal progression code. If this code is displayed for more than 2 minutes, then a MOSS microcode problem is suspected.
Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
Status/progression step; MOSS dump has been completed without error
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; IML Initialization
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; open adaptor
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; open secondary component address (either disk or diskette)
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; check disk or diskette ID n/a
Normal progression code. If this code is displayed for more than 2 minutes, then a MOSS microcode problem is suspected.
Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
F06 to F07 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-41
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 28 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
F08
F09
F0A
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; find directory entry
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; IML end - go to MOSS loader
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; Ram entry (Start of MOSS Init step 1)
Normal progression code. If this code is displayed for more than 2 minutes, then a MOSS microcode problem is suspected.
Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
F0B
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; end of MOSS init step 1
Normal progression code. If this code is displayed during the 1st installation, a manual intervention is required to exchange the wrap block.
F0C
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; start of MOSS init step 2 (Moss level 7)
Normal progression code. If this code is displayed for more than two minutes, then suspect any adapters attached to the MOSS, or microcode problem is suspected. Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
MOSS diagnostics detected an error during the IML.
F0D
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; IML complete with errors detected during
MOSS diagnostics.
Normally a reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
This code may be caused by a console problem which prevents the display of the reference code.
If this is the case, go to “3745
Console Symptoms” on page 1-10.
F0E
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; IML complete - MOSS ALONE
N/A
F0F
Status/progression step which occurs during the IML sequence; IML Complete - CCU connected - MOSS
OFFLINE
If this code appear without requested
IML (MOSS become alone during normal operations) look at the console for messages and go to
“3745 Console Symptoms” on page 1-10
F10
F11
F12
F13
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Solid error during MIOC
operation
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU hardcheck during a CCU IPL in progress
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Host IPL request during CCU IPL in progress
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Unidentified
IPL selection
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
F14
F15
F16
F17
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CDS not correctly built by the CDF
Unused
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU memory test failed
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU test failed
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
If this code is displayed during IML:
1. Run IOC bus diagnostics to ensure that there is no adapter problem.
2. Run CCU diagnostics.
1-42
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 29 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
F18
F19
F1A
F1B
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IOC BUS test failed
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL port table has been incorrectly built via the CDF
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP/SALT abend. (output 70)
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
F1C
F1D
F1E
F1F
F20
F21
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP/MOSS interface error
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; NCP/EP init abend
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CLDP time out on 'IN MAILBOX' acknowledgement
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; MOSS time out on waiting NCP/EP init MB out
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; MOSS time out on waiting NCP/EP init MB in acknowledgement
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; NCP/EP
INIT/MOSS interface error acknowledgement
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
F22 to F23 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F2A
F2B
F2C
F2D
F2E
F2F
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no scanner
IMLed after scanner IML routine (Phase 3)
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no valid scanner in CDS
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; LSSD residual count > 7
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; LSSD string select error during a read or write LSSD
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1A load module not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1B load module not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 2 load module not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 3 load module not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 4 load module not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; too many
CCU RE-IPL (PGM abend or hardcheck)
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; wrong CCU
LSSD initialization
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no IPL port is available (neither link nor channel) and no load module on the disk is available
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
There is a defect with the hard disk.
Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CPIT error:
F30
F31
CPIT length different from CHGCONCP
Some CPIT fields not initialized
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1C load module not accessible
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
F32
F33
F34
F35
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU check occurred during phase 1C
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; SALT not accessible
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU memory failure
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; Dispcrepancy between CLDP and 3746-900 CDF information
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-43
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 30 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
F36 to F47
Definition
Unused
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
F48
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU and
CACHE checkout failed SCTL checkout failed
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
F49 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
F4A
F4B
F4C
F4D
F4E
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; SCTL initialization failed
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; switch checkout failed
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; permanent level 1 in CCU, no need to load CLDP
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; channel monitoring failure in normal monitor mode, during FB or SB
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
F4F
F50
F51
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; reset adapters can not be performed during FB or SB
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; problem detected by the CDF
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CP not set
ONLINE by the fallback or switchback
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; bus switching operation unsuccessful
F52
F53
F54
F55
F56
F57
F58
F59
F5A
F60
F61
F62
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; problem detected with the MCAD interface
Error detected during the IPL sequence; fallback function not supported
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; no buffer available for NCP during fallback
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; NCP / MOSS fallback interface error
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; interface problem between fallback-switchback and channel monitoring
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CCU power has dropped during the IPL
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; error during
SBK protocol
Error detected during MOSS IML diagnostics; IPL can not be performed on the selected CCU
Errors detected during the IPL sequence; CA configuration from CDF does not match the actual configuration
Error detected during MOSS IML Diagnostics; IPL can not be performed on CCU
IPL cancelled after IPL abort
Error detected during MOSS IML Diagnostics; IPL cancelled after a stop in phase 1 diagnostic
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
F63 to FD5 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
FD6
FD7
FD8
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; the control program loading is started from the Disk
Status/progression step; dump control program on
MOSS disk in progress
Status / Progression step; save control program on
MOSS disk in progress
If this code is displayed for more than
2 minutes, when the load/dump is via the disk, then refer to “How to Run
MOSS Diagnostics” on page 3-4 to aid problem isolation and refer to IBM
3745 Service Functions, "Hard Disk
Trouble Analysis".
FD9 to FE0 Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
1-44
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 31 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
FE1
FE2
Errors detected during IML sequence; disk initialization failure
Errors detected during IML sequence; disk load operation failure
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM
3745 Service Functions, Chapter 11 may be used later during the investigation.
FE3
FE4
FE5
FE6
Errors detected during IML sequence; power error A get end of IML data
Unused
Errors detected during IML sequence; panel error
Errors detected during IML sequence; MIOC error with
CCU operation
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Record “How to Run the
Control Panel Test” on page 3-8 which may assist problem isolation.
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
FE7
FE8
FE9
FEA
FEB
FEC to
FED
FEE
FEF
Unused
Errors detected during IML sequence; disk error when reading CDF
Errors detected during IML sequence; CDF not created
Errors detected during IML sequence; CDF access function(s) error
Errors detected during IML sequence; NCP time out on mailbox to CCU A
Unused
Errors detected during IML sequence; MOSS data saving error
Errors detected during IML sequence; disk error when reading Port swap file.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM
3745 Service Functions, Chapter 11 may be used later during the investigation.
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM
3745 Service Function Chapter 9 and
11 may be used later during the investigation.
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Record whether this code can be resolved by use of the
Problem Determination Guide,
SA33-0096. Perform a MOSS IML but if problem occurs again Contact your support structure.
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Record whether this code can be resolved by use of the
Problem Determination Guide,
SA33-0096. Perform a MOSS IML but if problem occurs again Contact your support structure.
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Be aware that the IBM
3745 Service Functions, Chapter 11 may be used later during the investigation.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-45
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 32 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
Definition
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
FF0
FF1
FF2
FF3
Status/progression step which occur during the IPL sequence; IPL entered
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 1 started
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 2 started
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 3 entered
If this code is displayed for more than
2 minutes, then a MOSS microcode problem is suspected.
Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
If this code is displayed for more than
2 minutes when:
1. The load/dump is via a channel, then go to “MAP 3500:
Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.
FF4
FF5
FF6
FF7
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL phase 4 entered
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; the control program load/dump is started on a channel-attached 3745
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; the control program load/dump is started on a link-attached 3745
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; control program is loaded and initialization has started
2. The load/dump is via the disk, then run “How to Run MOSS
Diagnostics” on page 3-4 to aid problem isolation and refer to IBM
3745 Service Functions, "Hard
Disk Trouble Analysis".
OR if this code is displayed for more than
10 - 20 minutes (depending on IPL link speed) when:
3. The load/dump is via a link, then follow carefully the PD Guide.
If this code is displayed for more than
2 minutes, then go to “MAP 3500:
Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or
Line Errors on the TSS” on page 2-7.
If this code is displayed for more than
10 - 20 minutes (depending on IPL link speed) then follow the PD guide.
If this code is displayed for more than
2 minutes, then the CCU failed to initialize the control program. A control program problem is suspected.
Contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
FF8
Status/Progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; control program Load/Dump is started on a
ESCA attached 3756-900.
No action required
FF9
FFA
Unused
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL has completed but has detected a PCA1 adapter error; local console may not be accessible
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
Go to “How to Run the Console Link
Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170” on page 3-6 and run the local console link test. Record: exchange the FRU group 26 for possible exchange if problem still exists.
FFB
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL was cancelled by the 3745 console operator
No action required
FFC Unused
Go to “MAP 3220: Undefined Panel
Message” on page 2-5
FFD
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL has completed; The MOSS IML was performed from the diskette; the control program is loaded and MOSS is operational
No action required
FFE
Status/progression step which occurs during the IPL sequence; IPL has been completed but has detected some error during the sequence.
A reference code will have been produced on the 3745 console. Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
1-46
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Panel Codes
Table 1-5 (Page 33 of 33). Panel Codes. An
ñ
following a panel code denotes that the code should 'Blink'.
Panel
Code
FFF
Definition
Status/MOSS offline function is successfully ended.
Action: Go to “3745 FRU Group
Table” on page 1-49 or to MAP number
No action required
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-47
FRU Group Table
Using the MIP FRU Group Table
Very important
The MIP FRU group table lists the FRU groups likely to be called in this manual.
This table covers MOSS/POWER FRU group for failures that prevent correct operation of the BRC function.
Each FRU group contains from one to three FRUs, listed by name and location.
The “1st FRU” is the most likely to be failing. The “3rd FRU” is the least likely.
Usually, only one FRU in an FRU group is failing, and you should try to reduce the FRU group
to the one failing FRU.
If you can reproduce the 3745 failure, exchange FRUs one at a time until the failing FRUs are isolated.
As soon as you have recorded the FRU and location in the FRU Group, go to “3745 FRU
List” on page 1-53.
Always
1. Ensure that the failing area of the machine is available for service.
2. Consult the “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1 before removing any FRUs.
3. Check for loose cards, cables, and crossovers before exchanging FRUs.
4. Run diagnostics after any repair action.
5. Follow the 'CE leaving' procedure before returning the machine to the customer.
The FRU group table starts on the next page.
1-48
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Group Table
Very important
Read the previous page before using this table.
FRU Group Table
Table 1-6 (Page 1 of 3). 3745 FRU Table
FRU
Group
1st FRU
Name Location
2nd FRU
Name Location
1
2
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
3
4
5
6
7
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
PCC 01A-X0B
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
DFA 01A-X0G
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
DFA 01A-X0G
8
9
10
DFA 01A-X0G
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
PCC 01A-X0B
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
CONTROL PANEL
11
12
13
14
15
16
MSC
PCC
01A-X0E
01A-X0E
01A-X0F
01A-X0B
MPC/MPC2
MPC/MPC2
DFA 01A-X0G
DFA 01A-X0G
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MSC 01A-X0F
PCC 01A-X0B
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
HDD 01D
3rd FRU
Name Location
DFA 01A-X0G
DFA 01A-X0G
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
17
18
DFA
FDD
01A-X0G
01B
FDD 01B MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
Cable Location
01A-Y0D1 to
01C-A1J1
01A-Y0C4 to
01D-A1J2
01A-Y0D4 to
01D-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-49
FRU Group Table
Table 1-6 (Page 2 of 3). 3745 FRU Table
FRU
Group
1st FRU
Name Location
2nd FRU
Name Location
19 FDD 01B DFA 01A-X0G
20
21
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
Diskette
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
DFA 01A-X0G
3rd FRU
Name Location
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
PUC 01G-V
FDD 01B
Cable Location
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
30
31
32
33
41
42
43
44
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
Local Console
Remote Console
RSF
PCC 01A-X0B
PCC 01A-X0B
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MSC 01A-X0F
CONTROL PANEL
PCC 01A-X0B
CONTROL PANEL
PCC 01A-X0B
Battery 01C-D1
PS Fan 01K
Logic Fan 01E
MSC 01A-X0F
MSC 01A-X0F
DFA 01A-X0G
PCC 01A-X0B
MSC 01A-X0F
DFA 01A-X0G
MSC 01A-X0F
Wrap Block
Console Cable
Console Cable
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MOSS Power
PUC 01G-V
PCC
PCC
01A-X0B
CONTROL PANEL
01A-X0B
PCC 01A-X0B
PCC 01A-X0B
PCC 01A-X0B
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
DFA 01A-X0G
MSC 01A-X0F
PCC 01A-X0B
MSC 01A-X0F
DFA 01A-X0G
MSC 01A-X0F
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
01A-Y0C5 to
01R-A1J3
01A-Y0B5 to
01R-A1J2
01A-Y0A5 to
01R-A1J1
01A-Y0A2 to
01G-A1YR
01A-Y0B2 to
01G-A1YQ
01A-Y0D1 to
01C-A1J1
01A-Y0D1 to
01C-A1J1
01A-Y0D1 to
01C-A1J1
01A-Y0B1 to
01C-D1J1 and
01C-B1J1
01A-Y0A1 to
01E-A0J1 and
01K-A0J1
01A-Y0A1 to
01E-A0J1 and
01K-A0J1
1-50
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
FRU Group Table
Table 1-6 (Page 3 of 3). 3745 FRU Table
FRU
Group
1st FRU
Name Location
2nd FRU
Name Location
45 DFA 01A-X0G FDD 01B
3rd FRU
Name Location
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
DFA
FDD
HDD
PUC
01A-X0G
01B
01D
01G-V
PS1 01F
PCC 01A-X0B
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
PCC 01A-X0B
DFA 01A-X0G
MLA 01A-X0D
MLA 01A-X0D
MLA 01A-X0D
MLA 01A-X0D
HDD
DFA
PCC
01D
01A-X0G
01A-X0B
PCC 01A-X0B
PS2 in PPB 01H
PCC 01A-X0B
EPO box 01S
MPC/MPC2
01A-X0E
MPC2 01A-X0E
MPC2 01A-X0E
MPC2 01A-X0E
MCC/MAC
01A-X0H
MSC 01A-X0F
MOSS Board
PCC 01A-X0B
Cable Location
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0C4 to
01D-A1J2
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0C1 to
01B-A1J1
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0C4 to
01D-A1J2
01F-A1J3 to
01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
01A-Y0A2 to
01G-A1YR
01A-Y0B2 to
01G-A1YQ
01A-Y0D2 to
01H-B1J8
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-51
FRU Group Table
3745 Cable Location
Table 1-7. 3745 Cable Location
From To
01A-Y0A1 01E-A0J1 01K-A0J1
01A-Y0A2
01A-Y0A3
01A-Y0A5
01A-Y0B1
01G-A1YR
01G-A1YP
01R-A1J1
01C-D1J1 01C-B1J1
01A-Y0B2
01A-Y0B3
01A-Y0B5
01A-Y0C1
01A-Y0C3
01A-Y0C4
01G-A1YQ
01G-A1YN
01R-A1J2
01B-A1J1
01L-B1J1 01L-B2J1
01D-A1J2
01A-Y0C5
01A-Y0D1
01A-Y0D2
01A-Y0D4
01A-Y0E3
01A-Y0E4
01F-A1J3
01H-B1J8
01H-B1J6
01H-B1J7
01F-A1J5
01F-A1J6
01F-A1J8 via 01L-B1
01F-A1J7 via 01L-B2
01H-A1J11
01F-A1J4
01R-A1J3
01C-A1J1
01H-B1J8
01D-A1J1
01H-B1J9
01F-A1J2
01D-A1J3 01B-A1J2
01C-C1
01E-A0J2
01K-A0J2
01M-A1A3
01M-A2A3
01L-A1A3
01L-A2A3
01S-A0J5/6/7/8
01G-A1YE
Name
AFD CCU/Power. Sense to PCC
CCU from/to MCC, PUC (cable 1)
POR PCC to CCU, LA, CA
RSF console from/to MCC
Panel: Battery/Ready LED
CCU from/to MCC, PUC (cable 2)
Channel from/to MCC, CAs
Remote console from/to MCC
Diskette data/control from/to DFA ac FAIL / POR
Disk data from/to DFA
Local console from/to MCC
Panel display from/to PCC
5 Volts to PCC from PPB
Disk control from/to DFA
PS2 power Control.
PWR ENT/Control from PS1 to PCC
Disk / Diskette power from PS1
EPO switch from panel to PPB
CCU fan box (Power) from PS2
Power fan box (Power) from PS2
LIB1
LIB1 or LIB3
LIB2
LIB1 or LIB2
Customer EPO
Multi voltage to CCU
1-52
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
DCRG
DFA
LIC1
LIC3
LIC4
LIC5
LIC6
MAC
DSKTE
DMUX
EAC
Fan1
Fan2
FDD
FESH
HDD
MCC
3745 FRU List
FRU Code
BATT
CADR
CAL6
CAL7
CBSP
CBC
CSC
CSP
08C
850
8A0
430
70C
0EC
Type
04C
06C
07C
FRU Name
Battery
CADR
CAL
CAL
CBSP
CBSP2
CBSP3
CBC
CSC
CSP
73C
0FC
DCREG
DFA
LIC1
LIC3
LIC4
LIC5
LIC6
MAC
Diskette
DMUX
EAC
Fan1
Fan2
FDD
FESH
HDD
20C
22C
23C
24C
25C
84C
10C
12C
14C
7EC
7FC
17C
18C
1AC
7BC MCC
MLA
MPC
MPC2
44C MLA
2BC MPC
2CC MPC2
3745 FRU List
Text
It is not necessary to disable any part of the machine or run diagnostics. Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
Channel adapter driver receiver card. Go to “Disabling Procedure
0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61
Channel adapter logic card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.
Channel adapter logic card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.
Controller bus and service processor. Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways
Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Controller bus coupler. Refer to the
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol
Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Scanner for medium low speed. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120:
Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
Communication scanner processor (associated with FESH card for high high speed lines. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
DC regulator card Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
Disk file adapter card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
Remove the diskette from the FDD and exchange it.
Double multiplex card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
Ethernet adapter card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
Flexible disk drive. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the
MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
Front-end scanner (high speed). Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120:
Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
Hard disk drive. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the
MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
Line interface coupler type 1 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:
Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
Line interface coupler type 3 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:
Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
Line interface coupler type 4 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:
Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
Line interface coupler type 5 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:
Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
Line interface coupler type 6 card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150:
Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
MOSS adapter card for 3745 Model 17A. Go to “Disabling Procedure
0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for
Maintenance” on page 1-65.
MOSS control card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
MOSS LAN adapter card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to
Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
MOSS processor card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
MOSS processor card (specific for Model 17A). Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for
Maintenance” on page 1-65.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-53
3745 FRU List
FRU Code
MSC
MSC2
PCC
PNLC
PS1
PS2
PUC
SALC
SCTL
SMUXA/B
STO4
STO8
TIC2
TRM
TERMC
TERMD
TERMI
TERMR
Type
2DC
2EC
7AC
MSC2
PCC
77C
46C
47C
85C
079C
71C
72C
87C
75C
3AC
3DC
76C
Control Panel
PS1
PS2
PUC
SALC
SCTL
SMUXA/B
STO4
STO8
TIC2
TRM
TERMC
7CC
7DC
86C
FRU Name
MSC
TERMD
TERMI
TERMR
Text
MOSS storage card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65
MOSS storage card (specific for Model 17A). Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for
Maintenance” on page 1-65.
Power control card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
Go to “Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance” on page 1-65.
Power supply number 1. Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
Power supply number 2. Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
CCU card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
Scanner ALC. Refer to Airline Line Control Scanner RPQ 7L1148
Supplement to Service Documentation SY33-2077.
Storage control card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
Single multiplex card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
Storage card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
Storage card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
Token-ring interface coupler type 2. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0140:
Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance” on page 1-66.
Token-ring multiplexer card; Go to “Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance” on page 1-66.
Channel adapter IOC terminator card (specific for Model 17A). Go to
“3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
DMA terminator card. Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62
IOC terminator card. Go to “3745 Diagnostic Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
IOC terminator card (specific for Model 17A). Go to “3745 Diagnostic
Requirement” on page 1-60 and follow 'CCU/IOC bus' requirements.
1-54
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance Using a CPN
The service processor console should be logged ON. If it is not go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 for logging ON and return here.
1. On the MOSS-E View window, click on Program (in the action bar).
2. Click on Search CPN.
3. Enter the CPN.
4. The controller icon corresponding to the CPN is highlighted. On the bottom line of the MOSS-E View window the type of controller (3745 or 3746-900) and its serial number are displayed.
5. Note the type of controller and double-click on the highlighted controller icon.
001
Was a 3745 Controller icon highlighted?
Yes No
002
Was a 3746-900 Controller icon highlighted?
Yes No
003
Go to Step 008.
004
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
005
The selected machine is a 3745.
Are you here for a hardware problem (with FRU)?
Yes No
006
For a 3745 microcode problem refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.
Use the "Handling the Microcode Change Levels" procedure in the "Maintaining the Code Loaded on the Service Processor" chapter.
007
The 3745 Menu window is displayed.
Click on the Problem Management option.
Double-click on the Display Alarms option.
On the next window, double-click on the alarm which has the CPN corresponding to your call.
You obtain a FRU or a list of FRUs with the FRU location.
Note this information and go to “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53 for FRU replacement.
008
The service processor icon is highlighted.
Are you here for a hardware problem (with FRU)?
Yes No
009
For a service processor microcode problem, refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual. Use the "Handling the Microcode Change Levels" procedure in the "Maintaining the
Code Loaded on the Service Processor" chapter.
010
On the MOSS-E View window, double click on the service processor icon.
(Step 010 continues)
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-55
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance
010 (continued)
The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.
Click on the Problem management option.
Double-click on the Display Alarms option.
The Display Alarms window is displayed.
Record the SRC number of the alarm which has the CPN corresponding to your call.
Return to the Problem management window.
Double-click on the Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs).
Select Alarms then click on OK.
Double-click on the alarm which has the SRC number previously recorded.
A FRU or a list of FRUs with the FRU location is displayed.
Record this FRU list with each card fault probability.
Go to "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding
Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.
1-56
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance
Service Processor Maintenance Using an SRC Sequence Number
The service processor console should be logged ON. If it is not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 for logging ON and return here.
1. On the MOSS-E View window, double click on the service processor icon.
2. The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.
3. Click on the Problem management option.
4. Double-click on the Manage Alarms/Errors/Events (SRCs) option.
5. Select the Alarm option then click on OK.
6. On the next window, double-click on the alarm which has the SRC number that you want.
7. A FRU or a list of FRUs with the FRU location is displayed.
8. Record this FRU list with each card fault probability.
9. Go to "Service Processor Problem Determination" in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-57
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance
Engineering Data Transfer
Overview
The engineering data can be transferred in two main ways:
Optical disk or diskettes
DCAF (Distributed Console Access Facility) via LAN, or SDLC.
The transfer can be done from:
The local service processor using optical disk or diskettes
The remote service processor using DCAF.
Transferring Engineering Data from the Local Service Processor
You should be logged ON.
On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the service processor icon.
On the Service Processor Menu, click on the Operation Management option.
Double-click on the Retrieve Engineering Data option.
The Retrieve Engineering Data window is displayed, askin g if you have transferred the 3745 engineering data.
– If you click on YES:
The Engineering Data Retrieval window is displayed with a wait message. The
Save/Transfer Engineering Data window becomes available for selection.
- Click on your Copy to Diskette or Copy to Optical Disk option. Then follow the information displayed.
- At the end of the copy, double click on the Delete Engineering data window to delete the engineering data file on MOSS-E.
– If you click on NO you are directed to the MIP: Start page - 3745/3746-900 Maintenance
Actions. See “Transferring 3745 Engineering Data to MOSS-E.”
Transferring 3745 Engineering Data to MOSS-E
From the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the 3745 icon.
On the 3745 Menu window, click on the MOSS Console option.
A MOSS window is displayed. Enter the PEM command on this window, and press Enter.
On the same window enter the SD (Super Diagnostic) function and press Enter.
On the Super Diagnostic window, select function 5 (transfer file to MOSS-E).
Enter the file names to be transferred as specified hereafter and press Enter.
– CHGCDF for CDF
– CHGCIL for BERs
For other dump files, type DDD in menu 3 to check their availability :
– CHGDMP
– CHHDMPA
– CHHDMPB
– CHGTRSSA
– CHGTRSSB
– CHGCADSA
– CHGCADSB
Enter PEM and press Enter to end.
Logon on the Remote Service Processor
Note
Before continuing, establish the physical connection with the local service processor.
On the desk top screen, double-click on the Distributed Console Access Facility icon.
A Distributed Console Access Facility-Icon View is displayed.
Double-click on the Controlling for the DCAF option.
On the Product Information window, click on OK.
On the Distributed Console Access Facility, click on Services in the action bar.
1-58
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 and Service Processor Maintenance
Click on the Select a link Record option.
On the DCAF Link Record Directory window, double-click on the desired link (LAN, SDLC)
On the DCAF Target Password window, enter the password and click on OK.
The DCAF Target/Monitoring/ALT+T is displayed.
Return to the SDLC State Monitoring and click on Session in the action bar.
Click on Active.
Transferring Engineering Data to the Remote Service Processor
On the SDLC State Active-Key Stroke Remote window, click on Services in the action bar.
Click on Start File Transfer.
The DCAF - File Transfer Utilities window is displayed.
On this window:
– Enter the source file name:
K:|pedat|xxxxxxxx.zip (Note)
– Enter the destination file name (which can be the same).
– Do not select the compress option.
– Click on Receive.
A DCAF - File Transfer Utility window is displayed showing the status.
When the transfer is done, the message File Transfer Performed successfully is displayed. Click on OK.
Click on the Delete Engineering Data to delete engineering data file on MOSS-E.
Note: xxxxxxxx = Manufacturing plant and serial number of service processor.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-59
Disabling Procedures
3745 Diagnostic Requirement
If all of the machine is available and the MOSS is running alone, go to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9 and run the appropriate diagnostic or perform other maintenance as required.
Table 1-8. 3745 Diagnostic Requirements
Diagnostic Go to
CA “Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.
CA wrap tests
ESS
HPTSS
MOSS
“Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance” on page 1-61.
“Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
“Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
“Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for
Maintenance” on page 1-65.
TRSS
TSS
LIC wrap test (IFT)
LIC wrap test (WTT)
CCU/IOC bus/CBA
“Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance” on page 1-66.
“Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62.
“Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69.
“How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900” on page 3-15.
The entire machine is required. Notify the operator to deactivate all the lines attached to the 3745 and to deactivate NCP. Run the requested diagnostics. If necessary refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9. Then go to
“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99. For CBA diagnostic you need the whole 3745 powered ON and in Offline mode, while the
3746-900 must be powered ON, error free, setted in Online mode with the CBC and its CBSP available in the CDF-E and not in concurrent mode.
To run the requested diagnostics, refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9 then go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
1-60
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Disabling Procedures
Disabling Procedure 0110: Preparing a CA for Maintenance
Important
Before using this procedure, ensure that the
MOSS is online. Refer to “How to Put the
MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more information.
Note: For information about any specific console message, refer to the
IBM 3745 Service Functions
Guide.
1. Ask the customer to disable the channel adapter and the associated channel adapter, if applicable.
Associated CAs:
CA5 and CA6
CA7 and CA8
2. At the 3745 console, select MENU 3 and type
CAS for channel adapter services.
3. Press SEND.
4. Type 4 for concurrent mode commands.
5. Press SEND and type the channel adapter number corresponding to the suspected CA
(in the CA number ===> field).
6. Press SEND.
7. Type SHT for shutdown in the command ===> field.
8. Press SEND.
9. Follow the instructions on the screen, then press SEND.
10. After the COMMAND COMPLETED has been displayed, press PF6 twice (in order to go back two screens) and enter the channel adapter number corresponding to the associated CA if required in the CA number ===> field.
11. Press SEND.
12. Type SHT for shutdown in the command
===> field.
13. Press SEND.
14. Follow the instructions on the screen, then press SEND.
15. Wait for COMMAND COMPLETED.
16. Referring to “How to Run Internal Function
Tests” on page 3-9, run the diagnostics on the suspected channel adapter.
.
17. Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-61
Disabling Procedures
Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a TSS/HPTSS/ESS for
Maintenance
Important
Before using this procedure, ensure that the
MOSS is online. If at this time MOSS is offline, set MOSS online to perform this procedure. Refer to “How to Put the MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more information.
If you are coming from MAP 2100 or MAP 2130, go to Step 002.
001
Is the FRU a CSP card (CSP is one of the 2
HPTSS/ESS cards) ?
Yes No
002
1. Ask the customer to deactivate all the lines attached to the line adapter
(recorded as affected lines).
Wait until the customer has completed deactivating the lines.
2. Using the 3745 console, disconnect the line adapter from the NCP as follows: a. From menu 3, select TSS Services by entering TSS in the selection area.
b. From the TSS Services screen, choose select/release by entering 1 in the selection area. See
Figure 1-2 on page 1-63.
c. In the input area, enter an S followed by the line adapter number.
See Figure 1-3 on page 1-63.
d. Enter 3 in the selection area to choose Mode Control.
e. If, in the MSA display (upper part of the screen), the status of the scanner is Unknown Mode, then enter RT on the Mode Control screen enter and continue with the next Step 2f f. On Mode Control screen, enter DS to disconnect the line adapter. See
Figure 1-4 on page 1-64.
If deactivation of all the lines driven by this line adapter was not done, a screen showing the still active lines will be displayed. If the customer is unable to deactivate these lines, request his approval to force deactivation for these lines.
To force deactivation, enter F on the displayed screen.
Continue with the next step only when all lines have been deactivated and the line adapter has been disconnected.
g. Enter 1 in the selection area to choose select/release. See
Figure 1-2 on page 1-63.
h. Enter REL in the input area to release the disabled line adapter.
See Figure 1-3 on page 1-63.
Run the requested diagnostics (TSS,
HPTSS, or ESS).
Refer to Figure 1-5 on page 1-64. If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9. Then go to
“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis
0000” on page 4-99
003
The entire machine is required. Ask the customer to deactivate all the lines attached to the 3745 and to deactivate NCP. Then refer to “How to
Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9.
Note: You must never run the HPTSS/ESS diagnostics under concurrent maintenance before exchanging a probably defective
CSP card. This would cause other line adapters to go down.
1-62
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð2/14/87 ðð:15
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML :
3 MODE CONTROL :
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:
6 DPLY/ALT LSR :
7 DPLY/ALT XREG :
8 ADDRESS COMPARE:
9 CHK-POINT TRACE:
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 1-2. TSS Service Screen
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
ð
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð4/13/87 ð5:2ð
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML : - TO SELECT A SCANNER, ENTER:
3 MODE CONTROL :
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:
6 DPLY/ALT LSR
7 DPLY/ALT XREG
:
:
THE LINE ADAPTER NUMBER PRECEDED BY S (S1 TO S32)
OR
THE LINE ADDRESS
(TSS: ð TO 895, HPTSS: 1ð24 TO 1ð39)
) ==> 8 ADDRESS COMPARE: (ESS: 1ð56 TO 1ð71
9 CHK-POINT TRACE: - TO RELEASE SELECTED SCANNER, ENTER REL
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 1-3. Select/Release Screen
Disabling Procedures
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-63
Disabling Procedures
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML :
3 MODE CONTROL : - SELECT SCANNER CONTROL COMMAND(SP, ST, CT, DS, RT) ==>
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS: SP = STOP
6 DPLY/ALT LSR :
7 DPLY/ALT XREG :
8 ADDRESS COMPARE:
9 CHK-POINT TRACE:
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
ST = START
CT = CONNECT
DS = DELAYED DISCONNECT
RT = RESET
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 1-4. Mode Control Screen
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS
GROUP : ADP#: LINE:
1 ALL : : :
2 CCU : : :
3 IOCB: 1- 4:
4 CA : 1- 8:
5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:
6 TRSS: 1- 2: 1- 2:
:
:
7 HTSS: 1- 8:
8 OLT : 1- 8:
9 ESS : 1- 8:
:
:
:
OPT= Y IF MODIFY :
OPTION REQUIRED :
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: DIAG==>(A) ADP#==>(B) LINE==>
===>
OPT==>
F6:QUIT
ñ
(A)
Enter 5 here for TSS diagnostics or 7 for HPTSS/ESS.
(B)
Enter the number of the suspected adapter here.
Figure 1-5. TSS/HPTSS/ESS Diagnostic Selection Screen
1-64
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Disabling Procedures
Disabling Procedure 0130: How to Put the MOSS Offline: Preparing the MOSS for Maintenance
The MOSS can be disabled via the 3745 console or via the control panel. It is recommanded to use the console to put MOSS offline. If this is not possible, the control panel can be used.
Using the 3745 Console
1. Ensure that the customer is not using any of the 3745 consoles or the control panel.
2. On the control panel, check if the MOSS Inop indicator is ON or B is displayed. If so, it is not necessary to take the MOSS offline. Go to 6.
3. Select MENU 2.
4. Enter MOF to put the MOSS offline.
5. Press SEND.
(MOSS OFFLINE will be displayed on the console screen).
6. Then : a. If you were sent to this procedure from another procedure, return there now.
b. If the panel test or console link test was used to detect the FRU to be exchanged, go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
c. If not, using the table Table 1-9 run the appropriate diagnostics. Refer to
Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1. Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis
0000” on page 4-99.
Using the Control Panel
1. Ensure that the customer is not using any of the 3745 consoles or the control panel.
2. MOSS IML a. Ensure that the service mode is either 0 or 1.
b. Select function 1 on the control panel.
c. Press Valid.
When the MOSS IML starts, the MOSS will automatically become disabled and MOSS diagnostics will be run.
3. Then : a. If you were sent to this procedure from another procedure, return there now.
b. If the panel test or console link test was used to detect the FRU to be exchanged, go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
c. If not, using the table Table 1-9, run the appropriate diagnostics. Refer to
Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1. (MOSS diagnostics will have been started if a MOSS
IML was done). Then go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
Table 1-9. Diagnostic Selection
FRU Location
DFA 01A-X0G
FDD 01B
HDD 01D
MCC/MAC 01A-X0H
MPC/MPC2 01A-X0E
MSC 01A-X0F
PCC 01A-X0B
CONTROL PANEL
Diagnostic to be Run
MOSS
MOSS (load from diskette)
MOSS
MOSS and console link test
MOSS
MOSS
MOSS and panel test
Panel test
Suspected
Area
MOSS
MOSS
MOSS
MOSS
MOSS
MOSS
PCSS
PCSS
Associated
Area
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
MOSS
MOSS
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-65
Disabling Procedures
Disabling Procedure 0140: Preparing a TRSS for Maintenance
Important
Before using this procedure, ensure that the
MOSS is online. Refer to “How to Put the
MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more information.
1. Ask the customer to deactivate all the lines attached to this adapter.
Wait until the customer has completed deactivating the rings.
2. Using the 3745 console, disconnect the TRA from the NCP as follows: a. From Menu 3, select TRSS Services by entering TRS in the selection area.
b. From the TRSS Services screen, choose
select by entering 1 in the selection area.
See Figure 1-6 on page 1-67.
c. In the input area, enter the number of the
TRA. See Figure 1-7 on page 1-67.
d. Enter 2 in the selection area to choose
'Connect/Disc'. See Figure 1-6 on page 1-67.
e. On Connect/Disc screen, enter DS to disconnect the TRA. See Figure 1-8 on page 1-68.
If the TRSS can not successfully be disconnected (msg:function not performed), contact your support structure. Refer to
“Contacting Support” on page A-1.
3. Run the concurrent TRSS diagnostics using the adapter number. Refer to Figure 1-9 on page 1-68. If necessary, refer to “How to Run
Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9. Go to
“Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis
0000” on page 4-99.
1-66
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRSS SERVICES
1 SELECT :
2 CONNECT/DISC :
3 TRM REGS :
4 TIC INTR REG :
5 DPLY STORAGE :
6 DUMP :
7 DPLY SCB, SSB :
8 DPLY PARM BLK :
9 TIC ERR STAT :
:
:
:
:
===>1
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 1-6. TRSS Service Screen
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
ð
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð2/1ð/87 ð3:3ð
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRSS SERVICES
1 SELECT :
2 CONNECT/DISC :
3 TRM REGS
TRA SELECTION
: ENTER THE TRA # ==>2 TRA# LINE ADDRESS TIC CCU
4 TIC INTR REG
5 DPLY STORAGE
:
:
6 DUMP :
7 DPLY SCB, SSB :
1
2
1ð88 1ð89
1ð9ð 1ð9ð
YY B
YN B
8 DPLY PARM BLK :
9 TIC ERR STAT :
:
:
: PRESS SEND TO CONFIRM
===>
:
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 1-7. Select Screen
Disabling Procedures
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-67
Disabling Procedures
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- 1ð/19/9ð ð9:32
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TRSS SERVICES
1 SELECT :
2 CONNECT/DISC :
TRA CONNECT/DISCONNECT
3 TRM REGS :
4 TIC INTR REG :
5 DPLY STORAGE : TYPE CT TO CONNECT
DS TO DISCONNECT ==> 6 DUMP :
7 DPLY SCB, SSB :
8 DPLY PARM BLK :
9 TIC ERR STAT :
:
:
:
:
PRESS SEND TO CONFIRM
===>
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 1-8. Connect/Disconnect Screen
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: ONLINE DIAGS
GROUP : ADP#: LINE:
1 ALL :
2 CCU : : :
3 IOCB: 1- 4:
4 CA : 1- 8:
5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:
6 TRSS: 1- 2: 1- 2:
:
:
7 HTSS: 1- 8:
8 OLT : 1- 8:
9 ESS : 1- 8:
:
:
:
OPT= Y IF MODIFY :
OPTION REQUIRED :
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: DIAG==>(A) ADP#==>(B) LINE==>
===>
OPT==>
F6:QUIT
ñ
(A)
Enter 6 here for TRSS diagnostics.
(B)
Enter the number of the suspected adapter here.
Figure 1-9. TRSS Diagnostic Selection Screen
1-68
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Disabling Procedures
Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for
Maintenance
Important
Wait until the customer has completed deactivating the lines.
Before using this procedure, ensure that the
MOSS is online. Refer to “How to Put the
MOSS Online” on page 4-105 for more information.
Using the 3745 console, disconnect the line adapter from the NCP as follows: a. From Menu 3, select TSS Services by entering TSS in the selection area.
You should have recorded the following information from the reference code and from the additional information (PF6) for use during this service call.
b. From the TSS Services screen, choose select/release by entering 1 in the selection area. See
Figure 1-11 on page 1-74.
FRU and location
Suspected adapter
Affected lines.
c. In the input area, enter an S followed by the suspected adapter number. See Figure 1-12 on page 1-74.
If necessary, use the LIC/Line address tables to find the affected lines. Refer to “LIC/Line Address
Table” on page 1-73.
d. Enter 3 in the selection area to choose Mode Control. See
Figure 1-11 on page 1-74.
What you should do next:
001
– Ask the customer to stop the lines connected to the suspected LIC or pair of LICs for LIC type 5 and 6. A LIC pair is an odd numbered LIC plus an even numbered LIC. Refer to the IBM 3745
Connection and Integration Guide.
– Run the automatic wrap test on the LIC unit
(option 1) and the wrap test at tailgate level
(option 2). Refer to “How to Run the Wrap Test
(WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900” on page 3-15.
Did you get the message: 'Wrap test completed. The LIC is OK'?
Yes No
003
002
Go to Chapter 4, “3745 FRU Exchange” on page 4-1, then exchange the LIC card.
e. On the Mode Control screen, enter
DS to disconnect the line adapter.
See Figure 1-13 on page 1-75.
If deactivation of all the lines driven by this line adapter was not done, a screen showing active lines will be displayed. If the customer is unable to deactivate these lines, request his approval to force deactivation for these lines.
To force deactivation, enter F on the displayed screen.
Continue with the next action only when all lines have been deactivated and the line adapter has been disconnected.
f. Enter 1 in the selection area to choose select/release. See
Figure 1-11 on page 1-74.
g. Enter REL in the input area to release the disconnected line adapter. See Figure 1-13 on page 1-75.
Continue with Step 005.
Has “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62 already been performed, or is the
3745 fully available?
Yes No
004
Ask the customer to deactivate all the lines attached to the suspected adapter.
005
– Run the concurrent TSS diagnostics using the number of the suspected adapter. Refer to
Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.
If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9.
(Step 005 continues)
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-69
Disabling Procedures
005 (continued)
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
006
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
007
– Note their positions and remove the modem or line cables from the LIC.
– If the LIC is type 1 or 4, install the wrap plug
(PN 65X8927) on the uppermost socket. See
Figure 1-17 on page 1-76 and Figure 1-14 on page 1-75.
– If the LIC is type 3, install the LIC wrap cable
(PN 65X8928) between the two sockets. See
Figure 1-17 on page 1-76 and Figure 1-15 on page 1-75.
– If the LIC is type 5 or 6, unplug the line cable at the customer wall frame and install the wrap plug (PN 11F4815) on the uppermost socket of the cassette. See Figure 1-18 on page 1-77 and Figure 1-16 on page 1-76.
Is the LIC type 1, 3, or 4?
Yes No
008
– Using the LID function, enter the line address in the input area of the displayed screen and record the line number displayed on the next sceen.
– Run only the RH59 routine of the concurrent TSS diagnostics using the number of the suspected adapter, and the line number recorded above, refer to
Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.
If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9.
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
009
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange
Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
010
– Change the wrap plug to the other socket, if any (LIC type 5).
– Rerun the RH59 routine of the TSS diagnostics.
(Step 010 continues)
010 (continued)
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
011
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange
Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
012
No trouble was found with this LIC.
– Remove the wrap plug.
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
013
– Using the LID function, enter the line address in the input area of the displayed screen and record the line number displayed on the next screen.
– Run only the RC01 routine of the concurrent
TSS diagnostics, using the number of the suspected adapter, and the line number recorded above. Refer to Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.
If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9.
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
014
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
015
Is the LIC type other than 3?
Yes No
016
Go to Step 024 on page 1-71.
017
Is the LIC type 1 or 4A?
Yes No
018
No trouble was found with this LIC.
– Remove the wrap plug and reconnect the modem cable.
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
1-70
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Disabling Procedures
019
– Change the wrap plug to the next downward socket of the LIC.
– Rerun the RC01 routine of the concurrent TSS diagnostics using the number of the suspected adapter. Refer to Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.
If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9.
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
020
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
021
Have you tested all the ports of this LIC with the wrap plug on?
Yes No
022
Go to Step 019.
023
No trouble was found with this LIC.
– Remove the wrap plug.
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis
0000” on page 4-99.
024
– Turn the wrap cable around between the LIC sockets.
– Rerun the RC01 routine of the concurrent TSS diagnostics using the number of the suspected adapter. Refer to Figure 1-10 on page 1-72.
If necessary, refer to “How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9.
Did the diagnostics run without error?
Yes No
025
– Remove the wrap cable.
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result
Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
026
No trouble was found with this LIC.
– Remove the Wrap cable.
(Step 026 continues)
026 (continued)
Go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis
0000” on page 4-99.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-71
Disabling Procedures
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: ONLINE DIAGS
GROUP :ADP# :LINE :
1 ALL :
2 CCU : :
3 IOCB: 1- 4:
4 CA : 1- 8:
5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:
6 TRSS: 1- 2: 1- 2:
7 HTSS: 1- 8:
8 OLT : 1- 8:
:
:
:
:
:
9 ESS : 1- 8: :
OPT= Y IF MODIFY :
OPTION REQUIRED :
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: DIAG==>(A) ADP#==>(B) LINE==>(C)
===>
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á
F6:QUIT
ñ
(A)
Enter 5 here for TSS diagnostics or 7 for HPTSS.
(B)
Enter the number of the suspected adapter here.
(C)
Enter the number of the line (00-15) or (00-31) here.
Figure 1-10. TSS/HPTSS Diagnostic Selection Screen
1-72
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
LIC/Line Address Table
┌───────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ │ Line Address for LIC Type │
│ Location ├─────────────┬───────┬───────────┬────────────┬───────────┤
│ │ 1 - 4 │ 3 │ 5 │ 6 LS │ 6 HS │
├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤
│ ð1M-A1-C1 │ ð32-ð35 │ ð32 │ N/A │ N/A │ N/A │
│ ð1M-A1-D1 │ ð36-ð39 │ ð36 │
│ ð1M-A1-E1 │ ð4ð-ð43 │ ð4ð │
N/A │
N/A │
N/A
N/A
│ N/A
│ N/A
│
│
│ ð1M-A1-F1 │ ð44-ð47 │ ð44 │
│ ð1M-A1-G1 │ ð48-ð51 │ ð48 │
│ ð1M-A1-H1 │ ð52-ð55 │ ð52 │
│ ð1M-A1-J1 │ ð56-ð59 │ ð56 │
N/A │
N/A │
N/A │
N/A │
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│ N/A
│ N/A
│ N/A
│ N/A
│ ð1M-A1-K1 │ ð6ð-ð63 │ ð6ð │ N/A │ N/A │ N/A │
├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤
│ ð1M-A2-C1 │ ððð-ðð3 │ ððð │
│ ð1M-A2-D1 │ ðð4-ðð7 │ ðð4 │
│ ð1M-A2-E1 │ ðð8-ð11 │ ðð8 │
│ ð1M-A2-F1 │ ð12-ð15 │ ð12 │
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ ð1M-A2-G1 │ ð16-ð19 │ ð16 │
│ ð1M-A2-H1 │ ð2ð-ð23 │ ð2ð │
│ ð1M-A2-J1 │ ð24-ð27 │ ð24 │
│ ð1M-A2-K1 │ ð28-ð31 │ ð28 │
N/A │
N/A │
N/A │
N/A │
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│ N/A
│ N/A
│ N/A
│ N/A
├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤
│ ð1L-A1-C1 │ N/A │ N/A │ ð8ð-ð81 │ ð8ð │ ð8ð │
│ ð1L-A1-D1 │
│ ð1L-A1-E1 │
│ ð1L-A1-F1 │
│ ð1L-A1-G1 │
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
│
│
│
│
ð82-ð83
ð84-ð85
ð86-ð87
ð88-ð89
│
│
│
│
ð82
ð84
ð86
ð88
│
│
│
│
ð8ð
ð84
ð84
ð88
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ ð1L-A1-H1 │
│ ð1L-A1-J1 │
N/A
N/A
│ N/A │ ð9ð-ð91 │
│ N/A │ ð92-ð93 │
ð9ð
ð92
│ ð88
│ ð92
│ ð1L-A1-K1 │ N/A │ N/A │ ð94-ð95 │ ð94 │ ð92 │
├───────────┼─────────────┼───────┼───────────┼────────────┼───────────┤
│
│
│ ð1L-A2-C1 │ 128-131 │ 128 │ ð64-ð65 │
│ ð1L-A2-D1 │ 132-135 │ 132 │ ð66-ð67 │
│ ð1L-A2-E1 │ 136-139 │ 136 │ ð68-ð69 │
│ ð1L-A2-F1 │ 14ð-143 │ 14ð │ ð7ð-ð71 │
│ ð1L-A2-G1 │ 144-147 │ 144 │ ð72-ð73 │
│ ð1L-A2-H1 │ 148-151 │ 148 │ ð74-ð75 │
ð64
ð66
ð68
ð7ð
ð72
ð74
│
│
│
│
│
│
ð64
ð64
ð68
ð68
ð72
ð72
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ ð1L-A2-J1 │ 152-155 │ 152 │ ð76-ð77 │
│ ð1L-A2-K1 │ 156-159 │ 156 │ ð78-ð79 │
ð76
ð78
│
│
ð76
ð76
└───────────┴─────────────┴───────┴───────────┴────────────┴───────────┘
│
│
Disabling Procedures
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-73
Disabling Procedures
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð2/14/87 ðð:15
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML :
3 MODE CONTROL :
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:
6 DPLY/ALT LSR :
7 DPLY/ALT XREG :
8 ADDRESS COMPARE:
9 CHK-POINT TRACE:
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 1-11. TSS Service Screen
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
ð
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð4/13/87 ð5:2ð
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML : - TO SELECT A SCANNER, ENTER:
3 MODE CONTROL :
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS:
6 DPLY/ALT LSR
7 DPLY/ALT XREG
:
:
THE LINE ADAPTER NUMBER PRECEDED BY S (S1 TO S32)
OR
THE LINE ADDRESS
(TSS: ð TO 895, HPTSS: 1ð24 TO 1ð39)
) ==> 8 ADDRESS COMPARE: (ESS: 1ð56 TO 1ð71
9 CHK-POINT TRACE: - TO RELEASE SELECTED SCANNER, ENTER REL
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 1-12. Select/Release Screen
1-74
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-ONLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
RUN-REQ
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:22
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: TSS SERVICES
1 SELECT/RELEASE :
2 DUMP/IML :
3 MODE CONTROL : - SELECT SCANNER CONTROL COMMAND(SP, ST, CT, DS, RT) ==>
4 DPLY/ALT STORE :
5 DPLY/ALT BLOCKS: SP = STOP
6 DPLY/ALT LSR :
7 DPLY/ALT XREG :
8 ADDRESS COMPARE:
9 CHK-POINT TRACE:
1ð D/ALT HPTSS/ESS:
:
:
:
===>
ST = START
CT = CONNECT
DS = DELAYED DISCONNECT
RT = RESET
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 1-13. Mode Control Screen
Disabling Procedures
Figure 1-14. LIC Types 1 and 4 Wrap Plug
(PN 65X8927)
Figure 1-15. LIC Type 3 Wrap Cable (PN 65X8928)
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-75
Disabling Procedures
Figure 1-16. LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug
(PN 11F4815)
Note: LIC 4B uses only port 0.
Figure 1-17. LIC Types 1, 3, and 4
1-76
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Port 0
W
X
Y
Lever
Switch
Z
Port 1
TYPE Knob Color
LIC5 Black
Figure 1-18. LIC Types 5 and 6
Port 0
W
X
Y
TYPE Knob Color
LIC6 Black
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-77
3745 Control Panel
3745 Control Panel Use
Attention: Providing that the UEPO switch has not been activated, the control panel always has power and will display information on power control and service even though the
3745 is powered OFF.
Purpose of the Control Panel
The control panel allows the execution of functions which:
1. Are not possible via the console.
2. Must to be operational before the MOSS is
IMLed.
Uses of the Control Panel
The control panel is used to:
Control the power
Operations from the panel for power are:
– Set Power Control Mode to Network,
Local, or Remote
– Power On/Power On reset
– Power Off
– Unit Emergency Power Off
Perform basic functions which are:
– General IPL from disk
– MOSS IML from disk
– MOSS dump
– Request local console
– Force local console
– Panel test
– Remote/Alternate console link test
– RSF console link test
– Local console link test
– Load from diskette
– Loop on MOSS diagnostics
– Display stacked errors
Indicate the machine status via indicators which show:
– Function selected
– Hex code displayed
– Current service mode
– Power control mode
– Console in use
– All channel adapters disabled
– MOSS inoperative
– MOSS message waiting
– Power On Indicator ON
Sound an audible alarm if an invalid action is attempted.
1-78
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Control Panel
Explanation of 3745 Panel Keys,
LEDs, and Switches
Refer to Figure 1-19 on page 1-80 for the location of the keys and switches.
The following three keys allow the customer to scroll the different options available.
1. Function
2. Service Mode.
3. Power Control
Each scrolled digit is set blinking on the panel display.
Validate Key:
After pressing this key, the selected digit stops blinking and the chosen option is performed.
Any options not validated disappear after a time out of 60 seconds.
Exit Key:
Pressing this key will cancel the scrolled option.
Power On/Reset Key:
When the function digit is '0' and service mode is '0' or '1', this key will start a power on reset sequence followed by a general IPL. Power On should not be pressed until after a 10-second delay from Power Off.
Power Off Key:
This key initiates a 'power down' sequence.
Unit Emergency Power Off (UEPO)
Switch:
When this switch is switched downwards, power is removed from the machine and a mechanical interlock locks the switch in the OFF position. The machine can not be powered ON until a CE resets the interlock and sets the switch upwards which enables power ON.
Power On Indicator
This indicator is a green LED. It turns ON when the 3745 starts to power ON and turns OFF as soon as the machine powers down. Refer to
Figure 1-19 on page 1-80. It is located to the right of the Power On/Reset key.
Control Panel Display Description
The control panel display is a gaz panel with various fields that can have different values. The meaning of each value is given in Table 1-10 on page 1-81.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-79
3745 Control Panel
Code
Function
Service Mode
Power Control
Function
Service Mode
MOSS MSG
MOSS Inop
All CAs Disabled
Console In Use
Power Control
Validate
Exit
Power On
Reset
Power Control
Power Off
Unit
Emergency
Only
OFF
Figure 1-19. 3745 Control Panel Layout
1-80
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Control Panel
Table 1-10. Panel Display Values
Indicator Display
Function 0
1
2
3
7
8
9
4
5
6
Code
Service Mode
Power Control
Console in Use
All CAs Disabled
MOSS Inoperative
MOSS Message
A
B
000 to FFF
0
1
2
3
A to D
1
2
3
1
2
3
Blank
Blank
Blank
Description
General IPL.
MOSS IML.
MOSS dump.
Request local console.
Force local console.
Panel test.
Remote/Alternate console link test.
RSF console link test.
Local console link test.
IML from diskette.
This function must not be used with service function mode
2.
Loop on MOSS diagnostics.
Display stacked errors.
A 3 hex character code which shows function progress codes and error codes. A code which blinks indicates an error condition has been detected. For more information on the meaning of these codes, refer to the “3745 Control
Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
Normal: the functions from 0 to 9 are available.
Maintenance 1: the functions from 0 to B are available.
Maintenance 2: for functions 1, 2, MOSS diagnostics will be bypassed.
Maintenance 3: used for installation. Allows function 9 only.
Used with the Display Stacked Error function.
Host: the 3745 is powered ON or OFF from the host systems. If ac power is lost then restored, an Auto Restart will be performed.
Network: the 3745 is powered ON by either a scheduled power ON or Power On Reset on the control panel. If ac power is lost then restored, an Auto Restart will be performed. The 3745 is powered OFF by a command received via NCP.
Local: the 3745 is powered ON from Power On Reset and powered OFF from Power Off on the control panel.
The remote or alternate console is in use.
The RSF modem-to-console connection is in use.
The local console is in use.
Indicator ON: indicates all channel adapters are disabled.
Indicator OFF: indicates that at least one channel adapter is enabled.
Indicator ON: the MOSS is not available for the CCU.
Indicator OFF: the MOSS is powered ON and available.
Indicator ON: a message is displayed on the 3745 console.
Indicator OFF: no messages are waiting to be displayed on the 3745 console.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-81
3745 Control Panel
How to Perform 3745 Control Panel Operations
Important
Before working on non-customer access areas of the 3745, power control should be set to
Local Mode. This can be done as follows:
1. Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3, Local Mode.
2. Press Validate.
0FF4 x 3 x x x x
Or, when NCP is IPLed from the hard disk:
0000 x 3 x x x x x = variable values.
Power On Reset
To perform this function:
Start from machine power OFF with Service
Mode either 0 or 1 and the default value for Func-
tion digit at 0.
1. Allow a 10-second delay from power OFF.
2. Press Power On Reset.
A power ON reset sequence will be executed followed by a general IPL. At successful completion of the operation, the display will be as follows:
0FF4 x 3 x x x x
Or, when NCP is IPLed from the hard disk:
0000 x 3 x x x x
MOSS IML
1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 1,
MOSS IML.
2. Press Validate.
3. This initiates a MOSS reset followed by a
MOSS IML.
At successful completion of the operation, the display will be as follows:
When MOSS was alone prior to the IML:
1F0E x 3 x x x x
Or, when MOSS was not alone prior to the IML:
1F0F x 3 x x x x x = variable values.
x = variable values.
General IPL
1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 0,
General IPL.
2. Press Validate.
A general reset, MOSS IML, CCU IPL, and a scanner IML is executed and the CLDP is loaded.
At successful completion of the operation, the display will be as follows:
MOSS Dump
1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 2,
MOSS DUMP.
2. Press Validate. A MOSS reset and dump of
MOSS microcode onto disk will be executed.
At successful conclusion of the operation, the display will be as follows:
2F01 x 3 x x x x x = variable values.
3. Perform a MOSS IML to return to normal mode (see preceding procedure).
1-82
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 Control Panel
Request Local Console
1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 3,
Request local console.
2. Press Validate.
A message is sent to inform the remote/alternate or RSF console customer that the local console customer wants to log on at the local console.
Option B:
1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 1,
Maintenance 1 mode.
2. Press Validate.
3. Using Function, scroll till the value is 9, Load from diskette.
4. Press Validate.
A MOSS reset followed by a MOSS IML will be executed.
Force Local Console
1. Using Function, scroll till the value is 4, Force local console.
2. Press Validate.
The link to the remote/alternate or RSF console is disconnected to allow the local console customer to log on.
Panel Test and Console Link
Tests
See the separate detailed procedures in
Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745 Diagnostics” on page 3-1.
Loop on MOSS Diagnostics
1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 1,
Maintenance 1 mode.
2. Press Validate.
3. Using Function, scroll till the value is A, Loop on MOSS diagnostics.
4. Press Validate.
The diagnostic MOSS code loops until an error is detected and the error code is displayed.
Press Exit to terminate the diagnostic loop.
Load from Diskette
1. Insert diskette 1 into the diskette drive.
2. Close the diskette drive (by turning or pulling the door latch).
3. Two options are available:
Option A:
1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 0,
Normal mode.
2. Press Validate.
3. Using Function, scroll till the value is 9, Load from diskette.
4. Press Validate.
A general reset, MOSS IML, CCU IPL, and a scanner IML is executed and the CLDP is loaded.
Display Stacked Errors
1. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is 1,
Maintenance 1 mode.
2. Press Validate.
3. Using Function, scroll till the value is B,
Display stacked errors
4. Press Validate.
5. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is A,
Display the First Stacked Error
6. Press Validate.
7. Using Service Mode, scroll till the value is B,
Display the Second Stacked Error
8. Press Validate.
9. Similary stacked errors 3 and 4 are displayed by selecting Service Mode C and D.
Chapter 1. START: How to Begin Troubleshooting
1-83
3745 MAPs
1-84
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
IOC Bus MAPs
MAP 0100: IOC Bus Trouble Shooting
Symptom Explanation
IOC bus error detected but not fixed by diagnostics or autoBER.
If you have an intermittent problem, consider that any of the conditions given in the above table can cause the problem.
001
Are the FRUs: PUC, TERMI, TREMC, or TERMR indicated by the diagnostics or reference code?
Yes No
002
The problem origin can be the channel adapter or line adapter
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Put the power control in local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Press Power Off.
– Remove all line adapters
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the channel adapter diagnostics
Are they running error free?
Yes No
003
Go to Step 008.
004
One line adapter may be failing. Go to Step
017 on page 2-2.
005
– Press Power Off.
(Step 005 continues)
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
PUC
TERMI
TERMC
TERMR
LAs ( TRM/CSP/CSC )
CAL
Basic board
005 (continued)
– Change the TERMI and/or PUC accordingly.
– See “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
– And/or “TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure” on page 4-62.
– Change the TERMC and/or TERMR accordingly. See “TERMC/TERMR Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-61.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the diagnostics.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
006
Go to Step 002.
007
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
008
– Press Power Off.
– Replug all line adapters.
– Unplug all channel adapters.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the line adapter diagnostics.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
009
Change the basic board. Go to “Exchange
Precautions” on page 4-1.
010
(Step 010 continues)
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
2-1
3745 MAPs
010 (continued)
– Press Power Off.
– Replug the first channel adapter.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the channel adapter diagnostics on this channel.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
011
– Press Power Off.
– Change the channel adapter you have just replugged.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run channel adapter diagnostics on this channel.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
012
Change the basic board. Go to
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
013
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
014
– Press Power Off.
– Replug next channel adapter.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the channel adapter diagnostics on this channel.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
015
Change the channel adapter you have just replugged.
016
Go to Step 014.
017
– Press Power Off.
– Replug first line adapter.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the line adapter diagnostics.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
018
(Step 018 continues)
018 (continued)
– Press Power Off.
– Change the line adapter you have just replugged.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the line adapter diagnostics.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
019
Change the basic board. Go to
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
020
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
021
– Press Power Off.
– Replug the next line adapter.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Run the line adapter diagnostics.
Are they running error free?
Yes No
022
Change the line adapter you have just replugged.
023
Go to Step 021.
2-2
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MOSS MAPs
MAP 3200: MOSS Control Panel Code 001
Symptom Explanation
001 displayed on control panel
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
PCC
MPC
MSC
PS1
If the problem is intermittent, consider that any of the conditions given in the above box can be involved.
If the nature of the fault does not allow control panel actions, exchange the FRU group 36 on page 1-51.
001
There is a LED mounted on the MPC card
(01A-X0E).
Is the MPC LED permanently ON or blinking?
Yes No
002
Was the MPC LED ON during the reset function execution?
Yes No
003
Exchange the FRU group 32. Go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
004
Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
005
Is the MPC LED permanently ON?
Yes No
006
Exchange the FRU group 31. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
007
Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to “3745 FRU
Group Table” on page 1-49.
3745 MAPs
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-3
3745 MAPs
MAP 3210: MOSS Control Panel Code 059
Symptom Explanation
Code 059 displayed on control panel
001
This MAP should be used only if the problem can be reproduced.
If you have an intermittent problem, exchange the
FRU group 1. Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
- Put the power control in local mode:
Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
Press Validate.
- Press Power Off.
– Switch the CB1 OFF. Refer to
Figure 4-40 on page 4-34
– Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
– Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
– Unplug the DFA card (01A-X0G).
– Attention: The following sequence
should always be observed.
– Remove the cable which is attached to the
MCC card (01A-X0H).
– Unplug the MCC card (01A-X0H).
– Press Power On Reset.
– Switch the CB1 ON.
Is code 07E displayed?
Yes No
002
– Press Power Off.
– Switch the CB1 OFF.
– Replug all cards and reinstall the cable on the MCC card.
Exchange the MPC card. Go to Step 006.
003
– Press Power Off.
– Switch the CB1 OFF.
– Replug the MCC card (01A-X0H).
– Install the cable to the MCC card
(01A-X0H).
– Press Power On Reset.
– Switch the CB1 ON.
(Step 003 continues)
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
MPC
MCC
DFA
003 (continued)
Is code 072 displayed?
Yes No
004
– Press Power Off.
– Switch the CB1 OFF.
– Remove the cable which is attached to the MCC card (01A-X0H).
Exchange the MCC card, install the cable on the MCC card. Go to Step 006.
005
– Press Power Off.
– Switch the CB1 OFF.
Exchange the DFA card (01A-X0G). Continue with Step 006.
006
– Reinstall any remaining unplugged cards.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Switch the CB1 ON.
Is an error detected during IML?
Yes No
007
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
008
Is the panel code displaying the same code as when you started this MAP?
Yes No
009
Go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the procedure given by the table.
010
Go to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
2-4
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
MAP 3220: Undefined Panel Message
Symptom Explanation
The message on the control panel is undefined
001
You may have loose cables and/or cards.
If the nature of the fault does not allow control panel actions, exchange the FRU group 37. Go to page “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Put the power control in local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Press Power Off.
– Switch the CB1 OFF.
– Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
– Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
– Carefully check and reseat any loose cables or cards (especially the MPC, PCC, and MSC).
– Switch the CB1 ON.
Are Power Control and Service Mode indicators displayed on the control panel?
Yes No
002
The initial power checkouts on the PLC card did not complete successfully.
– Exchange the FRU group 37. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
003
– Press Function on the control panel until the
MOSS IML function 1 is displayed.
– Press Validate.
– Press Power On Reset.
– When the IML is complete, retry the operation that displayed the unexpected hex display code.
Is the unexpected hex display code problem resolved?
Yes No
004
Referring to “How to Run the Control Panel
Test” on page 3-8, run the diagnostic. If an
FRU group is called, go to “3745 FRU
Group Table” on page 1-49.
(Step 004 continues)
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Loose cables/cards
PCC card failing
Control panel failing
MPC card failing
Microcode update
004 (continued)
– If no errors are detected, consult the
Support Center for any microcode update which may not be reflected in the MIP.
Have you received more information from support?
Yes No
005
– Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to
“3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
006
– Take action as directed.
Is the problem solved?
Yes No
007
– Exchange the FRU group 22. Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
008
– In the CE Leaving Procedure you will be instructed to set the time of day clock, and set any required scheduled power
ON time.
Go to page “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
009
Did the unexpected hex code occur while you were using the MIP for another reason?
Yes No
010
Go to Step 008.
011
Restart with Chapter 1, “START: How to Begin
Troubleshooting” on page 1-1.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-5
3745 MAPs
MAP 3230: Console Link Procedure
The display code that sent you to this procedure defines the connector or cable referred to in this procedure.
1A0 or 1A1 local
1A3 or 1A4 remote
1A6 or 1A7 RSF.
001
– A console wrap plug should be installed at the
3745 console connector (see Figure 2-1), or at the far end of the cable which should be disconnected from the relevant console/modem. See
Table 2-1 for the wrapplug part number to be used.
006 (continued)
– or –
If any other code is displayed, go to “3745
Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the instructions.
007
The console wrap plug could be faulty.
Change the console wrap plug and go to step 7 on page 3-6, or exchange the FRU group 26 on page 1-51. Go to page 1-49.
Table 2-1. Wrap plug PN
PN
6398697
2667737
26f0320
Console Type
31XX
3727
Personal computer or
PS/2*
R
S
F
R
E
M
O
T
E
L
O
C
A
L
Was a console wrap plug installed?
Yes No
002
Install the console wrap plug and go to Step
7 of “How to Run the Console Link Test for
3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170” on page 3-6.
003
Was the console wrap plug installed on the cable?
Yes No
004
The console wrap plug could be faulty.
Change it and go to Step 7 on page 3-6, or exchange the FRU group 26 on page 1-51
(see page 1-49).
005
– Install a console wrap plug at the 3745 console connector (see Figure 2-1) and refer to Step 7 on page 3-6 to repeat the test.
Is the code displayed the same as the one with which you entered this procedure?
Yes No
006
If 1A1, 1A4, or 1A7 is displayed, the cable from the 3745 is faulty.
– Repair or exchange the cable.
– Verify the repair by re-running the console link test with the console wrap plug installed on the cable.
(Step 006 continues)
J1 J2 J3
Location: 01R
Figure 2-1. Console Outputs
2-6
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
3745 Line Adapter MAPs
MAP 3500: Activate/Deactivate Line Problem or Line Errors on the
TSS
Symptom Explanation
You are unable to activate or deactivate a line, or errors are occurring while lines are running.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
See below
001
– Ensure that the customer has completed his
Problem Determination guide procedure.
If not done, follow this problem determination procedure yourself before continuing this map.
Does the problem still exist?
Yes No
002
– Problem is solved.
003
– Using the 3745 console, determine the number of the line adapter driving the suspected line as follows:
1. From Menu 3, select the TSS services by entering TSS in the selection area.
2. From the TSS services screen, choose
select/release by entering 1 in the selection area.
3. On the displayed select/release screen, enter the address of the suspected line.
The line adapter number will be displayed in the machine status area (MSA) and in the selection area.
4. Enter REL in the input area to release the line adapter
Does the operator accept to deactivate all the lines attached to this line adapter?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 009.
005
Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62 and follow the procedure until you have run the
TSS diagnostics for this line adapter (scanner).
Then return here.
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
006
(Step 006 continues)
006 (continued)
Diagnostics have detected an error. With the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
007
– Go to “Disabling Procedure 0150: Preparing
LIC Type 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 for Maintenance” on page 1-69 for LIC type 1-6.
– Follow the procedure until you have run the
RC01 (for LIC type 1-4) or RH59 (for LIC type
5, 6) routine of the TSS diagnostics with the appropriate wrap plug/cable installed.
– Then return here.
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
008
Diagnostics have detected an error. With the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
009
The problem has not been resolved.
– Collect any related RECMS (MDR) records and contact your support structure for assistance.
Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-7
3745 MAPs
MAP 3520: Activate/Deactivate Ring Problems or Ring Errors on the
TRSS
Symptom Explanation
You are unable to activate or deactivate a ring, or errors are occurring while rings are running.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
See below
001
– Ensure that the customer has completed his
Problem Determination guide procedure.
If not done, follow this problem determination procedure yourself before continuing this map.
Does the problem still exist?
Yes No
002
– Problem is solved.
003
– Using the 3745 console, determine the number of the TRA driving the suspected ring as follows:
1. From Menu 3, select the TRSS services by entering TRS in the selection area.
2. From the TRSS services screen, choose
select/release by entering 1 in the selection area.
The TRA numbers will be displayed with the ring addresses connected to.
Does the operator accept to deactivate all the lines attached to this adapter?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 007.
005
– Go to Step 2c on page 1-66 and follow the disabling procedure until you have run the TRSS diagnostics for this line adapter (TRA).
– Then return here.
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
006
Diagnostics have detected an error. With the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
007
The problem has not been resolved. Collect any related RECMS (MDR) records and call your support structure for assistance. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
2-8
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
MAP 3530: Activate/Deactivate Line Problems or Line Errors on the
HPTSS/ESS
Symptom Explanation
You are unable to activate or deactivate a line, or errors are occurring while lines are running.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
See below
001
– Ensure that the customer has completed his
Problem Determination guide procedure.
If not done, follow this problem determination procedure yourself before continuing this map.
Does the problem still exist?
Yes No
002
– Problem is solved.
003
– Using the 3745 console, determine the number of the line adapter driving the suspected line as follows:
1. From Menu 3, select the TSS services by entering TSS in the selection area.
2. From the TSS services screen, choose
select/release by entering 1 in the selection area.
3. On the displayed select/release screen, enter the address of the suspected line.
The line adapter number will be displayed in the machine status area (MSA) and in the selection area.
4. Enter REL in the input area to release the line adapter.
Does the operator accept to deactivate all the lines attached to this adapter?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 009.
005
– Go to “Disabling Procedure 0120: Preparing a
TSS/HPTSS/ESS for Maintenance” on page 1-62 and follow the procedure until you have run the HPTSS/ESS diagnostics for this line adapter. Then return here.
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
006
Diagnostics have detected an error. With the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
007
– Replace the modem cable on the failing port by the wrap plug (PN 58X9349 for V.35, PN
58X9354 for X.21, or PN 70X8670 for ESS).
– Update the CDF. Run the VI and VK for V.35,
VJ and VK for X.21, or UF02 and UF03 for ESS routines of the HPTSS or ESS diagnostics.
– Return here.
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
008
Diagnostics have detected an error. With the diagnostic reference code, go to “Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000” on page 4-99.
009
The problem has not been resolved, collect any related RECMS (MDR) records and contact your support structure for assistance. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-9
3745 MAPs
3745 Channel MAPs
MAP 3700: CA Isolation Procedure
You are here for a channel reported problem at the host console or you are unable to load or dump the control program for a channel-attached
3745.
Symptom Explanation
Condition code 3 (CC3)
Interface control check
Channel data check
CPU hang
Load/dump CP problem
CA enable not possible
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Channel disabled
CADR card
CAL card
External conditions:
– Channel
– Channel cables
– Other Control Units
– Switch unit
If you have an intermittent problem, consider that any of the conditions given in the above table can cause the problem.
If the 3745 is stopped in IPL phase 4 and a U is displayed in the MSA: exchange the CAL card of the channel.
001
Is an interface control check or channel data check reported?
Yes No
002
On the 3745 console select, the CID function (from Menu 2) and check at the E/D request field for the involved channel adapter.
Is E displayed?
Yes No
003
– Enter E in the CHANGE E/D
REQUEST ==> area.
– Press SEND and re-initiate the operation.
004
Go to Step 006.
005
Go to Step 011.
006
– Check the physical path (channel switch, host channel, and channel cables).
(Step 006 continues)
006 (continued)
Is everything OK?
Yes No
007
Correct the problem and re-initiate unit initialization.
008
– Select the CAS function with option 1 (display
CA statuses).
Is INIT status displayed in the Internal Status field?
Yes No
009
Is ERRXXX or *** displayed?
Yes No
010
For any other status displayed, see
IBM 3745 Service Functions and contact your support structure if the problem can not be corrected.
011
– Ask the customer to disable the channel adapter.
Is NCP loaded?
Yes No
012
Referring to "“How to Run Internal
Function Tests” on page 3-9", run the diagnostics on the channel adapter.
(Step 012 continues)
2-10
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
012 (continued)
Did the diagnostics run error free?
Yes No
013
Go to “Action to Take After a
Diagnostic Run or an FRU
Exchange” on page 4-99.
014
– Ask the operator to put the channel offline from the host.
– Interface cables must be removed from the 3745.
– Run routines LG02, LI03, LI04,
LJ03, LK02 and LO01 which need manual intervention. Refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9
Did the routines run error free?
Yes No
015
Go to “Action to Take After a
Diagnostic Run or an FRU
Exchange” on page 4-99
016
Reconnect the interface cables on the
3745.
If you are here for an interface control check, determine if the channel works properly from the host when you set the Select out bypass switch to the
bypass position. Refer to Figure 4-28 on page 4-25.
Is the channel working properly?
Yes No
017
You probably have an external problem. Check the interface cables and the other control units, if any.
018
– Exchange CADR and CAL. Go to
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1 and refer to “Basic Board,
Cards, Connectors, and
Crossovers” on page 4-5 for the failing channel CADR location.
019
– At the 3745 console select Menu 3 and enter CAS for channel adapter services.
– Enter 4 for concurrent mode commands.
– Enter the channel adapter number corresponding to the suspected CA, in the CA number ===> field. Enter SHT for shutdown in the command ===> field.
– Press SEND twice.
– Go to Step 012 on page 2-10.
020
– Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function (CDF chapter) and check the CDF for a correct configuration.
Is the CDF OK?
Yes No
021
Correct the CDF and re-initiate the operation.
022
Go to Step 011 on page 2-10
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-11
3745 MAPs
3745 Power MAPs
MAP 3900: Overcurrent on Power Supply 1
Symptom Explanation
Overcurrent on power supply 1.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Short circuit in:
– - MOSS Board or cable from 01A-Y0E4 to 01F-A1J2
– - Basic Board or flat cable from 01F-A1TB1/3 to 01G-A1YF/H or flat cable from 01F-A1TB2/4 to 01G-A1YA/D or cable from 01F-A1J4 to 01G-A1YE
– - any LIB1 or LIB2 or cable from 01F-A1J5 to 01M-A1A3 or cable from 01F-A1J6 to 01M-A2A3 or cable from 01F-A1J8 via 01L-B1 to 01L-A1A3 or cable from 01F-A1J7 via 01L-B2 to 01L-A2A3
– - HDD or FDD or cable from 01F-A1J3 to 01D-A1J3 and
01B-A1J2
PCC
PS1
Power ON executed less than 10 seconds after a power OFF. This is a normal operation.
001
Notes:
1. Panel codes 00B and 00C can occur if the
3745 is powered ON less than 10 seconds after a power OFF. This is a normal operation.
Wait at least 10 seconds after a power OFF before you try to power ON again.
2. You will have to disconnect (area by area) the elements connected to PS1. Depending on the configuration of your 3745, the panel code
00C (overvoltage, undervoltage) can be displayed at power ON when one board is disconnected. During this MAP consider only
panel code 00B (overcurrent).
Power ON the machine. Wait at least 10 seconds then power ON. If the trouble remains, continue with this step. If not, gather all information from the BER file and contact your support group.
– Unplug the Basic board power cable 01F-J4 from PS1.
– Unscrew the Basic board 5V laminar bus
01F-A1TB1/2/3 and 4. Refer to Figure 4-36 on page 4-31.
– Power ON the 3745 as follows:
Set the power control in local mode:
– Using Power Control scroll till the value is 3, local mode.
(Step 001 continues)
001 (continued)
– Press Validate.
– Press Power On reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
002
– Press Power Off.
– Replug the basic board power cables.
– Unplug the basic board card by card from
01G-A1A2 to 01G-A1X2 and try to power the 3745 ON after each one.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
003
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the faulty card you have just unplugged when 00B (oc) disappeared.
004
– Exchange the basic board. Go to “Basic
Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-77.
005
(Step 005 continues)
2-12
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
005 (continued)
– Replug the basic board power cables.
– Unplug the HDD/FDD power cable 01F-A1J3 from PS1.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
006
– Press Power Off.
– Replug the HDD/FDD power cable.
– Unplug the FDD power cable 01B-A1J2.
Refer to Figure 4-33 on page 4-29.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
007
– Exchange the FDD. Go to “FDD
Exchange Procedure” on page 4-52.
008
– Exchange the HDD. Go to “HDD
Exchange Procedure” on page 4-56.
009
– Replug the HDD/FDD power cable.
– Unplug the LIB1 power cable (01F-A1J6) from
PS1, if any. If there is no cable, go to Step 015.
Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
010
– Replug the LIB1 power cable.
– Unplug all LICs of LIB1 from 01M-A2C2 to 01M-A2K2 with their cable.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
011
– Relug the LICs, one by one, and exchange the faulty one. Go to
“LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.
012
– Unplug the DMUX (01M-A2B2) with its cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
(Step 012 continues)
3745 MAPs
012 (continued)
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
013
– Exchange the DMUX. Go to
“DMUX Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39.
014
– Exchange the LIB1 01M-A2. Go to “LIC
Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-84.
015
– Replug the LIB1 power cable.
– Unplug the LIB1 power cable (01F-A1J5) from the PS1, if any. If there is no cable, go to Step
021.
Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
016
– Replug the LIB1 power cable.
– Unplug all LICs of LIB1 from 01M-A1C2 to 01M-A1K2 with their cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
017
– replug the LICs one by one and exchange the faulty one. Go to
“LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.
018
– Unplug the DMUX 01M-A1B2 with its cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
019
– Exchange the DMUX. Go to “DMUX
Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39.
020
– Exchange the LIB1 01M-A1. Go to “LIC
Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-84.
021
(Step 021 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-13
3745 MAPs
021 (continued)
– Replug the LIB1 power cable.
– Unplug the LIB2 or LIB1 power cable 01F-A1J7 from PS1. if any. If there is no cable go to Step
027.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
022
– Replug the LIB2 or LIB1 power cable.
– Unplug all LICs of LIB1 or LIB2 from
01L-A2C2 to 01L-A2K2 with their cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
023
– Replug the LICs one by one and exchange the faulty one. Go to
“LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.
024
– Unplug the SMUX or DMUX (01L-A2B2) with its cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
025
– Exchange the SMUX. Go to
“SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure” on page 4-41.
– For the DMUX go to “DMUX
Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39.
026
– Exchange the LIB1 (01M-A1). Go to “LIC
Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-84.
– or exhange the LIB2. Go to “LIC Board
Type 2 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-88.
027
– Replug LIB2 or LIB1 power cable.
– Unplug LIB1 power cable 01F-A1J8 from PS1.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
028
(Step 028 continues)
028 (continued)
– Replug the LIB2 power cable.
– Unplug all LICs from LIB2 from 01L-A1C2 to 01L-A1K2 with their cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
029
– replug the LICs one by one and exchange the faulty one. Go to
“LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.
030
– Unplug the SMUX (01L-A1B2) with its cables.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
031
– Exchange the SMUX. Go to
“SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure” on page 4-41.
032
– Exchange the LIB2 (01L-A1). Go to “LIC
Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-88.
033
– Replug the LB1 power cable
– Unplug the MOSS cards (from 01A-X0E to
01A-X0H). Do not remove the PCC card
(01A-X0B).
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
034
– Press Power Off.
– Replug the MOSS card by card and try to power 3745 ON after each one.
– Exchange the faulty card you replugged when the over current appeared.
035
– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B). Go to
“Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
036
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
2-14
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
037
– Exchange the PS1. Go to “PS1 Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-67.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00B still displayed?
Yes No
038
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
039
– Exchange the MOSS board. Go to “MOSS
Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-92.
3745 MAPs
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-15
3745 MAPs
MAP 3905: Power ON Problem in Host Mode or Host Power Sequence
Problem
Symptom Explanation
Power ON is not possible in host mode.
The host system detects errors during the power ON sequence.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
The Power Control is not in host mode
Host or host cable problem
Remote power control box (EPO)
PCC card
Attention
Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.
Pin 1 Pin 4
001
When the power control is in host mode, a 1 is displayed on the control panel.
Is the power control in host mode?
Yes No
002
– If the panel is blank; go to “Power MAP
3930: Power Control Subsystem
Problems” on page 2-21.
– If not, put the power control in host mode:
Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 1.
Press Validate.
Re-initiate the command.
Continue with Step 003.
003
Is the 3745 powered ON?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 010.
005
– Check for 28 V between the frame ground and the back of the host connector which initiated the command at EPO 01S, pins 3 and 4. Refer to Figure 2-2 and to Figure 4-2 on page 4-4.
Is 28 V present on pin 3?
Yes No
006
There is a host problem, or an external host cable problem.
If no problem was found, contact your support structure. Refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
007
(Step 007 continues)
Pin 3 Pin 6
J5 J6 J7
Figure 2-2. EPO Location 01S
007 (continued)
Is 28 V present on pin 4?
Yes No
J8
008
– Exchange the FRU group 53 “3745 FRU
Group Table” on page 1-49
009
There is a Host problem, or an external host cable problem.
If no problem was found, contact your support structure. Refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
010
– Try to power ON in local mode:
Using Power Control scroll till the value is
3.
Press Validate.
Is Power ON possible in local mode?
Yes No
011
Go to “Power MAP 3930: Power Control
Subsystem Problems” on page 2-21.
012
– Press Power Off.
– Put the power control in host mode:
(Step 012 continues)
2-16
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
012 (continued)
Using Power Control scroll, till the value is
1.
Press Validate.
Re-initiate the command.
Is the 3745 powered ON?
Yes No
013
– Check for the 28 V between frame ground and Power Hold/Power Pick on EPO
01S on:
Any J Connector pin 5 if one is free
(J5/6/7/8) or
The back of any host connector if the four are used.
Pin 1 Pin 4
Pin 3 Pin 6
J5 J6 J7 J8
Are the two lines ON?
Yes No
014
There is a host problem, or an external host cable problem.
If no problem was found, contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting
Support” on page A-1.
015
– Exchange the PCC card. Go to
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1.
016
– Intermittent problem. The host, host cable, or
PCC card can be suspected.
3745 MAPs
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-17
3745 MAPs
MAP 3910: Overcurrent on Power Supply 2
Symptom Explanation
Overcurrent on power supply 2.
001
– Unplug the FAN1 power cable 01H-B1-J7 from
PS2.
– Power the 3745 ON as follows:
put the power control in local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00E still displayed?
Yes No
002
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the Fan1. Go to “Fan 1
Exchange Procedure” on page 4-50.
003
– Replug the Fan1 power cable.
– Unplug the Fan2 power cable (01H-B1-J6) from
PS2.
– Power the 3745 ON as follow:
Put the power control in local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Press Power On reset.
Is the panel code 00E still displayed?
Yes No
004
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the Fan2. Go to “Fan 2
Exchange Procedure” on page 4-51.
005
– Replug the Fan2 power cable.
– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B). Go to
“Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
– Press Power On Reset.
(Step 005 continues)
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Short circuit in:
Fan1
Fan2
PCC
Panel
PS2
005 (continued)
Is the panel code 00E still displayed?
Yes No
006
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
007
– Exchange the control panel. Go to “Control
Panel Exchange Procedure” on page 4-46.
– Press Power On Reset.
Is the panel code 00E still displayed?
Yes No
008
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
009
– Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary
Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
2-18
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3920: Air Flow Detector Fault
Symptom Explanation
Air flow detector fault for Fan1 or
Fan2
001
If the problem is intermittent, consider that any of the conditions given in the above table can cause the problem.
Panel code 030 indicates Fan1.
Panel codes 031 or 032 indicate Fan2.
Is the code 030 displayed?
Yes No
002
– Disconnect the Fan2 power cable from the front side of the power supply 2,
(location 01H-J6). Refer to Figure 4-37 on page 4-32.
– Check for the presence of -38 V dc between pins 1 and 2 of the power supply
2 (PS2) connector J6 while attempting to power ON the machine.
(Pin 1 ground and pin 2 -38 V.)
J6 J7
1 2
1 2
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Fan1 or Fan2
PCC
PS2
Tripped CP3
005 (continued)
– Check for the presence of -38V dc between pins 1 and 2 of the power supply 2 (connector
J7) while attempting to power ON the machine,
(Pin 1 ground and pin 2 -38 V).
J6 J7
1 2
Is voltage present and within tolerence
Yes No
006
±
10%?
1 2
– Reconnect the Fan1 power cable to
01H-J7.
– Exchange PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary
Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
007
– Reconnect the Fan1 power cable to 01H-J7.
– Check the cable from 01A-Y0A1 to 01K-J1 for correct setting.
If this cable is correctly fitted, exchange the
FRU group 40 “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
Is voltage present and within tolerence
±
10%?
Yes No
003
– Reconnect the Fan2 power cable to
01H-J6.
– Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-69.
004
– Reconnect the Fan2 power cable to
01H-J6.
– Check cable from 01A-Y0A1 to 01E-J1 for correct setting. If this cable is correctly fitted, exchange the FRU group 41 “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
005
– Disconnect the Fan1 power cable from the front side of the power supply 2, (location 01H-J7).
Refer to Figure 4-37 on page 4-32.
(Step 005 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-19
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3925: Scheduled Power on Problems
Symptom Explanation
The machine will not power On as scheduled
Attention
Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Wrong setting of scheduled time
Wrong setting of power control (should be 2)
Battery
PCC card
007 (continued)
You have a dead battery.
– Exchange it and record this action. Go to
“Battery Exchange Procedure” on page 4-48.
Note: Before starting maintenance, check the control panel to ensure that the Power Control display is set to 3 (Local).
If yes, proceed with Step 001.
If not, perform the following:
1. Press Power Control until 3 is displayed in the power control window.
2. Press Validate.
001
– Press Power On.
– Check at the ac present lamp to the right of the
Power On pushbutton.
Is the ac present lamp ON?
Yes No
002
You have a power ON problem. Go to
“Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem Problems” on page 2-21.
003
Is the code 007 displayed at the control panel?
Yes No
004
– Check with the operator that the data entered matches the actual day and time:
– Select the time services screen, and display Scheduled Power On data.
Is the data correct?
Yes No
005
With the right scheduled information, re-initiate the command.
006
Exchange the FRU group 38. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
007
(Step 007 continues)
2-20
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3930: Power Control Subsystem Problems
Symptom Explanation
Panel display or power indicator not lit.
Machine will not Power ON.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
UEPO
CB1 or any CP tripped
PS2
PCC card or Control Panel
Attention
Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.
Power supplies are sealed replaceable units.
B1
001
– Check at the control panel.
Are all indicators OFF or **** displayed?
Yes No
002
Go to Step 024 on page 2-23.
003
– Check for the presence of 28 V at the UEPO switch (see Figure 2-3). Use a CE meter and check for 28 V between:
Position 5 and the ground of the switch on the 3745 Models 130-170
Or
Positions A2 and the ground of the switch on the 3745 Model 17A.
Are 28 volts present?
Yes No
004
– Check the position of CP2 on the primary power box.
Is CP2 ON?
Yes No
005
– Switch CB1 OFF.
– Switch CP2 ON.
– Switch CB1 ON.
Does CP2 drop again?
Yes No
006
Power ON the 3745.
007
(Step 007 continues)
Battery
J1
C1
A1
EPO
4
5
6
Wiring Side
1
2
3
1
2
3
D C B A
Detail C 01C-C1SW1
Figure 2-3. UEPO Switch
Rear View
007 (continued)
– Check that the voltage select switch
(01H-B1/SW1) is correct for the input voltage. Refer to Figure 4-37 on page 4-32.
Is it correct?
Yes No
008
Set the voltage select switch
(SW1) to the correct position.
Go to Step 005.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-21
3745 MAPs
009
Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and
Primary Power Box Exchange
Procedure” on page 4-69.
010
– Check the position of the CB1 on the primary power box. Refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 for location.
Is the CB1 in the ON position?
Yes No
011
– Switch the CB1 ON.
– Power ON the 3745.
Is the 3745 powering ON now?
Yes No
012
Go to Step 001 on page 2-21
013
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
014
– Check the ac main voltage:
Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
– Put the power control in local mode:
- Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
- Press Validate.
– Press Power Off.
Refer to Figure 4-35 on page 4-30 and do the following:
Remove the PS1 input power cord at the Primary power box connector J1.
Connect a voltmeter to J1.
Press Power On Reset.
You have approximately two seconds to read the ac voltage.
Is the voltage correct?
Yes No
015
– Check for one of the following:
If the machine is correctly wired for the customer's input voltage.
If you have a short circuit in the primary control box.
If the customer's supply is defective.
016
Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and
Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
017
– Check Fuse 1. Refer to Figure 4-37 on page 4-32 for location.
Is the fuse OK?
Yes No
018
– Switch CB1 OFF.
– Exchange the fuse.
– Switch CB1 ON.
– If the fuse blows again, exchange the
FRU group 37.
Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
If not, re-initiate the operation.
019
– Measure the dc voltages at 01A-A1-J3 (Location
: 01b, refer to Figure 4-1 on page 4-3.)
VDC Vmin Vmax Test Point
+ 5.00
+ 4.75
+ 5.25
pin 22
+28.00 +24.90 +29.50 pin 21
01A-A1-J3
01A-Y0
A B C D E
13
25 28 V
5 V
1
14
Are both voltages present and within tolerance?
Yes No
020
(Step 020 continues)
2-22
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
020 (continued)
Is only +5 V present and within tolerance?
Yes No
021
– Exchange the Primary Power Box.
Go to “PS2 and Primary Power Box
Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
022
– Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and
Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
023
Exchange the FRU group 37. Go to “3745 FRU
Group Table” on page 1-49.
024
.
– At the power control window, check the mode validity.
1 = Host
2 = Network
3 = Local
Is the power mode in accordance with customer requirements?
Yes No
025
Correct the power mode and try again.
026
Is the power mode in local 3 displayed in the power window?
Yes No
027
– Press Power Control until the correct mode is displayed in the power control window.
– Press Validate.
Continue with Step 028.
028
.
– Press Power On.
Is the 3745 failing to power ON?
Yes No
029
– You may have an intermittent problem.
Before you continue, perform another
Power OFF/ON to check that the problem still exists in that mode.
3745 MAPs
If it does not, go to “MAP 3905: Power ON
Problem in Host Mode or Host Power
Sequence Problem” on page 2-16.
030
Is the UEPO switch (on the control panel), in the Power Enable position?
Yes No
031
.
– Put the UEPO switch in Power Enable position as follows (see Figure 2-3 on page 2-21):
Loosen the two screws.
Move the metal slider completely to the left.
Set the switch to I.
Move the metal slider to the right.
Secure the screws.
Retry the operation that brought you here.
032
Is Power On indicator ON?
Yes No
033
Does the control panel display a hexadecimal code?
Yes No
034
– Exchange the FRU group 37. Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
035
– Record the value of the hexadecimal code at the control panel.
Go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the action to be taken.
036
Normally (when the Power ON Indicator is lit), relay K1 in the primary control box is closed and the ac voltage is distributed to the rest of the machine.
Nevertheless, in case of a severe under voltage of the ac mains, the Power ON command may be memorized but not fully executed.
The Power On lamp is turned ON but the K1 remains OFF.
Consequently, all power supplies and blowers remain OFF.
– Using a CE meter, check for 28 volts between position 2 and ground on the UEPO switch (see
Figure 2-3 on page 2-21).
(Step 036 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-23
3745 MAPs
036 (continued)
Is 28 V within tolerance between 24.9 V and
29.5 V?
Yes No
037
Exchange the PS2. Go to “PS2 and Primary
Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
038
Exchange the FRU group 37, go to “3745 FRU
Group Table” on page 1-49.
2-24
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3935: Power OFF not Possible in Host Mode
Symptom Explanation
Power OFF is not possible in host mode
Attention
Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.
001
Is the host (that which initiated the command) the last host connected to be power ON?
Yes No
003
007
002
– Set the power control to local mode.
– Using power control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
– Power OFF.
(Step 007 continues)
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Another connected host is still power ON.
The power control is not in host mode.
Host or host cable problem.
PCC card.
– The 3745 will be powered OFF only by the last connected host.
When the power control is in host mode, a 1 is displayed on the control panel.
Is the power control in host mode?
Yes No
004
– Set the power control to host mode.
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 1.
– Press Validate.
– Power OFF in host mode.
Is power OFF now possible in host mode?
Yes No
005
Go to Step 007.
006
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
007 (continued)
Does the Power On Indicator now go OFF?
Yes No
008
Go to “Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not
Possible in Local Mode” on page 2-26.
009
– Check for 24 V between the frame ground and
Power Hold line on EPO 01S on:
Any J Connector pin 5 if one is free
(J5/6/7/8) or
The back of any host connector if the four are used.
Refer to Figure 2-4 and Figure 4-2 on page 4-4.
Pin 1
Pin 3
J5 J6 J7
Figure 2-4. EPO Location 01S
Is the power hold dropped?
Yes No
J8
Pin 4
Pin 6
010
There is a host problem or an external host cable problem.
If no problem is found, contact your support structure, refer to “Contacting Support” on page A-1.
011
– Exchange the PCC card. Go to “Exchange
Precautions” on page 4-1
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-25
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in Local Mode
Symptom Explanation
Power OFF is not possible in local mode
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
The power control is not in local mode
Relay K1
Control Panel
PCC
Attention
Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.
001
When the power control is in local mode, a 3 is displayed at the control panel.
Is the power control in local mode?
Yes No
002
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Set the power control to local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Press Power Off.
– Continue whit Step 003.
003
Is the 3745 still powered ON?
Yes No
004
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
005
Are the blowers stopped?
Yes No
006
– Suspect relay K1 located in primary power box 01H-A2.
Refer to the YZ pages for wiring.
– Repair and re-initiate the command.
– If correct, go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
007
– Exchange the FRU group 37 on page 1-51. Go to “3745 FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
2-26
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3950: PCC-Detected Error on MOSS Reset
Symptom Explanation
Incorrect states/sequencing in
MOSS reset signals.
001
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Set the power control to local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Press Power Off.
– Unplug the:
MCC card (01A-X0H)
MPC card (01A-X0E)
DFA card (01A-X0G)
– Press Power On Reset.
Does the same error appear?
Yes No
002
– Replug the:
MCC card (01A-X0H)
MPC card (01A-X0E)
– Exchange the DFA card (01A-X0G).
– Press Power On Reset.
Does the same error appear?
Yes No
003
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
004
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the DFA card (01A-X0G).
– Exchange the MPC card (01A-X0E).
– Press Power On Reset.
Does the same error appear?
Yes No
005
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
006
(Step 006 continues)
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
MPC
MCC
DFA
PCC
PS1
006 (continued)
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the MPC card (01A-X0E)
– Exchange the MCC card (01A-X0H)
– Press Power On Reset.
Does the same error appear?
Yes No
007
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
008
Suspect the MOSS board 01A.
009
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B).
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-27
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3960: Power OFF not Possible in Network Mode
Symptom Explanation
Power OFF is not possible in network mode
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
The power control is not in network mode
The Power Off command is not received from the host
PUC
PCC
Host Cable problem
3745 not able to power OFF in local mode
Attention
Power may be present when nothing is displayed on the control panel.
001
To enter this MAP: The NCP must be running and a network Power Off command must have been issued.
When the power control is in network mode, a 2 is displayed at the control panel.
Is the power control in network mode?
Yes No
003
005
002
– Set the power control to network mode.
Using Power Control scroll till the value is 2.
Press Validate.
– Re-initiate the Power OFF command from the host.
Continue with Step 003.
Is the Power On indicator lit?
Yes No
004
– The Power OFF command was successful.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
Set the power control in local mode.
Using Power Control scroll till the value is 3.
Press validate.
Press Power Off.
Does the Power On indicator go OFF?
Yes No
006
(Step 006 continues)
006 (continued)
Continue at “Power MAP 3945: Power OFF not Possible in Local Mode” on page 2-26.
007
– Set the power control to network mode.
Using Power Control scroll till the value is
2.
Press Validate.
– Power the 3745 On by pressing Power
On/Reset.
– Select the IFT diagnostics routine AT05.
Is the Power On indicator still lit?
Yes No
008
You have an NCP or network problem.
Contact your support structure if additional assistance is required.
009
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Set the power control to local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Press Power Off.
– Turn the CB1 OFF.
– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B). Refer to
Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
– Turn the CB1 ON.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Set the power control to network mode.
Using Power Control scroll till the value is
2.
Press Validate.
– Select the IFT diagnostics and run routine
AT05.
(Step 009 continues)
2-28
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
009 (continued)
Is the 3745 still powered ON?
Yes No
010
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
011
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Set the power control to local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Press Power Off.
– Turn the CB1 OFF.
– Re-install the PCC card.
– Exchange the MCC card (01A-X0H). Refer to
Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
– Turn the CB1 ON.
– Press Power On Reset.
– Set the power control to network mode.
Using Power Control, scroll till the value is
2.
Press Validate.
– Select the IFT diagnostics and run routine
AT05.
Is the 3745 still powered ON?
Yes No
012
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
013
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Set the power control to local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Press Power Off.
– Re-install the MCC card (01A-X0H).
– Exchange the PUC card (01G-V).
– Set the power control to network mode.
Using Power Control, scroll till the value is
2.
Press Validate.
– Select the IFT diagnostics and run routine
AT05.
(Step 013 continues)
3745 MAPs
013 (continued)
Is the 3745 still powered ON?
Yes No
014
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
015
– Re-install the PUC card (01G-V).
You have gone through the entire procedure and the problem is still present. Contact your support structure for further assistance.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-29
3745 MAPs
Power MAP 3970: PCC-Detected Error on CCU Reset or on Remote
Power OFF
Symptom Explanation
Incorrect states/sequencing in CCU reset signals.
001
– Power the 3745 OFF as follows:
Set the power control to local mode:
– Using Power Control, scroll till the value is 3.
– Press Validate.
Press Power Off.
– Disconnect cable connector 01A-Y0A3 from the
MOSS board. Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
– Press Power On Reset.
does the same error appear?
Yes No
002
(From step 008)
– Reconnect the cable connector.
– Exchange the PUC card (01G-V)
– Press Power On Reset.
Does the same error appear?
Yes No
003
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
004
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the PUC card (01G-V)
– Exchange the SCTL card (01G-W)
– Press Power On Reset.
does the same error appear?
Yes No
005
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
006
Suspect the cable from 01A-Y0A3 to
01G-A1YP on page 1-52 or the cable
01A-Y0A2 to 01G-A1YR on page 1-52 or
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
SCTL
PUC
PCC
PS1
Cable from 01A-Y0A3 to 01G-A1YP on page 1-52
Cable from 01A-Y0A2 to 01G-A1YR on page 1-52
Basic board.
007
– Reconnect the cable connector.
– Disconnect cable connector 01A-Y0-A2 from the
MOSS board. Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
– Press Power On Reset.
does the same error appear?
Yes No
008
Go to Step 002
009
– Reconnect the cable connector.
– Press Power Off.
– Exchange the PCC card (01A-X0B)
2-30
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 LAN MAP
MAP 4500: 3745 Models 17A Permanent Console Link Problem
Symptom Explanation
Console not accessible indicator
Console Message
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Service processor
Ring
Service processor access unit
MLA card
001
Is there a panel code displayed on the 3745 control panel?
Yes No
002
Go to “3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.
003
Go to “3745 Control Panel Code” on page 2-32 for control panel code interpretation.
3745 MAPs
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-31
3745 MAPs
3745 Control Panel Code
BB0
BB1
BB2
BB3
BB4
BB5
BB6
BC0
BC1
BC2
B95
B96
B97
B98
B99
B9A
B9B
B9C
B9D
B9E
B9F
Table 2-2. 3745 Control Panel Code
3745 Control
Panel Code
Description
B8F LAN adapter check
B90
B91
B92
B93
B94
Hardware init error
Microcode error
Lobe media test failure
Signal loss while opening
Wire fault while opening
BC3
BC4
BD0
BE0
Open frequency error
Time out while opening
Ring failure while opening
Ring beaconing while open
Duplicate node address
Open request parameters
Open remove received
Open IMPL force received
No monitor for RPL at open
Lobe wire fault at open
Remote station connected
Time out
Link lost
DM/DISC received /acked
FRMR received
SABME received
Ti Timer expired
FMMR sent
Unexpected SABME received
Permanent ring beaconing
Lobe wire fault
Auto-removal while beaconing
Remove received
Auto-removal
FSM time out
Watchdog time out
Action
Exchange the MLA card.
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
Contact your support structure for assistance.
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
Suspect a ring problem (see Note 1).
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
Suspect a ring problem (see Note 1).
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
Suspect a problem in the service processor or ring problem (see Note 2).
Suspect a ring problem (see Note 1).
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
Suspect ring problem (see Note 1)
Suspect a hardware problem (see Note 1).
Suspect a problem in the service processor.
(see Note 2)
Notes:
1. Use the Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.
2. Check the ring and the service processor. Go to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual, chapter "Service Processor Problem Determination".
2-32
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
3745 RSF MAP
MAP 4510: 3745 Model 17A Manual Call
You are here because there was a problem in connecting the service processor to RETAIN or because you want to test this facility.
Perform a manual call using the 3745 or the 3746-900 facilities to check this connection.
The service processor console must be logged ON. If it is not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 (for logging ON) and return here.
Before starting this MAP check the Remote Support facility options using the following procedure:
On the MOSS-E View window. Double-click on the service processor icon.
The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.
Click on Configuration Management.
Double-click on Manage Remote Operations.
Select Remote operations authorization in the Remote Operation Management window.
Click on OK.
Ensure that the two following options are selected in the Remote Support Facility window:
– Enable Remote Support Facility
– Generate alerts
Select them, if not already done, and click on OK.
Click on Cancel to return to the Service Processor Menu.
001
Is there a 3746-900 attached to your 3745?
Yes No
002
Go to Step 006.
003
Return to the MOSS-E View window. Double-click on the 3746-900 icon.
Click on Problem Management.
Double-click on Report Problem Using Remote Support Facilities.
Enter a short description in the Problem Analysis window. Testing the RSF link Click on OK.
Click on OK, in the Report Problem Using RSF window.
Wait for either the alarm Call to RETAIN successful (indicating the normal end of transmission), or the message Call to RETAIN failed.
Write down the alarm number.
Is the alarm Call to RETAIN successful displayed?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 009 on page 2-34.
005
Go top Step 008 on page 2-34.
006
Return to the MOSS-E View window. Double-click on the 3745 icon.
Click on Problem Management.
(Step 006 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-33
3745 MAPs
006 (continued)
Double-click on Report Problem Using Remote Support Facilities.
Enter a short description: in the Problem Analysis window, 'Testing the RSF link'.
Click on OK.
Click on OK in the Report Problem Using RSF window.
Wait for either the alarm Call to RETAIN successful (indicating the normal end of transmission), or the message Call to RETAIN failed.
Write down the alarm number.
Is the alarm Call to RETAIN successful displayed?
Yes No
007
Go to Step 009.
008
The connection to RETAIN is successful. The following table contains the alarms generated by this connection.
Select the Alarm
Number
0641
0642
0649
Meaning
Your microcode is up-to-date. Therefore no fix has been downloaded.
A fix has been downloaded automatically. Install the fix.
Call to RETAIN was successful but no downloaded., MCL is too large or there is not enough disk space.
Active and accepts all MCL(s) already received to free space disk and retry the normal call for the new MCL(s). If the problem persists call your support center.
There is a PE problem.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
009
Locate the alarm number in the following table and perform the required action.
Select the Alarm
Number
0643
0644
064C
068C
068D
Action
Go to Step 010 on page 2-35
Call to RETAIN is not authorized. Refer to the
Service Processor Installation and
Maintenance, manual,( step on Recording the Customer Information).
The call to RETAIN has been performed but RETAIN required a disconnection due to a bad product setup. The following information is missing in the RETAIN customer CCPF file or the system registration file.
Customer number
Machine Model xxA
Branch office number
Area number
Warranty/Status
Provide this information to your support before he contacts the RETAIN coordinator for updating.
Suspect a Communication Manager problem. Check the Communication Manager configuration. Refer to the
Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual,
(step on Setting Up Communication Parameters to Allow Remote and Netview
Operations). Re-boot the service processor. If the problem persits contact your support center.
Check the connection between the modem and the line. Check that the telephone number used is correct. Refer to the
Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (step on Recording the Customer Information).
2-34
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 MAPs
010
Click on OK in the alarm window. A second alarm should be displayed. Locate this second alarm number in the following table and perform the required action.
Select the Alarm
Number
064A
064B
064D
0681
0682
0685
0686
0687
0688
0689
068A
Action
There is a PE problem. Call your support center for assistance.
There is a PE problem. Call your support center for assistance.
The call to RETAIN has not been performed because:
The associated data has not been tersed or
The associated tersed data has not been written to the service processor disk
(the partition was full). To free space on the disk perform the following steps:
1. Return to the MOSS-E View window.
2. Double-click on the service processor icon.
3. Click on Operation Management in the Service Processor Menu.
4. Double-click on Delete Engineering Data.
5. A Deleting Engineering Data window is displayed, asking you to confirm your choice.
6. Click on YES.
7. Follow the prompts.
8. When this operation is finished retry a call to RETAIN.
If the problem persists, contact your support center for assistance.
Suspect a multiprotocol adapter problem.
Run the multiprotocol diagnostic.
Refer to the
Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter
How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics).
Check that the Communication Manager has been correctly initialized.
If everything is correct, suspect a modem problem. Refer to the modem documentation to run diagnostics.
Suspect a Communication Manager problem. Re-start the Communication Manager or if this fails re-boot the service processor.
The machine is not registered in the RETAIN data base. The following information is missing in RETAIN CCPF.
Machine type
Serial number
Provide this information to your support center before he contacts the RETAIN coordinator for updating.
Check the telephone number and prefix configuration. Refer to the Service
Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (step on Recording the Customer
Information).
Suspect an integrated modem problem.
Run the integrated modem diagnostics using the wrap plug.
Refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter on How to Run the service processor diagnostics).
If the modem is error free and if the problem persists, contact your support center for assistance.
Suspect an integrated modem problem.
Run the modem diagnostic using the wrap plug.
Refer to the
Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter on How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics).
If the modem is error free and if the problem persists, contact your support center for assistance.
The local modem is already in use. Check that the remote console is not in use.
The integrated modem is already in use. Check that the remote console is not in use.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-35
3745 MAPs
Select the Alarm
Number
068B
Action
Suspect a modem problem.
If you have an integrated modem, run the modem diagnostic using the wrap plug.
Refer to the Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual (chapter on How to Run the Service Processor Diagnostics).
If you have an external modem, refer to the modem documentation to run diagnostics.
If the modem is error free, suspect a line problem. Call the appropriate service representative.
2-36
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
MAP 5200: 3745/3746-900/Service Processor/Network Node Processor
Icon Color Symptoms
Symptom Explanation
3745, 3746-900, or Network Node
Processor (NNP) problem
The 3745 icon, the 3746-900 icon, and/or the NNP icon in the
MOSS-E View window are not green.
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
3745 scanner and/or a CCU has failed.
3745 NCP not loaded.
3746-900 one or more processors, CBC, or ESCC have failed.
No link between 3745 and/or 3746-900 with the service processor.
No link between NNP and the service processor.
No link between NNP and the 3746-900.
NNP has failed.
001
The service processor console must be logged ON. If it is not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 (for logging ON) and return here.
The color of the 3745, 3746-900, NNP, and the service processor icons reflects their status. For example a green icon indicates that the machine is operational. The following table describes the icon color selection.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-37
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
Table 2-3. Icons Color Selection Table
Machine Icon Color
Service
Processor
White
3745
White
Grey
Pink
3746
Yellow
White
Grey
NNP-X
Pink
Red
White
Grey
Pink
Blue
Go to
Step 002 on page 2-38.
Step 003 on page 2-38.
Step 004 on page 2-39.
Step 005 on page 2-39.
Step 006 on page 2-39.
Step 007 on page 2-39.
The 3746-900 is not connected to the service processor.
Go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service Processor” on page 2-42.
Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model
900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Step 008 on page 2-39.
The control point is starting and the configuration is activating This is a normal state. However if this state stay a too long time suspect a problem. Check if you have alarms at the service processor
There is no connection betweeen the service processor and the network node processor.
Or
The link is not ready between the 3746-9xx and the control point of the network node processor.
Refer to the
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model
900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
The control point is waiting for operator start, or no NDF
(Node Definition File). Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
The connection between the service processor and the network node processor is OK. The network node processor is in standby mode. The control point must be started. Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
002
The service processor icon is white.
Check if the yellow LED of the service processor (indicating disk access) is active.
If the yellow LED is sometimes ON and sometimes OFF, wait a few more minutes. If the symptom persists, contact your support center for assistance.
If the yellow LED is always OFF, contact your support center for assistance.
003
The 3745 icon is white.
Check the displayed 3745 control panel code or the 3745 status on the service processor:
– On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the 3745 icon.
– Click on Program (in the action bar).
– Click on Status option.
– The 3745 Controller Status window indicates the CCU status and the associated control code.
Note the control code displayed. Then go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the procedure.
2-38
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
004
The 3745 icon is grey.
The 3745 is not connected to the service processor.
Go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service Processor” on page 2-42.
005
The 3745 icon is pink.
Click on the 3745 icon pink.
Click on Program in the action bar.
Click on Status.
The 3745 Controller Status window indicates the CCU status and if some adapters are unavailable.
The normal status of CCU is loaded. If a CCU is not in this state check:
1. If the CCU control program has been loaded.
2. If the control program has started to load but has not terminated successfully. Go to “General
Verbal Symptoms” on page 1-8 and follow the procedure.
If an adapter address is displayed in the unavailable adapters part of the 3745 Controller Status, run the diagnostic on the suspected adapter. Go to “3745 Maintenance Actions” on page 1-6 and follow the procedure.
006
The 3746-900 yellow icon is a normal state. Its duration depends on the 3746-900 configuration.
On the 3746-900 control panel, check if there is a character displayed on the Service processor not
accessible digit.
If a character is displayed, go to “MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service
Processor” on page 2-42. Otherwise check if the service processor yellow LED (indicating disk access) is active.
If the yellow LED is sometimes ON or sometimes OFF, wait a few more minutes. If the symptom persists, contact your support center for assistance.
If the yellow LED is always OFF, contact your support center for assistance.
007
The 3746-900 white icon is a normal state. Its duration depends on the 3746-900 configuration.
Check either the displayed 3746-900 control panel code or the 3746-900 status on the service processor:
– On the MOSS-E View window double-click on the 3746-900 icon.
– Click on Program (in the action bar)
– Click on Status.
– The 3746-900 Status window indicates the IML steps, the address of any processor, CBC or unavailable ESCC, and the control panel code.
Note the control panel code displayed. Refer to the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model
900 Service Guide, SY33-2116 for investigation.
008
The 3746-900 icon is red when it is set to Offline mode.
To set the 3746-900 to Online mode follow these steps:
– Double-click on the 3746-900 icon.
– On the 3746-9x0 Menu window, click on Problem management.
– Click on Set 3746-9x0 Online/Offline option.
– On the Set 3646-900 Online/Offline window, click on Yes.
– On the next Set 3746-9x0 Online/Offline window, click on YES or NO (according to the current setting).
(Step 008 continues)
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-39
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
008 (continued)
– On the next Set 3746-9x0 Online/Offline window, click on OK.
Start a general IML in order to set the 3746-900 in Online mode.
At IML completion, the 3746-900 icon must be green.
Return to the MOSS-E View window.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102 to return the machine to the customer. If the problem persists contact your support center.
2-40
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745/3746-900/Service Processor MAPs
MAP 5205: LAN Checking
You are here because you suspect the LAN cable (WLOB) or the service processor access unit (ACUN) to be faulty.
001
Perform the following steps:
Check that the service processor LAN cable is correctly connected to the rear of the service processor and in the service processor access unit.
Check that all the LAN cables are correctly connected to the service processor access unit.
Did you find the problem?
Yes No
002
Exchange the suspected FRU.
003
Problem solved. Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-41
Service Processor MAPs
Service Processor MAPs
MAP 5600: LAN Problem on the LAN Attached to the Service
Processor
Symptom Explanation
Unable to activate or deactivate a ring
Errors occur while ring is running
No connection with the service processor
Conditions That Could Cause This Symptom
Service processor or network node processor LAN adapter
Ring
Service processor access unit
3746-900 TIC3 or CBSP
3745 MLA card
Service
Processor
MOSS-E
LAN
Adapter
Service
Processor
Access
Unit
(Note 2)
3745
(Note 3)
3746-900
(Note 3)
NNP-B
Network Node
Processor
NNP-A (Note 1)
APPN LAN
Adapter
3746-950
Figure 2-5. LAN Attached to the Service Processor
Notes:
1. The network node processor is an optional feature which is present only when APPN is installed. Up to four network node processors can be installed on the same LAN. A backup network node processor can also be present.
2. The LAN can be made of two service processor access units (8228).
3. Only 37xx units can be connected to the LAN when APPN is installed.
001
You are here because there is a problem on the LAN that is attached to the service processor. The following links can be impacted (one or more):
3745 MOSS/MOSS-E link
3746-900/MOSS-E link
3746-900/APPN link (if present)
MOSS-E/APPN link (if present)
(Step 001 continues)
2-42
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Service Processor MAPs
001 (continued)
Is the problem permanent?
Yes No
002
Go to Step 016 on page 2-44.
003
Does the problem appear on all units connected to the service processor?
Yes No
004
Go to Step 011.
005
Is the service processor powered ON?
Yes No
006
Power ON the service processor.
Is the service processor powered ON?
Yes No
007
Go to Step 010.
008
Problem solved.
009
Check that the service processor LAN cables are correctly connected to the rear of the service processor
Check that the LAN cables are correctly connected to the service processor access unit.
If everything is correct continue with Step 010.
010
Go to Service Processor Problem Determination in the corresponding Service Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.
011
Is the problem only on a 3745?
Yes No
012
In the following list, select the unit that has a problem:
Faulty Unit Action:
3746-900
3746-950
Restart the problem determination using the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Restart the problem determination using the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 950 Service Guide, SY33-2108.
Network Node Processor
Perform the problem determination on the network node processor using the Network Node Processor Problem Determination in the corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and Maintenance
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-43
Service Processor MAPs
Other unit
manual.
If you have a unit other than a 3745, 3746-900, or 3746-950 connected to the LAN, refer to the specific documentation of this unit or do the problem determination on the ring using, the Token-Ring
Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.
013
Is there a panel code displayed on the 3745 control panel?
Yes No
014
Go to “3745 Control Panel Symptoms” on page 1-11.
015
Go to “3745 Control Panel Code” on page 2-32 for control panel code interpretation.
016
You are here because you have transient errors on the service processor LAN .
Does the problem appear on all units connected to the service processor?
Yes No
017
Go to Step 019.
018
Check that the service processor LAN cable is correctly connected to the rear of the service processor.
Check that all the LAN cables are correctly connected to the service processor access unit.
Do the problem determination on the ring using, the Token-Ring Network Problem Determination
Guide, SX27-3710.
If you do not identify the problem, contact your support center.
019
Is the problem only on a 3745?
Yes No
020
Faulty Unit
3746-900
3746-950
Network Node Processor
Other unit
Action:
Restart the problem determination using the IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900 Service Guide, SY33-2116.
Restart the problem determination using the
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 950 Service Guide, SY33-2108.
Perform the problem determination on the network node processor using the Network Node Processor Problem Determination in the corresponding Network Node Processor Installation and Maintenance manual.
If you have a unit other than a 3745, 3746-900, or 3746-950 connected on the LAN, refer to the specific documentation of this unit or do the problem determination on the ring using, the Token-Ring
Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.
021
2-44
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Service Processor MAPs
Go to Step 022.
022
If your are not already logged ON at service processor console, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 for log ON. Then return here.
On the MOSS-E View window, double-click on the desired 3745 icon.
Click on MOSS.
On the MOSS screen, enter ELD (Event Log Display) and press Enter on the service processor keyboard.
On the next MOSS screen, enter 7 (alarm) and press Enter on the service processor keyboard.
In the list, check the presence of alarms type 11 (link lost) showing a problem on LAN.
Is there an alarm type 11?
Yes No
023
Perform the problem determination on the ring using the, Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, SX27-3710.
024
Record the selection number of each alarm 11. Enter this selection number and press the Enter key on the service processor keyboard.
On the next MOSS screen, record the panel code.
Repeat the two preceding steps for each alarm type 11. Then go to “3745 Control Panel Code” on page 2-32 to interpret the panel codes and continue the procedure.
Chapter 2. Map for FRU Isolation
2-45
Service Processor MAPs
2-46
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Diagnostics
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
Diagnostic Description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3745 Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Errors During Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Diagnostic Monitoring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Checkout Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
CBA Diagnostic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
CBA Diagnostics from 3745 MOSS Console
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Prerequisites to Run the CBA Test from the 3745 MOSS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
How to Run MOSS Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
From the 3745 Console
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
From the Control Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
How to Loop MOSS Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Local/Remote or Alternate/RSF Link Tests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
How to Run the Control Panel Test
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
How to Run Internal Function Tests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
How to Invoke Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
How to Select Diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Options Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Error Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
How to Run the LIC Wrap Test with IFTs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
Install the Wrap Plug
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
Start the Diagnostic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13
How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15
Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16
Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
Available Wrap Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Available Wrap Plugs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
How to Run the Channel Wrap Test
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
3-1
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Description
3745 Diagnostics
Two groups of diagnostics run on the 3745:
1. Automatic:
IML/IPL checkout diagnostics including MOSS diagnostics.
2. Controlled:
Internal function tests (IFTs)
Wrap tests
OLTs.
Diagnostics are run during the installation procedure and when a fault is detected to isolate a field-replaceable unit that caused the failure. They are also executed after a repair is performed, to check that the hardware area is working correctly.
They must be run before and after an EC or MES has been installed in the area concerned.
Diagnostics may be run in offline mode when the
3745 is fully available or in concurrent mode. In concurrent mode, the diagnostic must be selected in the specific area and will run only in configured units. These units must be available at that time.
Errors During Diagnostics
When the MOSS diagnostic program detects a failure, a three-digit code is displayed on the control panel.
When the internal function tests detect an error, a reference code is posted on the 3745 console.
Diagnostic Monitoring
The controlled diagnostics are monitored by the diagnostic control monitor (DCM) and the command processor (CP).
The diagnostic control monitor is loaded when the diagnostic utility program is selected from the
3745 function menu.
It automatically restricts the diagnostic testing to the elements that are defined in the configuration data file (CDF) and disconnected from the NCP.
Checkout Diagnostics
The checkout diagnostics are designed to test the hardware of the CCU, IOC, Channel Adapter, CSP part of the line adapter, TIC, and the PCC card.
For the CA, LA, and TIC, diagnostics are part of the microcode and are located in the ROS of the adapter itself. They run automatically at power
ON time before IML.
The cyclic PCC checkouts run when the machine is powered ON and are successful when the power control and service mode indicators are displayed.
For the CCU and IOC, the diagnostics are located on the disk and run during IPL.
For the CA, TSS, HPTSS, and ESS, they are also automatically run when the internal function tests are started.
For the TIC, the token-ring wrap test is automatically run at each TIC Open command from the
NCP. This TIC Internal Lobe Media tests the ring up to the local wiring concentrator (IBM 8228), or up to the point where it is unplugged before the
8228.
If an error is detected, the MOSS analyzes the problem and presents a control panel code or a reference code.
3-2
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
CBA Diagnostic
The link between the 3745 and the 3746-900 is checked via CBA routines invoked from the 3745
MOSS console.
CBA Diagnostics from 3745 MOSS
Console:
New diagnostic sections are provided to test the 3745/3746-900 interface. These sections must be run manually and offline.
IOC interface is tested by the new section:
The IDxx section tests the path between the
CCU and IOC Bus.
– ID01: Use of IOC test register.
– ID02: Test of bad parity
– ID03: Interrupt test.
The run time is about 1 minute and 30 seconds.
DMA interface is tested by a new section
XAxx.
IOC/DMA Bus
Diagnostics
– XA01: DMA test.
– XA02: Extended DMA test.
The run time is about 6 minutes per coupler.
Prerequisites to Run the CBA Test from the 3745 MOSS
The 3745 must be powered ON and in offline mode.
The 3746-900 must be powered ON and in online mode.
The CBC and the CBSP must not be in concurrent mode.
The CBC and the CBSP must be available in the CDF-E.
The 3746-900 must be error free.
Refer to Figure 3-1 for the coverage of CBA diagnostics.
CBC
CBA
: Tested by CBA Diagnostics
: Not Tested by CBA Diagnostics
Figure 3-1. CBA Diagnostic Coverage
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-3
Diagnostics
How to Run MOSS Diagnostics
These tests can be run without stopping the customer's application.
Error conditions will result in a control panel code being displayed. Actions for these codes are defined in “3745 Control Panel
Codes” on page 1-15.
or
Some errors will result in a reference code at
IML completion. These types can also be recognized by the panel code displaying F0D.
Refer to “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14 for action.
Ensure that the MOSS is offline or alone (look at
MOSS Status Area on the second line of the console screen) and that service mode (panel) is
0 or 1.
From the 3745 Console
1. On the 3745 console, select Menu 1 (see PF key line).
2. In Menu 1, type IML in the selection area for
IML MOSS.
3. After approximately 2 minutes the console will be re-initialized with the Channel
Enable/Disable screen which indicates that a successful run of MOSS diagnostics and the
MOSS IML have been completed.
4. If the console has not been re-initialized, an error was detected.
From the Control Panel
1. Set the function to MOSS IML: a. Press Service until the number 0 or 1 is displayed in the service window. (No bypass of MOSS diagnostics.)
b. Press Validate.
c. Press Function until the number 1 is displayed in the function window.
d. Press Validate.
2. If after approximately 2 minutes the control panel displays code F0F, the MOSS diagnostics and a MOSS IML have been successfully completed. Code F0E can be displayed if the
MOSS was previously alone (that is not in
offline mode).
3. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected.
3-4
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Diagnostics
How to Loop MOSS Diagnostics
If an intermittent MOSS problem is suspected, the
loop MOSS diagnostics facility can be used as follows:
Ensure that the MOSS is offline or alone
(check the MOSS Status Area, on the second line of the console screen).
1. Set the service mode to Maintenance 1: a. Press Service until the number 1 is displayed in the service window.
b. Press Validate.
2. Set the function to loop on MOSS diagnostics: a. Press Function until the digit A is displayed in the function window.
b. Press Validate.
3. The MOSS diagnostics will run continuously unless an error is detected. Usually 5 to 10 minutes of error free operation are sufficient to determine whether the MOSS is working satisfactorily. If an error is detected, a panel code will be permanently displayed. Therefore, go to “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
Gentle vibration of the MOSS cables and cards (while the test is running), will locate most loose connection problems.
If no error is detected:
4. Set the function to MOSS IML: a. Press Function until 1 is displayed in the function window.
b. Press Validate.
5. When the control panel displays F0F (or F0E if the MOSS was previously alone), perform a
MOSS online. Refer to “How to Put the
MOSS Online” on page 4-105.
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-5
Diagnostics
How to Run the Console Link Test for 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and
170
This function is available for 3745 Models 130,
150, 160, and 170 only.
This function tests the customer's console ports with wrap plugs which may be installed at the end of the cable. They are attached to either the local console, the remote console modem, or the RSF link modem. The wrap plugs can also be installed at the connectors for these cables in the 3745 (not possible with the 3727 console cable).
This test can be run without stopping the customers application.
Local/Remote or Alternate/RSF
Link Tests
1. Ensure that the customer is not using any of the 3745 consoles and also confirm the availability of MOSS.
2. Set the power control to local: a. Press Power Control until 3 is displayed in the power control window.
b. Press Validate.
3. Set Service mode to Maintenance 1: a. Press Service until the number 1 is displayed in the service window.
b. Press Validate.
RSF
J1
Remote
J2
Local
J3
01R
Figure 3-2. Console Output
4. We advise you to start the wrap plugging from the far end of the DCE interface cable. Refer to Figure 3-3 on page 3-7 for the different cable configurations.
5. Remove the DCE interface cable from the console, modem, or console switch (the DCE interface cable may be connected directly to the DCE, or to an intermediate "adapter". In
the second case remove the the DCE inter-
face cable from the "adapter").
6. Connect the appropriate wrap plug to the end of the cable.
Wrap plug to be used according to the DCE interface cable and to the console:
DCE interface cable between the 3745 and the console/modem without an intermediate "adapter" (
.A/
in Figure 3-3).
Use wrap plug PN 6398697.
DCE interface cable between the 3745 and the console/modem with an intermediate "adapter" (
.B/
in Figure 3-3).
Use the wrap plug PN 2667737.
DCE interface cable between the 3745 and the console switch (7427) (
.C/
in
Figure 3-3).
Use the wrap plug PN 2667737.
DCE interface cable between the console with the (7427) and the console/modem
(
.D/
in Figure 3-3).
Use the wrap plug PN 6398697 for a console 31XX or the wrap plug PN
2667737 for a 3727 console.
Important:
The cable connecting to the alternate console must be tested on the Local output with the test option 8.
OR
Open the rear cover of the 3745 base frame.
Remove the appropriate cable (if installed) from the output and connect the wrap plug PN
6398697. See Figure 3-2.
7. Set the function to the link test required: either remote/alternate, RSF, or local: a. Press Function until 6, 7 or 8 is displayed in the function window.
6 (remote/alternate)
7 (RSF)
8 (Local).
b. Press Validate.
8. After a partial MOSS IML the following panel codes will be displayed:
a. LOCAL.
1B1: Start of test
1B2: Successful completion of test.
b. REMOTE/ALTERNATE
1B3: Start of test
1B4: Successful completion of test.
c. RSF
1B5: Start of test
1B6: Successful completion of test.
3-6
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
If any other panel code is displayed, disconnect the wrap plug. Go to “3745 Control
Panel Codes” on page 1-15 and follow the instructions.
9. Disconnect the wrap plug and reconnect the cable.
10. Set service mode to NORMAL: a. Press Service until 0 is displayed in the function window.
b. Press Validate.
3745
External Cable
(DCE Interface Cable)
MOSS
Board
Tailgate
Internal Cable
A
Console or
Modem
3745
MOSS
Board
External Cable
(DCE Interface Cable)
Adapter
Console or
Modem
Tailgate
Internal Cable
B
Diagnostics
11. Set the function to MOSS IML: a. Press Function until 1 is displayed in the function window.
b. Press Validate.
12. When the control panel displays F0F or F0E if the MOS was previously alone), perform a
MOSS online. Refer to “How to Put the
MOSS Online” on page 4-105.
13. The console link test has completed with no error detected.
3745
External Cable
(DCE Interface Cable)
External Cable
(DCE Interface Cable)
MOSS
Board
Tailgate
Internal Cable
Figure 3-3. Cable Configurations
C
7427
D
Console or
Modem
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-7
Diagnostics
How to Run the Control Panel Test
This test can be run without stopping the customers application.
This test is not a sequential test and can be cancelled at any time by pressing Exit.
Notes:
1. Any inactivity (during the panel test), of approximately 60 seconds will result in the test being automatically cancelled and the panel will return to operational mode.
2. During this test, the control panel audible alarm will sound for each action.
The special character can be described as when every possible segment of the window is being lit:
1. Set the power to local: a. Press Power Control until 3 is displayed in the power control window.
b. Press Validate.
If the above action cannot be performed, go to Step 11.
2. Set Service mode to Maintenance 1: a. Press Service until the number 1 is displayed in the service window.
b. Press Validate.
If the above action can not be performed go to Step 11.
3. Set Function to panel test: a. Press Function until 5 is displayed in the function window.
b. Press Validate.
If the above action can not be performed go to Step 11.
Observe the display: All 10 special characters will be displayed.
If the pattern is not identical for each figure, go to Step 11.
Note: If during the following steps the function window displays the digit 5. The the control panel has detected its own failure.
Continue at Step 11.
4. Press Function.
Observe the display: The Function window
special character will be displayed. Repetitive action will scroll through the Code window sequentially and wrap around.
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
5. Press Service.
Observe the display: The Service window
special character will be displayed. Repetitive action will scroll through the Power
Control window and wrap around.
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
6. Press Power Control.
Observe the display: The Console in Use window special character will be displayed.
Repetitive action will scroll through the All CA
Disabled MOSS Inop and the MOSS Msg windows sequentially and wrap around.
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
7. Press Power On Reset.
Observe the display: The digit 8 will be displayed in the Function window.
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
8. Press Power Off.
Observe the display: The display will be completely blank.
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
9. Press Exit.
Observe the display: The display will present the Power Control and Service Mode indicating that the test is complete, and the panel has returned to operational mode.
If this does not occur, go to Step 12.
10. The control panel test has completed with
no error detected. Discard Steps 11 and
12 . Return to the procedure where you come from.
11. Exchange the FRU group 35. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
12. Exchange the FRU group 10. Go to “3745
FRU Group Table” on page 1-49.
3-8
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Diagnostics
How to Run Internal Function Tests
How to Invoke Diagnostics:
On the 3745 console, press F5 in Menu 1 to display the maintenance function Menu (Menu 3).
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð1/12/87 ð4:29
MENU 3
MISUSE OF MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS MAY LEAD TO UNPREDICTABLE RESULTS
BER CORRELATION..: BRC MODULE DISPLAY...: MDD TSS SERVICES.....: TSS
CADS SERVICES....: CAS
CONCURRENT DIAGS.: CDG
DUMP DISPLAY/DEL.: DDD
MOSS STORE DSPLY.: MSD
OFFLINE DIAGS....: ODG
POWER SERVICES...: POS
TRSS SERVICES....: TRS
ENTER OFF TO LOG OFF
===>
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á
F4:MENU1 F6:RULES
ñ
Figure 3-4. Maintenance Functions Menu
See Figure 3-4.
In this menu, two options are available to run diagnostics:
Notes:
2. ODG to run diagnostics in offline mode when the 3745 is fully available for maintenance.
1. CDG to run diagnostics in concurrent diag-
nostics mode.
Selected diagnostics will run whatever the
Selected diagnostics will run if the adapter is available (ask the customer to disconnect the related resources), and only the sections or routines allowed to run in concurrent mode will be called without interfering the 3745 operation.
status of the adapter.
For channel diagnostics, all the channel interfaces must be disabled.
ODG must be used if conditions for concurrent maintenance mode are not met (no NCP or
CCU running).
For channel diagnostics:
Diagnostics must be used in CDG mode if more than one CA is present and if CCU +
NCP are running. If it is not the case, use
ODG.
Based on the previous notes, Type ODG or CDG after ===> and press SEND.
Continue with “How to Select Diagnostics” on page 3-10.
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-9
Diagnostics
How to Select Diagnostics
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð7/87 ðð:21
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS
GROUP :ADP# :LINE :
1 ALL : : :
2 CCU : A- B:
3 IOCB: 1- 4:
4 CA : 1-16: :
5 TSS : 1-32: ð-31:
:
:
6 TRSS: 1- 6: 1- 2:
7 HTSS: 1- 8: :
8 OLT : 1-16:
9 ESS : 1- 8:
:
:
Xð CBA : 1- 2:
OPT= Y IF MODIFY :
DIAGNOSTICS INITIALIZATION
ð
OPTION REQUIRED :
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: DIAG==> ADP#==> LINE==> OPT==>
===>
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 3-5. How to Select Diagnostics
After entering ODG or CDG in Menu 3, the diagnostic menu is displayed. See Figure 3-5.
Four input fields are available in this menu:
DIAG==> Diagnostic group (1-10), IFT, section, or routine to be run.
Example:
– 2 (full set of CCU IFTs)
– K (section K of IOC diagnostics)
– AC01 (specific routine of CCU diagnostics)
Note
If you select 3 (IOCB) with no adapter installed, a warning will be reported (invalid request).
ADP#==> Adapter number
LINE==> Line number for TSS, TRSS,
HPTSS, or ESS. The line number is obtained from the LID function (in Menu 1) by entering the line address.
OPT==> Y to display the option menu.
If the ALL option is entered, diagnostics will be run on all adapters in the CDF and disconnected from the NCP.
Note
Do not select ALL when a channel adapter and an Ethernet adapter are installed. An error will be reported on the Ethernet adapter.
Type your request in the input fields and press
SEND.
If OPT==>Y is entered, the option menu is displayed. See Figure 3-6 on page 3-11. If not, the diagnostic is started and the diagnostic result is displayed in this frame.
3-10
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Diagnostics
Options Menu
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð6/87 ðð:15
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS
:
R RERUN REQUEST :
A ABORT ROUTINE :
C CANCEL REQUEST :
G GO :
M MODIFY OPTIONS: :
S/LS/AL/ALS/B/DM :
NW/W : START ð9:58:15
C1/CNNN/C
R1/RNNN
BR/NBR
: REQUEST: CCU
: OPTIONS: S
:
NW C1 R1 BR
DIAGNOSTICS INITIALIZATION
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: ==>M R2
===>
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 3-6. How to Enter Options
When the OPT field is set to Y in the diagnostic menu, the options menu is displayed. See
Figure 3-6.
The default options are automatically displayed.
Options: Meaning
S
LS
Stop on first error.
Loop on first error with stop.
AL
ALS
B
DM
NW
W
Automatic loop on error.
Automatic loop on error with new error stop.
Bypass error stop.
Display multiple errors.
No wait before execution of each routine.
Wait before execution of each routine.
C1/CNNN/C Cycle request option.
R1/RNNN Repeat routine option.
BR/NBR BER recording option.
1. Enter or modify the option using the M function followed by the option or options needed
(for example : M C5 DM will cause your request to cycle 5 times and display multiple errors).
Only one option per line of the menu can be selected. If more than one option is entered, only the last one is accepted.
2. Press SEND
Restart the same procedure to enter the other options if needed.
3. Enter G
4. Press SEND.
The diagnostic is started and the diagnostic result is displayed on this frame.
If an error is detected, an error message is displayed. See Figure 3-7 on page 3-12.
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-11
Diagnostics
Error Menu
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A SELECTED PROCESS MOSS-OFFLINE
3745
X71:ð2ð415
X72:ðððð85
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 1ð:17
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: OFFLINE DIAGS
: \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
R RERUN REQUEST : \RH B3ð322ð8 \
FRU REMOVAL ==> POWER OFF
A ABORT ROUTINE : \RAC 8ð5ðAðððð \ ERR BIT FFFFFFð2
ERROR COUNT ðððð1 C CANCEL REQUEST : \ ERC ACð1ð7ð1 \
GO : \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
M MODIFY OPTIONS: :
ð
S/LS/AL/ALS/B/DM :
NW/W : START 1ð:13:46 STOP 1ð:18:ð2
C1/CNNN/C
R1/RNNN
BR/NBR
: REQUEST: AC
: OPTIONS: S
:
NW C1 R1 NER
CCU DIAG RUNNING
ROUTINE ACð1 ADP ðA
===>
: ENTER REQUEST ACCORDING TO THE DIAG MENU
: ==>
\\\ERROR FOUND\\\
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á ñ
Figure 3-7. Error Menu
Note: The RH field contains the reference code.
3-12
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Diagnostics
How to Run the LIC Wrap Test with IFTs
Install the Wrap Plug:
For HPTSS
Install the wrap plug PN 58X9349 for V35 or
PN 58X9354 for X.21 on the tailgate connector.
For ESS
Install the wrap plug PN 70X8670 on the tailgate connector.
For LIC Types 1 and 4
Install the wrap plug PN 65X8927 on the LIC connector. See Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.
For LIC Type 3
Install the wrap cable PN 65X8928 between the two sockets. See Figure 3-9 and
Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.
Notes:
1. To fully test the port (all control leads) install the wrap cable and run the test.
2. Reverse the wrap cable ends (between the DCE and direct attach connector).
3. Repeat the test.
For LIC Types 5 and 6
1. Unplug the line cable at the customer wall frame.
2. Install the appropriate wrap plug (see following list) at the end of the cable or unplug the line cable from both ends.
3. Install the wrap plug PN 11F4815 at the tail gate connector (the line cable must be unplugged from wall frame for line loading reasons.). See Figure 3-11 and
Figure 3-12 on page 3-24.
LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug Country Part
Number
Country
Austria
Belgium
France
Germany
Hong Kong
Israel
Italy
Japan
Luxemburg
Part Number
6162946
6162950
6162955
6162950
65X8070
66X1954
6162957
6124644
6162950
Netherlands
Switzerland
U.K.
U.S.A./Canada
6162948
66X0748
65X8069
66X0807
Start the Diagnostic
For HPTSS
1. Update the CDF to indicates that the lines to be tested have wrap plugs installed.
Refer to
IBM 3745 Service Functions.
2. Using “How to Run Internal Function
Tests” on page 3-9, enter the following: a. Diagnostic group 7 in the DIAG==> area.
b. Adapter number in the
ADP#==> area.
3. Press SEND.
For ESS
1. Using “How to Run Internal Function
Tests” on page 3-9 enter the following: a. Diagnostic group 9 in the DIAG==> area.
b. Adapter number in the
ADP#==> area.
2. Press SEND.
For LIC Types 1, 3, and 4
Using “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9, enter the following:
1. Routine number RC01 in the
DIAG==> area.
2. Adapter number in the
ADP#==> area.
3. Line number in the LINE==> area. You may obtain the line number from the LID function (in Menu 1) by entering the line address.
4. Press SEND.
For LIC Types 5, and 6
Using “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9 enter the following :
1. Routine number RH59 in the
DIAG==> area.
2. Adapter number in the ADP#==> area.
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-13
Diagnostics
3. Line number in the LINE==> area. You may obtain the line number from the LID function
(in Menu 1) by entering the line address.
4. Press SEND.
3-14
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
How to Run the Wrap Test (WTT) for TSS, HPTSS, or 3746-900
Attention: The MOSS must be online to start this procedure.
1. Select Menu 1.
2. Type WTT
3. Press SEND/ENTER.
The Wrap Test Initial Selection screen is displayed:
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCA-A
RESET
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
ð
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION
- SELECT THE COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM (1, 2, 3) ==>
1 = TSS
2 = HPTSS
3 = 3746-9ðð
THEN PRESS ENTR
===>
F1:END F2:MENU2
á ñ
If you select:
1 = TSS: Go to “Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS” on page 3-16
2 = HPTSS: Go to “Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS” on page 3-18
3 = 3746-900: Go to “Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900” on page 3-19
Diagnostics
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-15
Diagnostics
Wrap Test Initial Selection for TSS
Follow the instructions in the following screen.
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCA-A
RESET
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR TSS
- SELECT ONE OPTION (1,2) ==> (A)
1 = AUTOMATIC WRAP TEST ON LIC UNIT
2 = WRAP TEST AT ANY LEVEL
ð
THEN PRESS SEND
===>
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á
(A)
Enter 1 or 2 here to select the wrap test option.
Option 1: Follow the instructions in the following screen.
ñ
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCA-A
RESET
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
AUTOMATIC WRAP TEST ON LIC UNIT
ð
- ENTER A LINE ADDRESS OF THE LIC (ðððð-ð895) ==> (B)
WARNING: ALL LINES OF THE LIC MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED
===>
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á
F4:WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION
(B)
Enter the line address here.
ñ
3-16
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Diagnostics
Option 2: Follow the instructions in the following screen and select the wrap level 4 (tailgate).
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCA-A
RESET
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR TSS
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á
- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (ðððð-ð895) ==> (B)
- ENTER WRAP TYPE (1 to 2) ==>
1 = DATA
2 = CONTROL LEADS
- ENTER WRAP LEVEL (1 to 4) ==> (C)
1 = LOCAL MODEM
2 = NTT CABLE (TSS ONLY)
3 = LIC (DATA WRAP ONLY)
4 = TAILGATE
LINE(S) TO BE TESTED MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED
===>
F4:INITIAL SELECTION
ñ
(B)
Enter the line address here.
(C)
Enter 4 here to select the tailgate level
For LIC Types 1, and 4
Install the wrap plug PN 65X8927 on the LIC connector. See Figure 3-8 on page 3-23 and
Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.
For LIC Type 3
Install the wrap cable PN 65X8928 between the two sockets. See Figure 3-9 on page 3-23 and Figure 3-10 on page 3-23.
Notes:
1. The test must be run a second time with the wrap cable reversed end to end.
2. If you are working on a line adapter with one line at 256 kbps connected to and at least one other line, and if these lines are initialized at the NCP activation, you are not allowed to run the WTT on these lines.
For LIC Types 5, and 6
1. Unplug the line cable at the customer wall frame.
2. Install the appropriate wrap plug (see following list) at the end of the cable or unplug the line cable from both ends.
3. Install the wrap plug PN 11F4815 at the
LIC connector (the line cable must be unplugged from the wall frame when necessary for telephone line loading reason).
See Figure 3-11 on page 3-24 and
Figure 3-12 on page 3-24.
LIC Types 5 and 6 Wrap Plug Country Part
Number
Country
Austria
Part Number
6162946
Belgium
France
Germany
6162950
6162955
6162950
Hong Kong
Israel
Italy
Japan
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Switzerland
U.K.
U.S.A./Canada
65X8070
66X1954
6162957
6124644
6162950
6162948
66X0748
65X8069
66X0807
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-17
Diagnostics
Wrap Test Initial Selection for HPTSS
Follow the instructions in the following screen.
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCA-A
RESET
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR HPTSS
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2
á
- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (1ð24-1ð39) ==> (B)
- ENTER WRAP TYPE (1 to 2) ==>
1 = DATA
2 = CONTROL LEADS
- ENTER WRAP LEVEL (1 to 4) ==> (C)
1 = LOCAL MODEM (DATA WRAP ONLY) 4 = TAILGATE
2 = REMOTE MODEM (DATA WRAP ONLY)
3 = INTERNAL
LINE(S) TO BE TESTED MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED
===>
F4:INITIAL SELECTION
ñ
(B)
Enter the line address here.
(C)
Enter 4 here to select the tailgate level.
For HPTSS
Install the wrap plug PN 58X9349 for V.35 or PN 58X9354 for X.21 on the tailgate connector.
3-18
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Diagnostics
Wrap Test Initial Selection for 3746-900
Follow the instructions in the following screen.
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCA-A
RESET
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
3745-xxx
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- mm/dd/yy hh:mm
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: WRAP TEST
WRAP TEST INITIAL SELECTION FOR 3746-9ðð
ð
F1:END F2:MENU2
á
- ENTER LINE ADDRESS (2112-3135) ==> (A)
- ENTER WRAP TYPE (1 to 2) ==> (B)
1 = DATA
2 = CONTROL LEADS
CCU (A, B) ==>
- ENTER WRAP LEVEL (1 to 5) ==> (C)
1 = LOCAL MODEM 4 = NTT CABLE
2 = REMOTE MODEM (DATA WRAP ONLY) 5 = WRAP PLUG
3 = INTERNAL
LINE(S) TO BE TESTED MUST BE DISABLED/DEACTIVATED
===>
F4:INITIAL SELECTION
ñ
(A)
Enter the line address here.
(B)
Select the required option.
Notes:
1. The control leads option is not valid when requesting the local and remote modem wrap level on LIC12.
2. On LIC16 the control leads option is not available.
(C)
Enter the desired wrap option
(see “Available Wrap Options” on page 3-20).
The following screens prompt you:
– To enter the numbers of wraps.
– To install (if necessary) the wrap plug according to the entity tested (see “Available Wrap Plugs” on page 3-22).
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-19
Diagnostics
Available Wrap Options
Wrap Option Available on LIC11
3745
3746-900
LIC11
LCB
ARC
(1)
Local
Modem
(2) (3)
Line
Remote
Modem
(4)
DTE
(1) Internal level wrap
(2) NTT cable wrap
(3) Local modem level wrap
(4) Remote modem level wrap
3745
3746-900
LIC11
LCB
ARC
W
(5)
(5) ARC Wrap plug for testing the ARC and its cable. Select the appropriate ARC wrap plug according to the type of ARC (see Table 3-1 on page 3-22).
ARC Assembly A
ARC Assembly B
Note: With ARC assembly B (with a detachable cable) an additional wrap plug allows testing of the ARC only (see Table 3-3 on page 3-22).
3-20
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Wrap Option Available on LIC12
3745 3746-900
LIC12
(1)
Local
DSU/CSU
NCTE
(2)
Line
Remote
DSU/CSU
NCTE
(3)
DTE
(1) Internal level Wrap
(2) Local DSU/CSU or NCTE wrap
(3) Remote DSU/CSU or NCTE wrap
3745 3746-900
LIC12 W
(4)
Local
DSU/CSU
NCTE
Line
Remote
DSU/CSU
NCTE
DTE
(4) LIC12 wrap plug
Wrap Option Available on LIC16
3745 3746-900
LIC16 W
(1)
(2)
(1) LIC16 internal level wrap
(2) LIC16 wrap plug
Diagnostics
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-21
Diagnostics
Available Wrap Plugs
Table 3-1. Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly
A and ARC Assembly B (with Cable)
ARC Type Wrap Plug
PN
ARC V.24 DTE
ARC V.24 DCE
ARC V.35 DTE
61F4523
61F4522
61F4527
ARC V.35 DCE
ARC/3745 V.24 DTE
ARC/3745 V.24 DCE
ARC/3745 V.35 DTE
ARC/3745 V.35 DCE
61F4526
61F4525
61F4525
61F4578
61F4528
Table 3-2. Wrap Plugs for LIC Testing
LIC Type Wrap Plug
PN
LIC11 58G9425
LIC12 for X.21
LIC12 for V.35
LIC16
58X9354
58X9349
57G8097
Table 3-3. Wrap Plugs for Testing ARC Assembly
B (without Cable)
ARC Wrap Plug
PN
ARC V.24
ARC V.35 non 3745
ARC V.35 3745
ARC X.21
58G5660
58G5661
58G5659
58G5662
3-22
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Diagnostics
Figure 3-8. LICs Type 1 and 4 (Wrap Plug PN
65X8927)
Figure 3-9. LIC Type 3 (Wrap Cable PN 65X8928)
Figure 3-10. LIC Types 1, 3, and 4
Note: On LIC4B, only the port 0 is used.
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-23
Diagnostics
Figure 3-11. LICs Type 5 and 6 (Wrap Plug PN 11F4815)
Port 0
W
X
Y
Lever
Switch
Z
Port 1
TYPE Knob Color
LIC5 Black
Figure 3-12. LIC Types 5 and 6
Port 0
W
X
Y
TYPE Knob Color
LIC6 Black
3-24
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Diagnostics
How to Run the Channel Wrap Test
Note: Do not start the IFT L001 with the wrap plug already installed. Install or remove the wrap plug when directed by the MOSS console.
1. Ask the customer to disable the channel
related to the channel adapter to be tested with the Channel Wrap Test.
2. Select option ODG or CDG from the maintenance function menu.
3. Enter the following:
Routine number LO01 in the
DIAG==> area.
Channel adapter number in the ADP#==> area.
4. Press SEND.
5. Two models of wrap plugs can be used for this test:
Bus PN 03F4301 and Tag PN 03F4300 or
Bus PN 26F1755 and Tag PN 26F1754
You will be asked for the wrap tools P/N you are using.
6. Messages on the screen will prompt you for the required actions.
7. Refer to Figure 4-27, Figure 4-28 and to
Table 4-8 on page 4-25 to remove the interface cables.
8. When you requested by the diagnostic, remove the interface cables and install the wrap plugs.
In order to allow the customer to use the channel during test time, you have to connect the cables together or to the terminators.
9. Ensure that the 'Select Out Bypass' switch is in the 'NORMAL' position.
Depending the wrap plugs used, follow one of these two actions:
If using the channel wrap plugs:
PN 03F4300 (for Tag) and PN 03F4301 (for Bus)
Install them for interface A in the IN ROW
(dark grey) and the CA terminators:
PN 2282676 (for Tag) and PN 2282675 (for Bus)
In the OUT ROW (light grey).
If using the channel wrap plugs :
PN 26F1754 (for Tag) and PN 26F1755 (for Bus)
Two installations must be done, one after the other (when requested by messages on the screen):
Step 1 - Install the wrap plugs for interface A in the IN ROW (dark grey), and the CA terminators:
PN 2282676 (for Tag) and PN 2282675 (for Bus)
In the OUT ROW (light grey).
Step 2 - Install the wrap plugs in the
OUT ROW (light grey) and leave the IN ROW (dark grey) free
(CA terminators have not to be used).
10. You will be asked to install the wrap plugs on the interface connectors B if the TPS feature is installed on this channel. In this case repeat the action as for interface A.
Chapter 3. How to Run 3745 Diagnostics
3-25
Diagnostics
3-26
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
FRU Exchange
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
This chapter is to be used to exchange a defined FRU. Use all section from the begining to the end, to determine:
1. Where the FRU is physically located
2. How to properly exchange FRUs
3. How to test the machine
4. What else must be done before returning the machine to the customer.
Exchange Precautions
1. Most of the 3745 FRUs can be exchanged in concurrent maintenance. Thus, it is very important that these procedures be followed when replacing any FRU in the machine.
2. The control panel has voltage present even with the machine Powered OFF.
3. Ensure that the 3745 is powered OFF before replacing any FRUs, except for hot-pluggable FRUs
(LIC,MUX) and the separated power-controlled FRUs (FDD and HDD).
4. Before starting the FRU exchange, ensure that the involved area has been disabled by the customer.
5. The 3745 Communication Controller contains cards that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Use the ESD kit and store all cards in their protective packaging when you are not actually exchanging them.
6. Procedures for exchanging FRUs are listed on the next pages. Use the list in alphabetical order.
7. After the 3745 FRU exchange, go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Attention
Do not disassemble or attempt to remove FRUs from the 3745 until you have read the Safety Infor-
mation manual, GA33-0400.
Very important
Ensure that the required area has been disabled before any FRU exchange if not, go to start page and follow the appropriate procedure.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
4-1
FRU Exchange
List of 3745 FRUs
MSC/MSC2
PCC
PPB
PS1
PS2
PUC
SCTL
SMUXA/B
STO4
STO8
TERMC
TERMD
TERMI
TERMR
TIC2
TRM
DFA
DMUX
EAC
EPO Box
ESS Tailgate
Fan1
Fan2
FDD
FESH
HDD
LIC
MAC
MCC
MLA
MPC/MPC2
Basic BOARD
LIC BOARD type 1 and 3
LIC BOARD type 2
MOSS BOARD
BPC
Battery
CADR
CAL6
CAL7
Channel Tailgate
Control Panel
CSC
CSP
DCREG
Use the “Basic Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-77.
Use the “LIC Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-84.
Use the “LIC Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-88.
Use the “MOSS Board Exchange Procedure” on page 4-92.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Battery Exchange Procedure” on page 4-48.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Channel Tailgate Exchange Procedure” on page 4-96.
Use the “Control Panel Exchange Procedure” on page 4-46.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “DCREG Exchange Procedure” on page 4-38.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “DMUX Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “EPO Exchange Procedure” on page 4-73.
Use the “ESS Tailgate Exchange Procedure” on page 4-64.
Use the “Fan 1 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-50.
Use the “Fan 2 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-51.
Use the “FDD Exchange Procedure” on page 4-52.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “HDD Exchange Procedure” on page 4-56.
Use the “LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
Use the “PS1 Exchange Procedure” on page 4-67.
Use the “PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure” on page 4-69.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure” on page 4-41.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure” on page 4-61.
Use the “TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure” on page 4-62.
Use the “TERMD/TERMI Exchange Procedure” on page 4-62.
Use the “TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure” on page 4-61.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
Use the “Card Exchange Procedure” on page 4-34.
4-2
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
FRU Physical Locations
3745 Frame
Locat i on: 01
FRU Exchange
a b
Figure 4-1. 3745 Frame (Front)
A
B
C
D
E
MOSS board (01A-X0 and 01A-Y0)
FDD
Panel
HDD
Fan2 (for logic)
Basic board test points
MOSS board test points
H
K
F
G
PS1
Basic board (01G-A1)
Primary power box + PS2
Fan1 (for powers)
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-3
FRU Exchange
Locat i on: 01
R
Cons ol e
M
L
N
W
Grounding
Area
Q
T R S S
H P T S S
E S S
S
E P O
P
CA' S
Rear
Customer Access
B1
B2
A1
A2
Figure 4-2. 3745 Frame (Back)
A1
A2
LIC board type 2
LIC board type 2 or
LIC board type 1
Connectors
Connectors
LIC board type 1
LIC board type 1 or
LIC board type 3
(Lines 80-95)
(Lines 64-79)
(Lines 128-159)
(Lines 32-63)
(Lines 00-31)
(Lines 00-15)
N
P
Q
R
S
W
Rear board access (01G-A1)
CA tailgate
TRSS, HPTSS & ESS tailgate
TRSS (Lines 1088 - 1091)
HPTSS (Lines 1028 - 1031)
ESS (Lines 1060 - 1063)
Console operator tailgate
See Figure 4-29 on page 4-26 and
Figure 4-30 on page 4-26 for details.
EPO
Grounding area
4-4
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Basic Board, Cards, Connectors, and Crossovers
┌─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
│ A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X │
├───────┬────┬────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ │ │ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
│
│
│
│
│ CCU │
│ │
│ CA
│
│
│
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X X
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
│ 5 │ . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . .
│ 6 │ . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . .
│
│
│
│
│ 7 │ . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
│ 8 │ X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
│ │ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
│
│
│
│ TPS │ 5 │ . . . . X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
│ │ 7 │ X X X . . . . . . . . . . .
│ │ │
│ TRSS │ 1 │
. . . . . . . . . . .
X X X . . . . . . . .
│
│
│
│
│ 2 │
│ │
│ TSS │ 3 │
│ │ 4 │
│ 9 │
│ 1ð │
X X X . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . X .
. . . . X . . .
. . . X . . . .
. . X . . . .
│
│
│
│ 11 │
│ 12 │
│
│ HPTSS │
│
3 │
. X
X
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . X X
X X │ /ESS │ 4 │
│ │ │
├───────┴────┴────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
│ A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X │
│
│
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
Figure 4-3. Card Locations
Table 4-1. TIC Position and Ring Address
TRM TIC Position Ring Address
TRM-1 TIC2-1 1088
TRM-2
TIC2-2
TIC2-3
TIC2-4
1089
1090
1091
FRU Exchange
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-5
FRU Exchange
The following table and figures are configuration examples.
Table 4-2. Basic Board Configurations
Model TPS HPTSS/ESS
130 no yes
130
150
160 yes no no yes yes yes
17x
17x
17x
17x no no yes yes no yes no yes
Figure Available
Figure 4-6 on page 4-8
Figure 4-7 on page 4-9
Figure 4-8 on page 4-10
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5 on page 4-7
Figure 4-4. 3745 Model 17X Basic Board (without TPS, HPTSS, or ESS)
.1/
Terminators TERMC and TERMR are present on 3745 model 17A only.
Note 1: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).
Note 2: CAL may be CAL6 (for CADS feature) or CAL7 (for BCCA feature).
4-6
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
FRU Exchange
Figure 4-5. 3745 Model 17X (Basic Board with TPS and HPTSS or ESS)
.1/
Terminators TERMC and TERMR are present on the 3745 Model 17A only.
Note 1: When TPS-5 is installed a Bypass card 1 (BPC1) is needed in location E (if CADR-7 is present).
Note 2: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).
Note 3: CAL may be CAL6 (for the CADS feature) or CAL7 (for the BCCA feature).
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-7
FRU Exchange
Figure 4-6. 3745 Model 130 (Basic Board with TPS)
Note 1: When TPS-5 is installed, a Bypass card 1 (BPC1) is needed in location E (if CADR-7 is present).
Note 2: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).
Note 3: CAL may be CAL6 (for the CADS feature) or CAL7 (for the BCCA feature).
4-8
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Locati on 01G-A1
FRU Exchange
Figure 4-7. 3745 Model 150 (Basic Board)
Note: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-9
FRU Exchange
Locati on 01G-A1
Figure 4-8. 3745 Model 160 (Basic Board)
Note: STO may be STO4 (4MB) or STO8 (8MB).
4-10
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors
XO
Location: 01A
A
B
YO
C
D E
1
A B C D E F G H
2
P
C
C
M
L
A
M
P
C
D
F
A
M
C
C
3
1
2
3
4
5
M
S
C
4
5
A B C D
E
Figure 4-9. 3745 Models 130, 150, 160, and 170 (MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors)
FRU Exchange
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-11
FRU Exchange
XO
Location: 01A
A B
YO
C
D
E
1
A B C D E F G H
2
P
C
C
M
L
A
M
P
C
D
F
A
M
A
C
3
1
2
3
4
M
S
C
4
5
A
B
C
D E
Figure 4-10. 3745 Model 17A (MOSS Board, Cards, and Connectors)
5
4-12
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
LIC Board Type 1
Locat i on: 01M- A1. 01M- A2. 01L- A2
GND
Addr es s i ng
A B C D
W
E F G H J K
Power
Connect
Y
Z
FRU Exchange
GND
Customer Access Area
Figure 4-11. 3745 LIC Unit Type 1 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and 4 in Models 150, 160, and 170)
LIC Board Type 2
Locat i on: 01L-A1. 01L- A2
GND
Addr es s i ng
A B C D
W
E F G H J K
Power
Connect
Y
Z
GND
Customer Access Area
Figure 4-12. 3745 LIC Unit Type 2 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 5 and 6 in Models 150 and 170)
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-13
FRU Exchange
LIC Board Type 3
Locat i on: 01M- A2
Figure 4-13. 3745 LIC Unit Type 3 Board and Connectors (for LIC Types 1,3, and 4 in Model 150)
DMUX and SMUX Packaging
Table 4-3. DMUX Packaging
DMUX
Id
DMUX
Location
1 or 2
3 or 4
9 or 10
01M-A2B
01M-A1B
01L-A2B
Table 4-4. SMUX Packaging
SMUX
Type
SMUX-A
SMUX
Id
5
SMUX-B 7
SMUX
Location
01L-A2B
01L-A1B
4-14
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
LIC Board Type 1 Packaging for LICs Type 1 to 4
A
B
C D E F G H J K
U
X
D
M
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
LIC Locations in Board 01M-A2
FRU Exchange
00 04
08
12 16 20 24 28
01 05 09 13 17 21
25
29
U
X
D
M
02 06
10
14 18 22 26 30
Line Locations in Board 01M-A2
(for LICs 1 and 4)
03
07
11 15 19 23 27 31
D
M
U
X
00 04 08 12 16 20 24 28
Line Locations in Board 01M-A2
(for LIC 3)
Figure 4-14. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-15
FRU Exchange
A
B
C D E F G H J K
U
X
D
M
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LIC Locations in Board 01M-A1
32 36 40
44 48
52 56 60
33
37 41 45 49 53 57 61
U
X
D
M
34
38 42 46 50 54 58 62
Line Locations in Board 01M-A1
(for LICs 1 and 4)
35 39 43 47 51 55 59 63
D
M
U
X
32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60
Line Locations in Board 01M-A1
(for LIC 3)
Figure 4-15. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A1 Packaging
4-16
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
A
B
C D E F G H J K
U
X
D
M 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
LIC Locations in Board 01L-A2
128
132 136 140
144 148 152 156
129 133 137 141 145 149 153
157
U
X
D
M
130
134 138 142 146 150 154 158
Line Locations in Board 01L-A2
(for LICs 1 and 4)
131 135 139 143
147 151
155 159
D
M
U
X
128 132 136 140 144
148
152 156
Line Locations in Board 01L-A2
(for LIC 3)
Figure 4-16. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging
FRU Exchange
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-17
FRU Exchange
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 5
A
B
C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
LIC Locations in Board 01L-A2
A
B C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
64 66 68 70 72
74
76
78
65 67 69 71 73
75
77 79
Line Locations in Board 01L-A2
Figure 4-17. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 5)
A
B
C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
LIC Locations in Board 01L-A1
A
B C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
80 82 84 86 88 90 92
94
81 83 85 87 89
91
93 95
Line Locations in Board 01L-A1
Figure 4-18. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC type 5)
4-18
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (Low Speed)
A
B C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
33
34
35 36 37 38 39 40
LIC Locations in Board 01L-A2
FRU Exchange
A
B
C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78
Line Locations in Board 01L-A2
Figure 4-19. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)
A
B
C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
LIC Locations in Board 01L-A1
A
B C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
80 82 84 86 88 90 92
94
Line Locations in Board 01L-A1
Figure 4-20. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LICs Type 6 Low Speed)
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-19
FRU Exchange
LIC Board Type 2 Packaging for LIC Type 6 (High Speed)
A
B C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
33
34
35 36 37 38 39 40
LIC Locations in Board 01L-A2
A
B
C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78
Line Locations in Board 01L-A2
Figure 4-21. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A2 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed)
A
B
C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
LIC Locations in Board 01L-A1
A
B C D E F G H J K
S
M
U
X
A
80 82 84 86 88 90 92
94
Line Locations in Board 01L-A1
Figure 4-22. 3745 LIC Board 01L-A1 Packaging (LIC Type 6 High Speed)
4-20
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
LIC Board Type 3 Packaging for LIC Types 1 to 4
A
B
C D E F G H J K
U
X
D
M
01 02 03 04
LIC Locations in Board 01M-A2
FRU Exchange
00 04
08
12
01 05 09 13
U
X
D
M
02 06
10
14
03
07
11 15
Line Locations in Board 01M-A2
(for LICs 1 and 4)
D
M
U
X
00 04 08 12
Line Locations in Board 01M-A2
(for LIC 3)
Figure 4-23. 3745 LIC Board 01M-A2 Packaging
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-21
FRU Exchange
Ethernet Lines Tailgate
Locati on: 01Q
C0 D 0
J1 J1
J 2 J 2
E S S 3
E S S 4
Figure 4-24. 3745 Ethernet Lines Tailgate
Table 4-5. 3745 Ethernet Line Locations
Line Location ELA
1060 01Q-C0J1 3
1061
1062
1063
01Q-C0J2
01Q-D0J1
01Q-D0J2
3
4
4
Pi n
15
Pi n
8
Pi n
9
Pi n
1
4-22
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
High Speed Lines Tailgate
Locati on: 01Q
C0 D 0
J1 J 2 J1 J 2
Pi n 1
Pi n 18
P i n 3 4
FRU Exchange
Figure 4-25. 3745 High-Speed Lines Tailgate
Table 4-6. 3745 High-Speed Line Locations
Line Location LA
1028 01Q-C0J2 3
1029
1030
1031
01Q-C0J1
01Q-D0J2
01Q-D0J1
3
4
4
Pi n 17
P i n 5 0
P i n 3 3
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-23
FRU Exchange
Token-Ring Tailgate
Locat i on: 01Q- A0
L ocat i on: 01Q- B0
Figure 4-26. 3745 Token-Ring Tailgate
Table 4-7. 3745 Token-ring Line Locations
Line Location TRA
1088 01Q-A0J1 1
1089
1090
1091
01Q-A0J2
01Q-B0J1
01Q-B0J2
1
2
2
4-24
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Channel Tailgate
Locat i on: 01P
Locati on: 01G
FRU Exchange
Figure 4-27. 3745 Channel Tailgate
Tag
Sel ect out
B y pas s S wi t ch
B y p a s s
B u s
Figure 4-28. 3745 Channel Tailgate Details. For more details see YZ052 Sheet 2.
Nor mal
Table 4-8. Channel Interface. Channel Interface A and Channel Interface B (TPS) Distribution Chart.
Basic Board
Rear Position
Tailgate CA (Interface A or Interface B)
01G-H
01G-F
01G-D
01G-B
01P-1
01P-2
01P-3
01P-4
CA5-A
CA6-A or CA5-B
CA7-A
CA8-A or CA7-B
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-25
FRU Exchange
Console Operator Tailgate For 3745 Models 1X0
Locat i on: 01R - A0
J1 J 2 J 3
Figure 4-29. 3745 Models 1X0 Console Operator Tailgate
Console Operator Tailgate for 3745 Model 17A
Locat i on: 01R - A0
P I N S I D E
CONS OL E
PI N 1
Figure 4-30. 3745 Models 17A Console Operator Tailgate
EPO Tailgate
4-26
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Locat i on: 01S
Figure 4-31. 3745 EPO
FRU Exchange
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-27
FRU Exchange
3745 Control Panel
Locati on 01C
Contr ol Keyboar d
Di s pl ay
A1
L E D
(Power on onl y)
B1
R E D
B L ACK
1 2 4
+ -
Connector 01C-D1J1
B1
J1
C1
E P O
C1
S wi t ch OF F
D1
B a t t e r y
Front Vi ew
A1
D1
B a t t e r y
Rear View
Figure 4-32. 3745 Control Panel
1 3
J1
L E D
Detai l B 01C-B1J1
For Model s
130 t o 170
E P O
4
5
6
1
2
3
Wi r i ng Si de
1
2
3
For Model
17A
D C B A
Detail C 01C-C1SW1
4-28
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Flexible Diskette Drive
Locat i on: 01B-A1
FRU Exchange
Figure 4-33. 3745 Flexible Diskette Drive
Hard Disk Drive
Locati on: 01D-A1
1
Figure 4-34. 3745 Hard Disk Drive
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-29
FRU Exchange
Primary Power Box
Locat i on: 01H
Figure 4-35. 3745 Primary Power Box Components
4-30
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Power Supply 1
Locat i on: 01F
J 2
J 4
J 3
J1
T B 1
T B 3
5V
T B 2
T B 4
T 0
01H-A1J1
Fr ont vi ew
Figure 4-36. 3745 Power Supply 1 Components
3745 Power Supply Cross Reference
Table 4-9. 3745 Power Supply Cross Reference
Power Supply Location Area Supplied
PS1 01F
PS2 01H
Basic board
MOSS board
FDD and HDD
LIC board 01M-A1
LIC board 01M-A2
LIC board 01L-A1
LIC board 01L-A2
Fans
PCC
Panel
J 5
J 6
J 7
J 8
5V
T B 5
T B 6
Rear vi ew
FRU Exchange
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-31
FRU Exchange
Power Supply 2
Locat i on: 01H
K 2
C2
C3
J 6
R1
CR1
C R 2
C1
T 1
C V T
T B 1
F 1
CP3
J 3
SW1
Figure 4-37. 3745 Power Supply 2 Components
4-32
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Fan 1
Figure 4-38. 3745 Fan 1 Components
Fan 2
FRU Exchange
Figure 4-39. 3745 Fan 2 Components
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-33
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
3745 FRU Exchange Procedures
Card Exchange Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-40.
Figure 4-40. CB1 Location.
5. Check for the physical location.
a. For the physical board location, refer to
Figure 4-1 on page 4-3 b. For the physical card location:
On the Basic board refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6, Figure 4-5 on page 4-7, or Figure 4-6 on page 4-8 or
Figure 4-7 on page 4-9.
On the MOSS board, refer to
Figure 4-9 on page 4-11.
6. Remove the following covers, (refer to
Figure 4-41 on page 4-35): Cover
.1/
for the basic board (loosen the 2 screws
.2/
and lift up the cover), and covers
.3/
for the MOSS board (remove the 7 screws
.4/
).
7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
8. If the card to be replaced is a CADR, go to
Step 24 on page 4-36.
9. If the card to be replaced is an MLA, go to
Step 33 on page 4-37.
10. Remove the crossover connectors (if installed) from the card exchanged.
11. Remove the line cable(s), if any (cards FESH,
TIC2, or EAC).
12. If the card to be exchanged is on the MOSS board, remove the shipping springs that secure the extractor levers by sqeezing them together. Refer to Figure 4-42 on page 4-35.
13. If the card to be exchanged is a CAL or a
STO, ensure that the new card is identical with the previous one (for STO there are two types of cards: STO4 for 4MB and STO8 for
8MB. For CAL there are two types of cards:
CAL6 for CADS feature and CAL7 for BCCA feature).
14. Exchange the card, re-install the crossover connectors (if installed) and re-install the ship-
ping springs (if you have exchanged a card on the MOSS board).
15. Replace the board covers.
16. Switch CB1 ON.
17. Close the front door.
18. If the replaced card is the PCC, go to step 21.
19. Power the 3745 ON.
20. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
PCC Replacement
21. From Step 18: Power the 3745 ON. Ignore the BERs that are logged, (they are due to the
time-of-day clock not being set).
22. Set the time-of-day clock. Refer to the IBM
3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069.
23. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
4-34
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Figure 4-41. Covers
Front Vi ew
S p r i n g
Figure 4-42. Shipping Springs
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-35
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
CADR Exchange
24. From step 8 on page 4-34: At the Channel
Tailgate set the Select Out Bypass switch to
bypass (refer to Figure 4-27 on page 4-25, to
Figure 4-43, and to Figure 4-44) according to the CADR to be replaced (refer to
Table 4-10).
25. Remove the crossover connectors from the card to be exchanged.
26. Exchange the card and re-install the crossover connectors.
27. Replace the board cover.
28. Set the Select Out Bypass switch to normal
29. Switch CB1 ON.
30. Close the front door.
31. Power the 3745 ON.
32. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Table 4-10. Select Out Switches According to
CADR Cards
Select Out Switch CADR Card
01P-4
01P-3
01P-2
01P-1
01G-A1B
01G-A1D
01G-A1F
01G-A1H
Rear
Channel
Tail Gate
Figure 4-43. Channel Tailgate Location
Sel ect out
B y pas s S wi t ch
B y p a s s
Tag
B u s
Figure 4-44. Select Out Switch
Nor mal
4-36
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
MLA Exchange.
33. From step 9 on page 4-34: Obtain the service processor maintenance password from the customer in order to logon at the service processor console.
34. If the logon is already done, go to Step 36. If it is not done, proceed with Step 35.
35. To log on: a. In the MOSS-E View window, click on
Program (in the action bar).
b. Click on Log on MOSS-E.
c. Enter the password.
36. In the MOSS-E View window, locate the serial number of the machine that contains the MLA card.
37. Click on the associated icon. The serial number is displayed on the bottom line of the
MOSS-E View window.
38. In the MOSS-E View window double-click on
Service Processor icon.
39. In the Service Processor Menu window, click on the Configuration Management option.
40. Double-click on the Manage 3745/3746-9x0
Installation option.
41. In the Controller Installation window select the machine by clicking on the 3745 serial number for which your are called and click on
Repair.
42. On the Repairs Action for 3745 window select the Change 3745 MOSS LAN Adapter option and click on OK.
43. The Controller Repair Message window is displayed. Perform the following steps before clicking on OK.
a. Locate the card (refer to Figure 4-10 on page 4-12).
b. Disconnect the cable attached to the card.
c. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
d. Loosen the two thumbscrews and remove the card.
e. Install the new card and tighten the two thumbscrews.
f. Reconnect the cable to the card.
g. Replace the board cover(s).
h. Switch CB1 ON.
i. Close the front door.
j. Power ON the 3745.
Note: This action will also run MOSS diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A successful completion will result in a code
F0E, F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See
“3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
44. On the Controller Repair Message window of the MOSS-E, click on OK.
45. On the Controller Installation window, click on Save.
46. A new window prompts you to install the installation diskette in the service processor.
47. Click on OK when it is done, a Controller
Saving Message is displayed.
48. Remove the diskette, and click on OK.
49. The Controller Installation window is again displayed, click on Cancel.
50. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-37
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
DCREG Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power OFF on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-45.
5. Locate the basic board. Refer to Figure 4-45.
6. Remove the basic board cover (loosen the two screws then lift up the cover).
7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
8. At the channel tailgate set all the Select Out
Bypass switches to bypass (refer to
Figure 4-43 and to Figure 4-44 on page 4-36).
9. Remove all the cards.
10. Release the retainer at the bottom of the board (one screw must be loosened).
11. Remove the DCREG card in position E-F or
G-H of row Z. Refer to Figure 4-5 on page 4-7, Figure 4-6 on page 4-8, or
Figure 4-7 on page 4-9.
Figure 4-45. Basic Board and CB1 Locations
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new DCREG card.
2. Re-install the retainer.
3. Re-install the cards.
4. Replace the basic board cover.
5. Set all the Select Out Bypass switches to
normal.
6. Switch CB1 ON.
7. Close the front door.
8. Press Power On on the control panel.
9. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU.
10. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
4-38
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
DMUX Exchange Procedure
Since the DMUX is hot-pluggable, there is no need to power OFF.
Removal Procedure
1. Open the rear door.
2. For the board location refer to Figure 4-46.
3. Remove the related DMUX cover (refer to
Figure 4-47). Two screws must be removed
.1/
. (Two types of DMUX cover exist according to the board location.)
4. For the DMUX location, refer to Figure 4-48 on page 4-40. The thumb screw color of the
DMUX is white.
5. Refer to Figure 4-49 on page 4-40. Note the
DMUX cables locations then remove them.
6. Unfasten the thumb screw holding the DMUX cassette to the board.
7. Remove the DMUX cassette.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Figure 4-46. Location of the LIC Boards
Figure 4-47. DMUX Cover
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-39
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
DMUX
A B
W
C D E F G H J K
Cable 2
W
X
Y
Z
Figure 4-48. DMUX Location
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new DMUX cassette.
2. Fasten the thumb screw holding the DMUX cassette to the board. Finger strengh is enough. Do not use tools.
3. Replace the DMUX cables in their proper positions.
Y
Z
Cable 1
Figure 4-49. DMUX
4. Re-install the DMUX cover with the two screws. Refer to Figure 4-47 on page 4-39.
5. Close the rear door.
6. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Note
If exchanging the DMUX does not solve the problem, you should test the voltage levels at the DMUX
test points. If voltage levels are not correct, suspect the Power Supply 1.
For test point pin locations, see page YZ738.
For voltage tolerances, see IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance Reference, SY33-2066.
4-40
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
SMUXA/B Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
Since the SMUX is hot-pluggable, there is no need to power OFF.
1. Open the rear door.
2. For the board location, refer to Figure 4-50.
3. Remove one of the SMUX covers. Refer to
Figure 4-51 (two screws must be removed
.1/
).
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Figure 4-50. Location of the LIC Boards Type 2
Figure 4-51. SMUX Cover
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-41
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
4. For the SMUX location, refer to Figure 4-52.
Refer to Figure 4-53 and do the following:
5. Remove the serial link cable (if installed) from the SMUX (this cable is absent on SMUXB when SMUXA and the flat cable
.2/
are present).
6. Remove the flat cable
.2/
(if installed) which connects the two SMUXs, (if two LIC boards type 2 are present in the machine). This cable may be absent in spite of the presence of the two boards.
7. Unfasten the thumb screw holding the SMUX cassette to the board.
8. Remove the SMUX cassette.
A B C D
E F G H J K
Figure 4-53. SMUX Link and Cable
Figure 4-52. SMUX Location
4-42
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
5. Re-install the SMUX cover with the 2 screws.
Refer to Figure 4-51 on page 4-41.
1. Install the new SMUX cassette.
6. Close the rear door.
2. Fasten the thumb screw holding the SMUX cassette to the board. Finger strength is enough. Do not use tools.
3. Replace the SMUX cables.
7. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic you ran before you exchanged the
FRU, then go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
3
4. Set the XMIT level according to the table below. Refer to Figure 4-53 on page 4-42 for the sliding switches.
┌────────────────────┬──────────┬───────────────────────────┐
│
Country
|XMIT Level|Sliding Switches |
│ (leased lines) |(in dBm) | |
├────────────────────┼──────────┼───────────────────────────┤
│
│
│
│
│ 1 2 3 4 │
├──────┬──────┬──────┬──────┤
│Canada, Greece,
│Ireland, U.S.A.,
│and other
│AP/APG countries
│
│
│
│
│
ð │
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ │ - 1 │ ON │ │ │ │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ │ - 2 │ │ ON │ │ │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ │ - 3 │ ON │ ON │ │ │
│
│
│
│
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ │ - 4 │ │ │ ON │ │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ │ - 5 │ ON │ │ ON │ │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│Chile, and other │ - 6 │ │ ON │ ON │ │
│E.M.E.A.
│countries
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ │ - 7 │ ON │ ON │ ON │ │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ │ - 8 │ │ │ │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│Hong-Kong │ - 9 │ ON │ │ │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│Denmark, Finland │ -1ð │ │ ON │ │ ON │
│Iceland, Italy,
│Sweden
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ │ -11 │ ON │ ON │ │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ │ -12 │ │ │ ON │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│Australia, U.K.
│ -13 │ ON │ │ ON │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│ │ -14 │ │ ON │ ON │ ON │
├────────────────────┼──────────┼──────┼──────┼──────┼──────┤
│France, Japan │ -15 │ ON │ ON │ ON │ ON │
└────────────────────┴──────────┴──────┴──────┴──────┴──────┘
Note
Push
│
ON
────5┌──┐
────5┌──┐
┌────┴──┴┐
OFF
│
Push
┌──┐%────
┌┴──┴────┐
│ │
If exchanging the SMUX does not solve the problem, you should test the voltage levels at the SMUX
test points. If the voltage levels are not correct, suspect the Power Supply 1.
For test point pin location, see page YZ739.
For voltage tolerances, see IBM 3745 Hardware Maintenance Reference, SY33-2066.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-43
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
LIC Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure:
Since the LIC is hotpluggable, there is no need to power OFF.
1. For physical locations, refer to Figure 4-54,
Figure 4-56, and to Figure 4-57 on page 4-45.
2. Open the rear door.
3. Remove the line cables from the
PTT/Common carrier wall socket if you deal with LIC 5 or 6.
4. Remove the line cables from the LIC. Note their positions.
5. If you are working with LIC 5 or 6, check if the
LIC configuration is available.If it is not, use the PKD (Refer to the Connection and Integration Guide, SA33-0141).
6. Unfasten the thumb screw holding the LIC cassette to the board.
7. Remove the LIC cassette.
Line
Speed Switch
W
X
Y
Figure 4-54. Location of the LIC Boards
4-44
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
BPS
19200
9600
(V24)
BPS
56000
(V35)
Figure 4-55. LIC 6
Installation Procedure
1. If you are working with a LIC type 6 (refer to
Figure 4-55), note the position of the line speed switch, then set the line speed switch of the new LIC accordingly.
2. Install the new LIC cassette.
3. Fasten the thumb screw holding the LIC cassette to the board. Finger strength is enough.
Do not use tools.
4. If a LIC 5 or 6 has been installed, configuration must be done with the PKD (refer to the
Connection and Integration Guide,
SA33-0141).
5. Replace the line cables in their proper positions on the LIC.
6. Reconnect the line cable(s) to the
PTT/Common carrier wall socket if you are working with LIC 5 or 6.
7. Close the rear door.
8. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diag-
nostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
GND
Addr es s i ng
A B C D
W
E F G H J K
Power
Connect
Y
Z
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
GND
Figure 4-56. LIC Board Type 1 and 2
Customer Access Area
Figure 4-57. LIC Board Type 3
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-45
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Control Panel Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-58.
5. Locate the control panel and the MOSS.
Refer to Figure 4-58.
6. Open the control panel door (one screw must be removed).
7. Remove the MOSS right cover (three screws must be removed
.1/
). Refer to Figure 4-59.
8. Refer to Figure 4-58 and to Figure 4-60 on page 4-47, then remove (from the MOSS board) the cable going to the control panel
(Y0-D1).
9. Release the cable from its securing points.
Refer to Figure 4-61 on page 4-47 and do the following:
Figure 4-58. Panel, MOSS, and CB1 Locations
Figure 4-59. MOSS Right Cover
4-46
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
10. Remove the panel cover (three screws must be removed
.2/
).
11. Remove the five screws holding the panel to the door
.3/
.
12. Withdraw the panel with the cable.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new panel on the panel door and attach it with the five screws
.3/
.
2. Re-install the panel cover with the three screws
.2/
.
3. Re-install the cable in its path and reconnect it to the MOSS board.
4. Re-install the MOSS right cover with the three screws
.1/
.
5. Close the control panel door with one screw.
6. Switch CB1 ON.
7. Close the front door.
8. Press Power On on the control panel.
9. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Figure 4-60. Panel Cable Location on MOSS Board
J 1
Figure 4-61. Panel
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-47
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Battery Exchange Procedure
It is the Service Personnels responsibility to exchange the battery.
The 3745 will automatically send an alert to the operator console when there is a need to exchange the battery.
Removal Procedure
1. Locate the control panel. Refer to
Figure 4-62.
2. Open the front door.
3. Open the control panel door (one screw must be removed).
4. Locate the battery
.1/
. Refer to Figure 4-63.
5. Remove the tie wrap on the battery and disconnect the battery plug
.2/
.
J 1
Figure 4-62. Panel Location
Installation Procedure
1. Insert the new battery and reconnect the plug.
2. Fasten the tie wrap to the battery.
3. Close the control panel door with the screw.
4. Close the front door.
Figure 4-63. Battery Location
5. Battery disposal must be performed
according to the instruction on the battery case.
Reporting:
Update the battery exchange record as follows:
Using the 3745 console, type POS on any displayed screen selection area for Power Ser-
vices Screen.
Press SEND.
The Power Services Screen is displayed.
Refer to Figure 4-64 on page 4-49. If a
MOSS console function is in process, press the F1 key to terminate.
Type 2 in the selection area for Battery
change acknowledge.
Press SEND.
The Battery Change Screen is displayed.
Refer to Figure 4-65 on page 4-49.
Type Y in the CONFIRM THAT THE
BATTERY HAS BEEN CHANGED (Y/N) ==> field.
Press SEND.
A successful command message will appear.
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102 for the time update.
Note: If the code 007 is displayed on the 3745 control panel, a MOSS IML (function 1) should be performed to reset this code.
4-48
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCA-A
RESET
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
3745
X71:ðAð8ðð
X71:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:2
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: POWER SERVICES
ð
- SELECT ONE OPTION, THEN PRESS ENTER ==>
1 = POWER DUMP
2 = BATTERY CHANGE ACKNOWLEDGE
===>
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á
Figure 4-64. Power Services Screen
F6:QUIT
ñ
à
CUSTOMER ID:
CCU-A
RUN
PROCESS MOSS-ALONE
BYP-IOC-CHK STOP-CCU-CHK
3745
X71:ðAð8ðð
X72:ðBC8ðð
SERIAL NUMBER:
-------------------------------------------------------------- ð3/ð1/87 ð1:2
FUNCTION ON SCREEN: POWER SERVICES
ð
CONFIRM THAT THE BATTERY HAS BEEN CHANGED (Y/N) ==>
===>
F1:END F2:MENU2 F3:ALARM
á
Figure 4-65. Acknowledge Screen
F6:QUIT
ñ
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-49
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Fan 1 Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-66.
5. Locate Fan 1. Refer to Figure 4-66.
6. At Fan 1, disconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable. Refer to
Figure 4-67.
7. Remove the screw
.1/
which maintains Fan 1 to the frame.
8. Slide the Fan 1 assembly out.
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new Fan 1 in the frame and fasten it with the screw
.1/
.
2. Reconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable to Fan 1.
3. Switch CB1 ON.
4. Close the front door.
5. Press Power On on the control panel.
6. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Figure 4-66. Fan 1 and CB1 Locations
Figure 4-67. Fan 1 Air Flow Detector and Power
Cables
4-50
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Fan 2 Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power OFF on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-68.
5. Locate Fan 2. Refer to Figure 4-68.
6. At Fan 2, disconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable. Refer to
Figure 4-69.
7. Remove the two screws
.1/
which maintain
Fan 2 on the frame.
8. Slide the Fan 2 assembly out.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new Fan 2 in the frame and fasten it with the two screws
.1/
.
2. Reconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable to Fan 2.
3. Switch CB1 ON.
4. Close the front door.
5. Press Power On on the control panel.
6. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Figure 4-68. Fan 2 and CB1 Locations
Figure 4-69. Fan 2 Air Flow Detector and Power
Cables
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-51
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
FDD Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure:
For physical locations, refer to Figure 4-70.
Important
The MOSS must be loaded from the Disk. If you are not sure, execute a MOSS IML from the Disk.
Refer to “How to Perform 3745 Control Panel
Operations” on page 1-82.
Check that the Power Control display is set to local 3 on the control panel. If yes, go to Step 3.
If not, proceed with Step 1.
1. Press power Control until 3 (Local mode) is displayed in the power control window.
2. Press Validate.
3. Press Service until 1 (Maintenance 1) is displayed in the service window.
4. Press Validate.
5. Disable the MOSS area as follows (if NCP is running in the 3745): a. Invoke Menu 2 (See PF key line).
b. In Menu 2, type MOF in the selection area for MOSS OFFLINE.
c. Press SEND.
d. MOSS OFFLINE is displayed.
6. Open the front door.
7. Before exchanging the FDD, check the voltages as follows:
Note: The voltages are not permanently applied on the FDD and, to have them available for measurement for approximately 15 minutes, a MOSS IML is required.
a. Press Function key on the control panel until the MOSS IML function 1 is displayed.
Figure 4-70. FDD and CB1 Location
4-52
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Table 4-11. Voltage Test Points
Connector Pin Voltage
01B-A1J2
(FDD)
1
2
3
4
+12 V
GND
GND
+ 5 V
PS1-J1
Voltage
Test Points
2
5
12
+12 V
+ 5 V
GND
Maximum
+13.00 V
+ 5.25 V
+13.00 V
+ 5.25 V
Minimum
+11.00 V
+ 4.85 V
+11.00 V
+ 4.85 V
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
b. Press Validate.
c. Using Table 4-11, measure the voltages on the voltage test points of PS1 (refer to
Figure 4-71). If the voltages are incorrect, exchange PS1.
8. Remove the power as follows: a. Invoke the menu 1 (see PF key line).
b. In menu 1 type DIF in the selection area for Disk Function.
c. Press SEND.
d. The Disk Function Screen is displayed.
e. Type 8 the in selection area for Power
OFF Disk/Diskette Driver.
f. Press SEND.
g. If DISK/DISKETTE DRIVES CONCUR-
RENT MAINTENANCE ENTERED is displayed, go to Step 9 on page 4-54.
h. If DISK/DISKETTE DRIVES CONCUR-
RENT MAINTENANCE CANCELLED is displayed, procede as follows:
1) Inform the customer that the 3745
is to be powered OFF.
2) Press Power Off on the control panel.
3) Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to
Figure 4-70 on page 4-52.
4) Go to Step 9 on page 4-54.
Figure 4-71. PS1
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-53
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
9. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
10. Refer to Figure 4-72. Remove the MOSS board covers
.1/
(seven screws must be removed
.2/
).
11. Refer to Figure 4-73 .
12. Locate the FDD
.3/
.
13. Remove the two cables
.4/
at the back of the
FDD.
14. Remove the four securing screws from the assembly
.5/
.
15. Slide the FDD assembly out.
Figure 4-73. FDD Removal
Figure 4-72. MOSS Covers
4-54
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Check that the new FDD has a jumper in position 0 (refer to Figure 4-74).
Figure 4-74. FDD Connectors
2. Install the new FDD assembly with the four screws
.5/
. Refer to Figure 4-73 on page 4-54.
3. Reconnect the two cables at the back of the
FDD
.4/
. Refer to Figure 4-73 on page 4-54.
4. Re-install the covers of the MOSS board
.1/ with the seven screws
.2/
. Refer to
Figure 4-72 on page 4-54.
Note: In the remaining steps, it is assumed that the microcode is at the same level on both the diskette and the hard disk.
5. Re-apply power as follows: a. If you powered OFF the machine, go to
Step 12.
b. If you did not power OFF the machine, then go to Step 6.
6. Install the primary diskette in the FDD.
7. Press Function on the control panel until 9
(Load from Diskette) is displayed in the function window.
8. Press Validate.
Note: This action will also run MOSS diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A successful completion will result in a code F0E,
F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See “3745 Control
Panel Codes” on page 1-15
9. Remove the primary diskette from the FDD.
10. Close the front door.
11. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
12. Install the primary diskette in the FDD.
13. Switch CB1 ON.
14. Power the 3745 ON with function 9 (Load from Diskette).
15. A successful completion will result in a code
F0E, F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See “3745
Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15
16. Remove the primary diskette from the FDD.
17. Close the front door.
18. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-55
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
HDD Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure:
For physical locations, refer to Figure 4-75.
Important
Check that the Power Control display is set to local 3 on the control panel. If yes, go to Step 3.
If not, proceed with Step 1.
1. Press power Control until 3 (Local mode) is displayed in the power control window.
2. Press Validate.
3. Press Service until 1 (Maintenance 1) is displayed in the service window.
4. Press Validate.
5. For the 3745 Model 130 to 170 go to Step 9.
For Model 17A continue, with Step 6
6. You should be logged ON on the service processor console. If not, go to “Console Use for Maintenance” on page 1-1 for logging ON and return here.
7. In the MOSS-E View window, double-click on your 3745 icon.
8. In the 3745 Menu window, double-click on the
MOSS Console option.
9. Disable the MOSS area as follows: a. Call Menu 2.
b. Type MOF on the selection line.
c. Press SEND.
d. MOSS OFFLINE is displayed.
10. Open the front door.
11. Remove power as follows: a. Invoke Menu 1 (see PF key line).
b. In Menu 1 type DIF in the selection area for Disk Functions.
c. Press SEND.
d. The Disk Functions Screen is displayed.
e. Type 7 in the selection area for Power
OFF Disk/Diskette Drive.
f. Press SEND.
g. If POWER OFF SUCCESSFUL. CON-
CURRENT MAINTENANCE ACCEPTED
is displayed, go to Step 12 on page 4-57.
h. If POWER OFF UNSUCCESSFUL. CON-
CURRENT MAINTENANCE REJECTED
is displayed, do the following:
1) Inform the customer that the 3745
is to be powered OFF.
2) Press Power Off on the control panel.
3) Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to
Figure 4-75
4) Go to Step 12 on page 4-57.
Figure 4-75. HDD and CB1 Locations
4-56
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
12. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
13. Open the control panel door.
14. Refer to Figure 4-76:
15. Locate the HDD
.1/
.
16. Remove the three cables (and the ground wire if any) from the drive
.2/
.
17. Unfasten the HDD assembly
.3/
from the frame. Two screws
.4/
must be removed.
18. Slide the HDD assembly out
.3/
.
19. Remove the four screws
.5/
which maintain the HDD to the assembly bracket.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Figure 4-76. HDD Removal
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-57
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Identify the HDD that you received using
Figure 4-77 (several types of HDD are available).
2. If you receive a new HDD assembly similar to the HDD shown (see Figure 4-77) continue with Step 3. Otherwise, go to Step 8.
Figure 4-77. New Type of HDD
3. Ensure that the jumpers are present in position J3 and J4. See Figure 4-77.
4. Install the new HDD on the assembly bracket with the four screws
.5/
.
5. Slide in the HDD assembly and fasten it to the frame with the two screws
.4/
.
6. Reconnect the three cables
.2/
.
Note: After HDD exchange, it will be necessary to IML from the diskette.
7. Go to Step 13.
Figure 4-78. HDD Installation
8. Ensure that there is a jumper in position 1 of the new HDD. Refer to Figure 4-80 or to
Figure 4-79 on page 4-60 according to the
HDD type.
4-58
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
9. Install the new HDD on the assembly bracket with the four screws
.5/
.
10. Slide in the HDD assembly and fasten it to the frame with the two screws
.4/
.
11. Reconnect the three cables and the ground wire
.2/
.
Note: After HDD exchange, it will be necessary to IML from the diskette.
12. Continue with Step 13.
13. Re-apply power as follows: a. If you powered OFF the 3745, then go to
Step 28 on page 4-59.
b. If you did not power OFF the 3745, go to
Step 14
14. Install the primary backup diskette in the FDD.
15. At the control panel, select Service Mode
.1/ or
.2/
and press Validate.
16. Press Function on the control panel until 9
(Load from Diskette) is displayed in the function window.
17. Press Validate.
Note: This action will also run MOSS diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A successful completion will result in a code F0E,
F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See “3745 Control Panel
Codes” on page 1-15.
18. For 3745 Model 130 to 170 go to Step 20.
For Model 17A, continue with step 19.
19. Check that the 3745 icon in the MOSS-E
View window has changed from grey to pink and perform the following bullet otherwise check your installation. If problem persists call your support.
In the MOSS-E View window, double-click on your 3745 icon.
In the 3745 Menu window, double-click on the MOSS Console option.
20. Inform the customer that the 3745 will be powered OFF during the following steps.
21. Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function, SY33-2069 to:
Initialize the disk.
Restore the disk from the backup diskettes, follow the prompt screens until
Disk correctly restored is displayed.
Press Power Off on the control panel.
When these actions are completed, a MOSS
IML from the HDD will have been executed.
Note: This action will also run MOSS diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A successful completion will result in a code F0E,
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See “3745 Control Panel
Codes” on page 1-15
22. Press Service until 2 is displayed in the service window.
23. Press Validate.
24. Press Function. until 1 is displayed in the power control window.
25. Press Validate.
26. Press Power On on the control panel.
27. Go to Step 42.
28. Install the primary backup diskette in the FDD.
29. Switch CB1 ON.
30. At the control panel select Service Mode
.1/ or
.2/
and press Validate.
31. Press Function on the control panel until 9
(Load from Diskette) is displayed in the function window.
32. Press Validate.
33. Press Power On on the control panel.
34. For 3745 Model 130 to 170 go to Step 36.
For Model 17A, continue with step 35.
35. Check that the 3745 icon in the MOSS-E
View window has changed from grey to pink and perform the following bullet otherwise check your installation and if problem persists call your support.
In the MOSS-E View window, double-click on your 3745 icon.
In the 3745 Menu window, double-click on the MOSS Console option.
36. Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function, SY33-2069 to:
Initialize the disk.
Restore the disk from the backup diskettes. Follow the prompt screens until
Disk correctly restored is displayed.
Then power OFF the 3745.
When these actions are completed, a MOSS
IML from the HDD will have been executed.
Note: This action will also run MOSS diagnostics and complete a MOSS IML. A successful completion will result in a code F0E
,F0F, or 000. If any other code is displayed, an error was detected. See “3745 Control
Panel Codes” on page 1-15
37. Press Service until 2 is displayed in the service window.
38. Press Validate.
39. Press Function until 1 is displayed in the power control window.
40. Press Validate.
41. Press Power On on the control panel.
42. Close the control panel door.
43. Close the front door.
44. For 3745 Model 130 to 170 continue with Step
45. For model 17A, go to Step 47.
45. Refer to the Installation Guide SY33-2067, and enter the customer default password.
Then update and activate the maintenance password.
46. Ask the customer to update the customer password if needed.
47. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU.
48. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-59
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
┌─┐
│ │ ð1D-A1J2
│ │ Data
│ │
└─┤
│ o o %── Position 1
│ o o
│ o o
│ o o
│ o o
│ o o
┌─┤
│ │
│ │
│ o o
│ o o %── Position 8
│
│ │
│ │
│ │ ð1D-A1J1
│ │ Control
│ │
│ │
└─┤
│
├─┐
│O│
│O│ ð1D-A1J3
│O│ Power
│O│
└─┘
┌─┐ ð1D-A1J4
└─┘ Frame Ground
Figure 4-79. HDD Connectors and Jumpers
┌─┐
│ │
ð1D-A1J2 │ │
Data │ │
└─┤
│
│
│
│ ┌─┤
│ │ │
│ │ │
│
│
│
│ o o %── Position 1
│ o o
│ o o
│ o o
│ o o %── Position 5
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│ │ │
│ │ │
│ │ │ ð1D-A1J1
│ │ │ Control
│ │ │
│ │ │
│ └─┤
│
├─┐
│O│
│O│ ð1D-A1J3
│O│ Power
│O│
└─┘
┌─┐ ð1D-A1J4
└─┘ Frame Ground
Figure 4-80. HDD Connectors and Jumpers
4-60
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
TERMC/TERMR Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-81.
5. Locate the basic board. Refer to Figure 4-81.
6. Remove the basic board cover (two screws must be loosened). Then lift up the cover.
7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
8. At the Channel Tailgate set all the Select Out
Bypass switches to bypass (refer to
Figure 4-43 and to Figure 4-44 on page 4-36).
9. Remove all the cards.
10. According to the card terminator that is to be exchanged continue with Step a or b.
a. For TERMC:
Release the retainer at the bottom of the board (one screw must be loosened).
Then remove the TERMC card from row
Z. Refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6 or
Figure 4-5 on page 4-7
b. For TERMR:
Remove the TERMR card from row Y.
Refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6 or
Figure 4-5 on page 4-7.
Figure 4-81. Basic Board and CB1 Locations
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new terminator card.
2. Re-install the retainer if removed.
3. Re-install the cards.
4. Replace the basic board cover.
5. Set all the Select Out Bypass switches to
normal
6. Switch CB1 ON.
7. Close the front door.
8. Press Power On on the control panel..
9. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU. Go to “Action to Take
After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-61
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
TERMD/TERMI Exchange
Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the Control panel.
3. Open the front door and the rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-82.
Rear
Figure 4-83. Basic Board Grid
B a s i c
Boar d
Gr i d
Figure 4-82. CB1 Location
5. Remove the grid of the basic board. (four screws must be removed). Refer to
Figure 4-83.
6. Remove the retainer which holds the terminator card to the board (one screw must be removed).
7. Remove the suspected terminator card. Refer to Figure 4-84.
Figure 4-84. Terminator Card Locations
4-62
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new terminator card.
2. Re-install the retainer.
3. Install the grid of the Basic board.
4. Close the rear door.
5. Switch CB1 ON.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
6. Close the front door.
7. Press Power Off on the Control panel.
8. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU.
9. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-63
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
ESS Tailgate Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door and the rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-85.
c. Locate the related EAC card. Refer to
Figure 4-87 on page 4-65.
d. Remove the three non-polarized top card connector from positions W, X, and Y.
Refer to Figure 4-89 on page 4-65.
e. Disconnect the two cable ground wires from the board.
f. Withdraw the EAC card until the line cable
(J1) on the component side is accessible.
Disconnect the cable.
g. Unclamp the cable connected to the tailgate.
h. Remove the external cable from the related connector.
i. Unscrew the connector (two screws) and remove it with its internal cable.
Figure 4-85. CB1 Location
5. For physical locations, refer to Figure 4-86 and to Figure 4-87 on page 4-65.
6. Referring to Figure 4-89 on page 4-65 and to
Figure 4-88 on page 4-65 remove the cable from EAC to tailgate as follow: a. Remove the cover of the basic board.
Loosen the two screws and lift up the cover.
b. Attention: Use the ESD kit and proce-
dures.
E S S
Tail Gate
Rear
Figure 4-86. ESS Tailgate Location
4-64
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Tailgate 01Q
CO D0
Basic Board 01G-A1
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
ELA1 ELA2
Figure 4-87. ESS Tailgate and Basic board
Car d CSP Card EAC
W
X
Y
J1
Figure 4-89. EAC Card
Figure 4-88. ESS Cables
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-65
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new connector with its internal cable into the tailgate. Two screws must be used.
2. Clamp the internal cable to the EAC card.
3. Replug the cable to the EAC card connector
(J1).
4. Replug the two cable ground wires to the board.
5. Replug the EAC card.
6. Replace the three top card connectors.
7. Reconnect the external cable on the tailgate connector.
8. Reinstall the cover of the Basic board.
9. Close the rear door.
10. Switch CB1 ON.
11. Close the front door.
12. Press Power On on the control panel.
13. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU.
14. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
4-66
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
PS1 Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Open the rear door.
5. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-90.
6. Locate the PS1 and Primary power box. Refer to Figure 4-90.
7. Remove the DMUX/PS1 cover. Refer to
Figure 4-91. Two screws must be removed
.1/
.
Refer to Figure 4-93 and to Figure 4-92 on page 4-68 and do the following:
8. At the Primary power box, remove the power cable going to PS1
.2/
.
9. Remove the cover which protects TB1 to TB4
(two screws must be removed).
10. Remove the cover which protects TB5 and
TB6 (two screws must be removed).
11. Verify that on each side of the PS1, the power cables are labeled according to their positions.
If not done, label them.
12. Remove the cables from the PS1.
13. Remove the two screws
.3/
which hold PS1 to the frame.
14. Remove the cable between Fan1 and the primary power box (J7).
15. Slide the PS1 out.
Figure 4-90. Power Supply 1 (PS1) and CB1
Locations
Figure 4-91. Power Supply 1 (PS1) Cover
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-67
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new PS1 in the frame and fasten it with the two screws
.3/
.
2. Reconnect the cable between the Fan1 and the primary power box (J7).
3. Reconnect the power cables in their proper positions on the PS1 front and rear sides.
4. Re-install the cover which protects TB1 to TB4 with two screws. Refer to Figure 4-93.
5. Re-install the cover which protects TB5 and
TB6 with two screws. Refer to Figure 4-93.
6. Re-install PS1 cover with the 2 screws
.1/
.
7. At the primary power box, reconnect the PS1 power cable
.2/
.
.
8. Switch CB1 ON.
9. Close the front and the rear door.
10. Press Power On on the control panel.
11. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU.
12. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Figure 4-92. Primary Power Box
Figure 4-93. Power Supply 1
4-68
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
PS2 and Primary Power Box Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door and the rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-94.
5. Set OFF the Customer power supply
switch related to the 3745. Install the appropriate safety panel which indicates that the supply should not be turned ON
6. Locate the PS2 and the primary power box.
Refer to Figure 4-94.
7. Refer to Figure 4-95 and to Figure 4-96 on
page 4-70 .
8. Disconnect the main power cable from outlet
J3.
9. Release the ground wire
.1/
from the frame.
10. At the front and rear sides of the primary power box, verify that the cables are labeled according to their positions. If they are not, label them. Then remove all the cables.
11. Remove the four screws
.2/
which secure the primary power box to the frame.
12. Slide the primary power box out and place it
in a safe working area.
13. Remove the six screws
.3/
which secure the
PSs covers
.4/
.
14. Remove the PSs covers
.4/
.
15. Remove the two screws
.5/
which secure the
DC/DC converter cover
.6/
.
16. Remove the DC/DC converter cover
.6/
.
Figure 4-94. Primary Power Box, Power Supply 2, and
CB1 Locations
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-69
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Figure 4-95. Cable Locations on Primary Power Box
Figure 4-96. PS2 in Primary Power Box
4-70
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
17. Refer to Figure 4-97.
18. Disconnect the three cables
.7/
and remove the ground wire from the DC/DC converter connector
.9/
.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
19. Remove the five screws
.8/
which maintain the PS2 onto the primary power box.
20. Remove the PS2.
Figure 4-97. PS2 and Primary Power Box Assembly
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-71
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. If you are exchanging:
The PS2 install the new PS2 in the primary power box.
The primary power box, install the PS2 in the new primary power box.
Use the five screws
.8/
.
2. Reconnect the three cables
.7/
and re-install the ground wire at the DC/DC converter connector
.9/
.
3. Re-install the DC/DC converter cover
.6/
with the two screws
.5/
.
4. Re-install the PSs covers
.4/
with the six screws
.3/
.
5. Slide the primary power box in the frame and fasten it with the four screws
.2/
.
6. Reconnect the ground wire
.1/
to the frame.
7. Reconnect all the cables in their proper position, at the front and rear sides of the primary power box.
8. Reconnect the main power cable in outlet J3.
9. Set ON the Customer power supply switch related to the 3745 and remove the safety panel installed previously.
10. Switch CB1 ON.
11. Close the front door and the rear door.
12. Press Power On on the control panel.
13. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic in ODG that you ran before you exchanged the FRU.
14. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
4-72
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
EPO Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front and rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-98.
5. Set OFF the Customer power supply
switch related to the 3745 Install the appropriate safety panel which indicates that the supply should not be turned ON
6. Locate the primary power box and the EPO.
Refer to Figure 4-98 and to Figure 4-99.
7. Refer to Figure 4-100 and to Figure 4-101
on page 4-74:
8. Disconnect the main power cable from the outlet J3.
9. At the front side and at the rear side of the primary power box, verify that the cables are labeled according to their positions. If they are not, label them. Remove all the cables.
10. Release the ground wire
.1/
from the frame.
11. Remove the four screws
.2/
which secure the primary power box to the frame. Refer to
Figure 4-100 on page 4-74 and Figure 4-101 on page 4-74.
Figure 4-98. Primary Power Box and CB1 Locations
E P O
Rear
Figure 4-99. EPO Location
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-73
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
12. Slide the primary power box out and place it
in a safe working area.
13. Remove the four screws
.3/
which secure the
PS2 cover.
14. Remove the PS2 cover
.4/
.
Figure 4-100. Cables on Primary Power Box
Figure 4-101. Primary Power Box and PS2 Cover Removal
4-74
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
15. Refer to Figure 4-102:
16. Disconnect the cable
.7/
from the PS2.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
17. Remove the four screws
.8/
which secure the
EPO plate to the frame. Remove the EPO assembly
.9/
.
Figure 4-102. EPO Assembly
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-75
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new EPO assembly and fasten it with the four screws
.8/
.
2. Reconnect the cable
.7/
.
3. Re-install the PS2 cover
.4/
with the four screws
.3/
.
4. Slide the primary power box in the frame and fasten it with the four screws
.2/
.
5. Reconnect the ground wire
.1/
to the frame.
6. Reconnect all the cables to their proper position at the front side and at the rear side of the primary power box.
7. Reconnect the main power cable in outlet J3.
8. Set the Customer power supply switch to ON, and remove the safety panel previously installed. panel.
9. Switch CB1 ON.
10. Close the front and rear door.
11. Press Power On on the control panel.
12. Referring to Chapter 3, “How to Run 3745
Diagnostics” on page 3-1, run the same diagnostic that you ran before you exchanged the
FRU.
13. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
4-76
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Basic Board Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front and rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-103.
5. Locate the board. Refer to Figure 4-103.
6. Refer to Figure 4-104 on page 4-78 .
7. Remove the basic board cover
.1/
(loosen the two screws
.2/
and lift up the cover).
8. remove the 2 MOSS board covers
.3/
(seven screws must be removed
.4/
).
9. Remove the basic board grid (four screws must be removed). Refer to Figure 4-105 on page 4-78.
10. At the channel tailgate, set all the select out switches to bypass (if any channel adapter is installed).
11. At the PS1 remove the cover of the four FDS cables (two screws must be removed).
Disconnect these four cables and the multivoltage cable going to the basic board. Refer to
Figure 4-106 on page 4-78.
Figure 4-103. Basic Board, MOSS Board, and CB1
Locations
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-77
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Front Vi ew
Figure 4-104. Basic Board and MOSS Covers
Rear
Figure 4-105. Basic Board Grid
B a s i c
Boar d
Gr i d
4-78
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Figure 4-106. FDS and Multivoltage Cable Locations on the PS1
12. At Fan2, disconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable. Refer to Figure 4-107.
13. Remove the two screws
.1/
which maintain
Fan2 to the frame.
14. Slide the Fan2 assembly out.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Figure 4-107. Fan2 Air Flow Detector and Power Connectors
15. At the MOSS board disconnect the four cables going to the basic board. Refer to
Figure 4-108.
16. Open the clamps which secure these cables to the basic board enclosure.
17. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
18. Remove the cross-over connectors.
19. Verify that the cards and the cables from the cards are labeled according to their positions.
if they are not, label them. Unplug the cables from the cards, then remove the cards and store them in a safe place (do not remove the horizontal cards in row Z, they will be removed later).
20. At the rear side of the board, remove the channel tailgate cables if a channel adapter is installed.
21. Remove the five screws
.5/
which maintain the enclosure to the frame (refer to
Figure 4-109). Slide the enclosure out of the machine taking care not to damage the cables.
22. Place the enclosure in a safe working area.
Figure 4-108. MOSS to Basic Cable Locations
Figure 4-109. Basic Board Enclosure
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-79
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
23. Refer to Figure 4-110 .
24. Remove the 10 screws
.6/
which secure the retainers that hold the cables and the terminator cards in rows Y and Z. Remove the retainers.
25. Remove the terminator cards and store them in a safe place.
26. Remove the two screws
.7/
which hold the two ground FDS cables in the rack assembly.
27. Disconnect the cables and remove them with the retainer.
28. At the front side of the board, remove the retainer at the bottom of the board, (row Z one screw must be removed).
29. Remove the DCREG cards (if they are present).
Retai ner
Figure 4-110. Basic Board Cables
Ter mi nat or
Car ds
Rack
As s embl y
4-80
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
30. Remove the six screws
.8/
which secure the board assembly to the rack assembly. Refer to Figure 4-111.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
31. Remove the board assembly.
Boar d As s embl y
Figure 4-111. Basic Assembly 1
Rack As sembl y
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-81
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
32. Remove the 14 screws
.9/
which hold the stiffener to the board (refer to Figure 4-112).
33. Remove the stiffener.
34. Remove the four screws
.1ð/
which hold the board to the ASM gate (refer to Figure 4-112).
35. Remove the board.
Figure 4-112. Basic Assembly 2
4-82
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Place the new board on the ASM gate and fasten it with the four screws.
.1ð/
. Refer to
Figure 4-112 on page 4-82.
2. Install the stiffener on the board and fasten it with the 14 screws.
.9/
Refer to Figure 4-112 on page 4-82.
3. Install the DCREG cards (if present) in the board and tighten them with the retainer.
4. Install the board assembly on the rack assembly and fasten it with the six screws
.8/
. Refer to Figure 4-111 on page 4-81.
5. Reconnect the two ground FDS cables and fasten them to the rack assembly with the two screws
.7/
. Refer to Figure 4-110 on page 4-80.
6. Reconnect the other cables. Refer to
Figure 4-110 on page 4-80 and to
Figure 4-113.
Reconnect the cables located in the upper
Y row.
Install on the upper retainer (with four screws) on these cables.
Reconnect the cables located in the lower
Y row.
Install on retainer (with three screws) on these cables.
Reconnect the cable in the Z row.
Install on the retainer (with one screw) on the cable.
7. Press Power Off on the control panel.
Y Row Upper
Y Row Upper
Z Row
Figure 4-113. Y and Z Rows
8. Install the terminator cards and tighten them with the two retainers (one screw per retainer). Refer to Figure 4-110 on page 4-80.
9. Slide the enclosure intoe the machine frame taking care not to damage the cables.
10. Fasten the enclosure to the frame with the five screws
.5/
.Refer to Figure 4-109 on page 4-79.
11. If a channel adapter is installed, reconnect the channel tailgate cables tot the rear side of the board.
12. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
13. Install the cards into their correct location according to their labels. If you have suspicions about the locations, refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6, to Figure 4-5 on page 4-7, or to
Figure 4-6 on page 4-8.
14. Install the cross-over connectors and cables.
If you have suspicions about the cross-over location, refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-6,
Figure 4-5 on page 4-7, or Figure 4-6 on page 4-8.
15. At the MOSS board, reconnect the four cables from Basic board and close the clamps which maintain them. Refer to Figure 4-108 on page 4-79.
16. Install the Fan2 assembly in the frame and fasten it with the two screws
.1/
. Refer to
Figure 4-107 on page 4-79.
17. Reconnect the air flow detector cable and the power cable at Fan2.
18. At the PS1 reconnect the four FDS cables and the multivoltage cable (from basic board) and close the clamps which maintain them.
19. Reinstall the cover with the two screws. Refer to Figure 4-106 on page 4-78.
20. Replace the grid of the base board with the four screws. Refer to Figure 4-83 on page 4-62.
21. At the channel tailgate, set all the select out bypass switches to normal (if any channel adapter is installed).
22. Close the rear door.
23. Re-install the MOSS board covers with the seven screws
.4/
.
24. Re-install the Basic board cover with the two screws
.2/
.
25. Switch CB1 ON.
26. Close the front door.
27. Press Power On on the control panel.
28. Run all diagnostics,
29. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-83
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
LIC Board Type 1 and 3 Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front and rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-114.
5. Locate the board to be exchanged. Refer to
Figure 4-115.
Figure 4-114. CB1 Location
Figure 4-115. LIC Board Type 1 Locations
4-84
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
6. Remove one of the DMUX covers. Refer to
Figure 4-116.
7. Two screws must be removed
.1/
. Two kinds of DMUX cover exist according to the LIC board location.
Figure 4-116. DMUX Cover
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-85
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
8. Refer to Figure 4-117
9. Verify that the serial link cables on the DMUX are labeled according to their positions. If they are not, label them.
10. Remove the serial link cables.
11. Verify that the LIC cables are labeled according to their positions. If they are not, label them. Then remove the LIC cables.
12. Note the type and locations of the LICs.The
LIC type is indicated by the color of the thumb screw.
Figure 4-117. LIC Locations
LIC Board
Location
01L-A1
01M-A2
01L-A2
Address Switches
5 to 1
00011
00000
00010
LIC Type
LIC type 1
LIC type 3
LIC type 4A
LIC type 4B
DMUX
Thumb Screw
Color
Brown
Blue
Green
Green
White
4-86
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
13. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
Remove the LICs and the DMUX by unfastening the thumb screws holding them to the board. (See “LIC Exchange Procedure” on page 4-44 and “DMUX Exchange Procedure” on page 4-39 for more details about removals).
14. Refer to Figure 4-117 on page 4-86,
Figure 4-118 .
15. Disconnect the power cable
.2/
from the LIC board.
16. Remove the four screws
.3/
holding the board assembly on the frame.
17. Remove the LIC board assembly.
18. Note the board address for later use.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Refer to Figure 4-117 on page 4-86 and set the same board address as you noted during the board removal.
2. Refer to Figure 4-118. Mount the new LIC board assembly in place and secure it with the four screws
.3/
.
3. Refer to Figure 4-117 on page 4-86. Reconnect the flat power cable
.2/
.
4. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
Install the LICs and DMUX into their proper positions and fasten the thumb screws holding them to the board. Finger strength is enough.
Do not use tools.
Figure 4-118. LIC Board Assembly
5. Install the LIC cables in the LICs.
6. Install the serial link cables on the DMUX.
7. Refer to Figure 4-116 on page 4-85. Install the DMUX cover with two screws
.1/
.
8. Close the rear door.
9. Switch CB1 ON.
10. Close the front door.
11. Press Power On on the control panel.
12. Run all diagnostics.
13. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-87
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
LIC Board Type 2 Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure:
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door and the rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-119
5. Locate the board to exchange. Refer to
Figure 4-121 on page 4-89
6. Remove the SMUX covers. Refer to
Figure 4-120 (four screws must be removed
.1/
).
Figure 4-119. CB1 Location
Figure 4-120. SMUX Cover
4-88
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
7. Refer to Figure 4-122 .
8. Remove the serial link cable (if installed) from the SMUX: (this cable may be absent on
SMUXB if SMUXA and the flat cable
.2/
are present).
9. Remove the flat cable
.2/
(if installed) which connects the two SMUXs, (if two LIC boards
Type 2 are present in the machine): These cable may be absent in spite of the presence of the two boards.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Figure 4-121. LIC Board Type 2 Locations
Figure 4-122. SMUX Link and Cable
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-89
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
10. Refer to Figure 4-123 .
11. Verify that the LIC cables are labeled according to their positions. If they are not, label them. Then remove the LIC cables from the LICs.
Figure 4-123. LIC Locations
LIC Board
Location
Address Switches
7 to 1
01L-A1
01L-A2
0000010
0000011
12. Note the types and locations of the LICs.
13. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
Remove the LICs and the SMUX by unfastening the thumb screws holding them to the board.
14. Refer to Figure 4-123 and Figure 4-124 .
15. Disconnect the power cables
.3/
from the LIC board, and remove the screw and washer keeping ground strap to the frame
.7/
.
16. Remove the four screws
.4/
holding the board assembly to the frame.
17. Remove the LIC board
.5/
and the ground bracket
.6/
.
18. Note the board address for later use.
Figure 4-124. LIC Board Assembly
4-90
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Refer to Figure 4-123 on page 4-90 and set the same board address as you noted during the board removal.
2. Refer to Figure 4-124 on page 4-90.
3. Mount the new LIC board
.5/
and the ground bracket
.6/
in place and secure them with the four screws
.4/
.
4. Refer to Figure 4-123 on page 4-90.
5. Reconnect the flat power cables
.3/
.
6. Refer to Figure 4-124 on page 4-90.
7. Mount the ground strap onto the LIC board to the frame with the screw and a washer
.7/
.
8. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
Install the LICs and SMUX into their proper positions and fasten the thumb screws holding them to the board. Finger strength is enough.
Do not use tools.
9. Install the LIC cables on the LICs.
10. Refer to Figure 4-122 on page 4-89.
11. Install the serial link cable (if any) on the
SMUX.
12. Install the flat cable (if any) between the two
SMUXs.
13. Refer to Figure 4-120 on page 4-88.
14. Install the SMUX cover with two screws
.1/
.
15. Close the rear door.
16. Switch CB1 ON.
17. Close the front door.
18. Press Power On on the control panel.
19. Run all diagnostics.
20. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-91
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
MOSS Board Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Inform the customer that the 3745 is to be
powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-125.
5. Locate the board. Refer to Figure 4-125.
6. Remove the covers of the MOSS board
.1/
.
(seven screws must be removed
.2/
). Refer to Figure 4-126.
8
Figure 4-126. MOSS Board Covers
Figure 4-125. MOSS Board and CB1 Locations
4-92
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
7. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
8. Refer to Figure 4-127 .
9. Check if the cassettes are labelled according to their positions. If they are not, label them.
10. Remove the cassettes and store them in a safe place.
11. Verify that the cables are labeled according to their position. If they are not, label them.
12. Remove all the cables from the board.
Figure 4-127. MOSS Board Cards and Cables
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-93
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
13. Remove the eight screws
.3/
which maintain the MOSS board enclosure in the frame.
Refer to Figure 4-128. Remove the enclosure and place it in a safe working place.
14. Remove the 12 screws
.4/
which hold the
MOSS board on the stiffener. Refer to
Figure 4-128. Remove the MOSS board.
S t i f f e n e r
Boar d
Chas s i s As s embl y
Figure 4-128. MOSS Board Enclosure
4-94
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Installation Procedure
1. Place the new board on the stiffener and fasten it with the 12 screws
.4/
. Refer to
Figure 4-128 on page 4-94.
2. Replace the MOSS board enclosure in the machine frame and fasten it with the eight screws
.3/
. Refer to Figure 4-128 on page 4-94.
3. Attention: Use the ESD kit and procedures.
4. Reconnect the cables and the cassettes in their correct location according to their labels.
Refer to Figure 4-127 on page 4-93.
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
5. Install the covers of the MOSS board with the
7 screws
.2/
.
6. Switch CB1 ON.
7. Close the front door.
8. Press Power On on the control panel.
9. Run all diagnostics.
10. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-95
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Channel Tailgate Exchange Procedure
Removal Procedure
1. Ask the customer to disable the channel
related to the suspected channel tailgate connector. Also inform him that the 3745 is to be powered OFF.
2. Press Power Off on the control panel.
3. Open the front and rear door.
4. Switch CB1 OFF. Refer to Figure 4-129.
5. Locate the channel tailgate. Refer to
Figure 4-131 on page 4-97.
6. Remove the basic board grid. (two screws must be removed). Refer to Figure 4-131 on page 4-97.
7. At the channel tailgate connectors, set all the select out bypass switches to Bypass. Refer to Figure 4-130.
8. Disconnect the channel bus and tag cables from the channel tailgate connector to be removed.
9. In order to allow the customer to use the channel during the repair time, you must connect the cables together or to the terminators.
10. Remove the two screws which maintain the channel tailgate connector. See note. 1
11. At the Basic board rear side disconnect the corresponding flat cables by loosening the retention screw. These parts are fragile.
Handle them with care.
12. Remove the connector flat cables assembly from the channel tailgate rack.
Figure 4-129. CB1 Location
Sel ect out
B y pas s S wi t ch
B y p a s s
Tag
B u s
Figure 4-130. Select Out Switch
Nor mal
1 An easier access to a lower located channel tailgate connector can be obtained by removing the upper one(s). For each channel tailgate connector use the steps 10 to 12. Do not disconnect the channel bus and tag cables from the connectors.
4-96
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
B a s i c
Boar d
Gr i d
Rear
Channel
Tail Gate
Figure 4-131. Channel Tailgate and Basic Board Grid
Locat i on: 01P
Locati on: 01G
Figure 4-132. Channel Tailgate, Cables, and Basic Board
Installation Procedure
1. Install the new connector flat cables assembly in the channel tailgate rack.
2. Connect the flat cables to the basic board rear side. Ensure that the connector is fully
plugged before securing the screw. The retention screw is not designed to achieve the connection.
3. Hold the channel tailgate connector with the two screws.
4. If the customer has restarted the channel ask
him to disable this channel again.
5. Reconnect the channel bus and tag cables onto the channel tailgate connector.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-97
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
6. Set all the select out bypass switches to
normal.
7. Replace the basic board grid with the two screws.
8. Close the rear door.
9. Switch CB1 ON.
10. Close the front door.
11. Press Power On on the control panel.
12. Run the channel wrap test on each channel.
Refer to “How to Run the Channel Wrap Test” on page 3-25.
13. Go to “Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange” on page 4-99.
4-98
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
Action to Take After a Diagnostic Run or an FRU Exchange
Diagnostic and Exchange Result Analysis 0000
001
007 (continued)
This procedure analyzes the results of the diagnostics or an FRU exchange and explains what must be done afterwards.
Did the diagnostic detect a failure?
Yes No
008
When MOSS diagnostics detect an error, a hex code is set on the control panel. The code can be decoded by using “3745 Control Panel Codes” on page 1-15.
009
– Go to Step 018 on page 4-100.
When ODG/CDG diagnostics detect an error, a reference code is given on the diagnostic screen.
See Figure 3-7 on page 3-12.
Was the failure other than 'unexpected error'?
Yes No
010
From Menu 3, select the BRC function. Enter the reference code. The action to be taken is displayed. See “Using Reference Codes” on page 1-14.
Was the diagnostic running in CDG mode?
Yes No
Did diagnostics initialization completed and the diagnostics start to run?
Yes No
011
002
Start the MOSS diagnostics. Refer to “How to Run MOSS Diagnostics” on page 3-4.
Run the previous diagnostic for the upper level in the 'run all' diagnostics.
For example, TRSS > IOC Bus >
CCU. Go to “3745 Diagnostic
Requirement” on page 1-60
012
003
Did the diagnostics run without a message for manual intervention?
Yes No
Analyse the reference code. Refer to “Using
Reference Codes” on page 1-14. Continue with Step 013.
004
Follow the instructions given by the diagnostics. Go back to this procedure according to the result.
005
Was the diagnostic result obtained before any
FRUs were exchanged?
Yes No
006
Go to Step 025 on page 4-100.
007
(Step 007 continues)
013
You may have started this service call to exchange FRUs called by a reference code or panel code.
Is the first FRU called by the diagnostics different from the FRU you were going to exchange?
Yes No
014
Perform FRU exchange using Chapter 4,
“3745 FRU Exchange” on page 4-1.
015
(Step 015 continues)
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-99
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
015 (continued)
Is there a common FRU given by both lists?
Yes No
016
– If you do not have the first FRU called by the diagnostics, obtain it.
If you have the FRU or when you obtain the
FRU, go to “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53 and follow the instructions to exchange it.
017
Consider that it is the first FRU of the list and perform FRU exchange using Chapter 4, “3745
FRU Exchange” on page 4-1.
018
Were HPTSS diagnostics being run for a suspected FESH card?
Yes No
019
Go to Step 022.
020
– In 3745 frame 01 (at tailgate location 01Q), remove the cables from the HPTSS lines to be tested. Refer to Figure 4-2 on page 4-4.
– Install wrap plugs in the sockets of 01Q for the lines to be tested.
– Update the CDF to show that the lines to be tested have wrap plugs installed. Refer to the
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function (CDF chapter).
– Run one of the following HPTSS diagnostic routines:
VI and VK if V.35 wrap plug is installed
VJ and VK if X.21 wrap plug is installed
VI, VJ, and VK if both types of wrap plugs are installed.
Refer to “How to Run Internal Function Tests” on page 3-9.
Did the diagnostics run free of error?
Yes No
021
Go to Step 013 on page 4-99.
022
(Step 022 continues)
022 (continued)
Is the FRU you were processing the last FRU called for the error?
Yes No
023
You have an intermittent error or an error not detected by this diagnostic.
Continue using this manual for the next
FRU called. Go to “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53.
024
All parts of the machine required for FRU exchange will now be available for service.
Change all FRUs called (use, Chapter 4, “3745
FRU Exchange” on page 4-1).
025
Have you been told to exchange all FRUs for an intermittent problem?
Yes No
026
Go to Step 032.
027
Did the diagnostics run error free or power successfully ON?
Yes No
028
You have a problem with the new FRU. Try another one or put the original back in.
Refer to Chapter 4, “3745 FRU Exchange” on page 4-1 and continue with next Step.
029
Have all the FRUs called been exchanged?
Yes No
030
Go to Chapter 4, “3745 FRU Exchange” on page 4-1 for next FRU called.
031
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
032
(Step 032 continues)
4-100
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
3745 FRU Exchange Procedure
032 (continued)
Was the FRU other than a power supply?
Yes No
033
Has the power supply successfully powered up?
Yes No
034
Go to Step 046.
035
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
036
Did the last run of the diagnostics or IML detect an error?
Yes No
037
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
038
Is the error the same as before?
Yes No
039
Go to Step 044.
040
– As the problem is not solved by changing this
FRU, you must put the original back in. Refer to
“Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1. Continue with the next step.
Have all the FRUs called been changed?
Yes No
041
In “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53 check if the next FRU and the FRU you have just exchanged have the same 'Diagnostic' and
'Area'.
Do both have the same 'Diagnostic' and
'Area'.
Yes No
042
(Step 042 continues)
042 (continued)
Follow the “3745 FRU List” on page 1-53.
043
Go to “Exchange Precautions” on page 4-1 for the next FRU called.
044
– Check what you have done:
Cards correctly installed
Cables correctly plugged
Crossovers correctly located and oriented
Switches in correct position.
– Run the diagnostics again, IML or any other action you were asked after FRU exchange.
Was a failure detected?
Yes No
045
Go to “CE Leaving Procedure” on page 4-102.
046
During your path through the MIP, have you recorded an Other Action or MAP to use?
Yes No
047
You may have a defective new FRU, or multiple problems. Try to determine if restarting the full procedure, or if another symptom may help you.
Also suspect cables, boards and voltages.
It may also be necessary to run diagnostics with the ALL option in offline mode. In any case, contact your support structure for further assistance.
048
Go there now.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-101
CE leaving procedure
CE Leaving Procedure
The maintenance package has determined that the 3745 is ready to be returned to normal operation.
001
Did you work on the 3745 Model 17A?
Yes No
002
Go to Step 004.
003
In the MOSS-E View window, double click on the service processor icon.
The Service Processor Menu window is displayed.
Click on the Configuration Management option.
Double click on the Manage Remote Operations option.
In the Remote Operation Management window, select the Remote operations authorization option and click on OK.
On the Remote Support Facility window, select the two following options:
– Enable Remote Support Facility
– Generate alerts
Click on OK.
Click on Cancel to return to Service Processor Menu.
Click on Function and Exit to return to the MOSS-E View window.
In the MOSS-E View window, click on Program in the action bar.
Click on Log Off MOSS-E.
Continue with Step 004.
004
You should use the following list to ensure that the machine is in suitable condition for customer operation and that all call information is recorded.
1. Replace any cables removed.
2. Check the battery voltage and exchange it if necessary.
3. Do all the actions that apply in the following list:
If You Have
Exchanged all the FRUs that were identified for an intermittent problem or a problem not detected by the diagnostics (tentative repair which can be unsuccessful).
Exchanged a Board
Exchanged a LIC Board
What You Should Do
Use the manual BER correlation (BRC, refer to the IBM
3745 Service Functions) to point out some additional potentially failing FRUs.
1. Find, in the Error Log Display the alarm with the Reference Code that you used to exchange the FRUs.
2. Select the BER range which occurs in the same time frame as the alarm.
3. Type BRC in the Menu 3.
4. Enter the most recent and the oldest BER in the range you have selected.
5. Press SEND.
6. Note the extra FRUs, if any, provided by the BER correlation and inform the HSC/HCS or update the PMH in case of problem reoccurence.
If the new board has a different part number with regard to the old one, you have to update the 'Board Level' label located on the front door.
Check the address plugging.
4-102
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
CE leaving procedure
Exchanged a FRU with a Different PN
Used the MIP for an Installation
Exchanged the PCC Card or Battery with Power OFF
Exchanged the HDD
Run the Wrap Diagnostic on the CA
Upgrade the CDF. Refer to the IBM 3745 Communication
Controller Service Function (CDF chapter) to upgrade or verify the CDF.
Go back to the installation procedure in the Installation
Manual.
Inform the customer that the TOD-clock and scheduled
power ON services will have to be recreated.
1. Inform the customer that he will have to refresh the
NCP on this disk if he uses HDD to load the control program.
2. Update the password.
Ensure that the wrap plug is removed
and replaced by the normal cable.
4. IML the MOSS as follows:
Set service to 0 (normal mode).
Set function to 1 (MOSS IML).
5. Do all actions that apply in the following list:
If you Have
Been working on the channels area in
Concurrent Diagnostic mode
Been working on the TSS, HPTSS, or
ESS adapter area in concurrent diagnostic mode
Been working with TRSS in concurrent diagnostic mode
What you Should Do
Restore the adapters back to NCP, using the channel service screen. Refer to “CA Restore Procedure” on page 4-105.
Remove all wrap plugs installed during this service call.
Replace all modem and line cables removed during this service call.
If you have altered CDFs during this service call, check CDFs and update, if necessary. Refer to the
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service Function
(CDF chapter).
IML the scanners disconnected from NCP during this call. This can be done by selecting IMS from Menu
1. When IML is complete, the adapters will automatically be connected to NCP.
Ask the customer to reactivate the lines that were stopped during the maintenance.
Connect the TRAs you disconnected during this service call back the to NCP. Refer to “TRA Reconnect Procedure” on page 4-105.
Ask the customer to reactivate the lines stopped during the maintenance.
6. Log Off the console by typing OFF on any displayed screen.
7. Set the console in use according to customer requirements.
8. Restore the power mode as it was before your intervention.
9. Do all the actions that apply in the following list:
If you Have What you Should Do
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-103
CE leaving procedure
Had the whole configuration
Disabled some channels
Ask the customer to IPL and load the NCP into the CCU.
Verify that IPL completes whithout errors.
If the system is not available to load the NCP into the
CCU, return the console to maintenance mode and IPL the CCU, one step at a time. At the beginning of phase 4
(IPL stop with phase 4 displayed) , verify that the message 'SCANNER(s) not IMLED xxxx' is not displayed.
Continue to end of phase 4.
Ask the customer to:
Re-enable the channels using the CID screen.
Put the channels online from the host.
Put the 3746-900 to online mode.
Use the CDF-E display function to check that the replaced/tested FRUs are available or active.
Put the 3746-900 Offline
Been working on the 3746-900 in concurrent maintenance mode on processors or couplers.
10. Replace all covers and close the doors.
11. Leave the machine in a safe condition.
12. Record the actions taken and the FRUs replaced during the call.
If the origin of the intervention was an alarm A5, report it as preventive maintenance (Service Code
08).
13. Update the PMH record for this call.
14. Return parts to the stock room.
4-104
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
CE leaving procedure
CA Restore Procedure
1. On the 3745 console, invoke Menu 3 and type CAS in the selection area for channel adapter services.
2. Press SEND.
3. Type 4 for concurrent maintenance commands.
4. Press SEND.
5. Type the channel adapter number corresponding to this FRU in the CA number ===> field.
6. Press SEND
7. Type RES in the command ===>field.
8. Press SEND.
9. Re-initiate the same procedure from Step 5 for the associated CA, if any.
How to Put the MOSS Online
Note: MOSS can only be put online if the NCP is running.
1. Using the console, invoke Menu 2 (See PF key line).
2. In Menu 2, type MON in the selection area.
3. Press SEND.
4. MOSS ONLINE will be displayed on the screen.
TRA Reconnect Procedure:
For this procedure you may wish to refer to Figure 1-6 on page 1-67, Figure 1-8 on page 1-68, and Figure 1-7 on page 1-67.
1. On the 3745 console, invoke Menu 3 (See PF key line).
2. In Menu 3 type TRS in the selection area for TRSS services.
3. Press SEND.
4. The TRSS Function Selection Screen is displayed.
5. Type 1 in the selection area for TRA Selection Screen.
6. Press SEND.
7. The TRA Selection Screen is displayed.
8. Type the TRA number in the TRA # ==> field.
9. Press SEND
10. The TRSS Function Selection Screen is displayed.
11. Type 2 in the selection area for Connect/Disconnect.
12. Press SEND.
13. The TRA Connect/Disconnect Selection Screen is displayed.
14. Type CT in the input area to connect the selected adapter to the NCP.
15. Press SEND.
16. Re-initiate the same procedure from Step 5 for the associated TRA, if any.
Chapter 4. 3745 FRU Exchange
4-105
CE leaving procedure
4-106
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Maintenance Aids
Appendix A. Maintenance Aids
Contacting Support
You may wish to record your support center telephone number here.
You may be directed to call support for various reasons. When support is called you may be asked to perform specific tasks. On the following pages you will find information about why you call support and references to where you will find information about the tasks you may have to perform.
“Control Program Maintenance Aids.”
“MOSS Microcode Maintenance Aids” on page A-2.
“Scanner Microcode Maintenance Aids” on page A-2.
“Special Tools” on page A-3.
“Shipping Group Tools” on page A-4.
“PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance Aids for LIC 5 and 6” on page A-5.
Control Program Maintenance Aids
The following list gives some possible causes of control program errors.
A hardware configuration change has been performed and there is a difference between the hardware configuration and the control program generation.
The customer has made some software changes.
A PTF has been incorrectly applied.
A PTF exists for the problem but has not been applied.
The following table shows where to find useful information in case of a suspected control program error.
Information
Customer procedures for diagnosis
How to perform control program procedures
How to execute NCP functions
Line interface display (LID)
Port swap
LIC swap
Stand-alone link test (SALT)
Cataloged procedures (CP1 to CP6)
LIC internal wrap test
LIC wrap test with wrap plugs
NetView* program alerts
Where to Find It
ACF/SSP Diagnosis Reference
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Problem Determination Guide
IBM 3745 Advanced Operation Guide, SA33-0097
NetView Bibliography.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
A-1
Maintenance Aids
MOSS Microcode Maintenance Aids
The following table shows where to find useful information in case of a suspected microcode error.
Information
How to apply an MCF
How to display and delete a MOSS dump
How to save, restore, and format the MOSS hard disk drive
How to dump a MOSS
Where to Find It
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
Scanner Microcode Maintenance Aids
The following table shows where to find useful information in case of a suspected scanner microcode error.
Information
MCF
Patches
Where to Find It
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Service
Function, SY33-2069
A-2
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Maintenance Aids
Special Tools
Maintaining the 3745 requires using tools in addition to those in the IBM service representative's tool kit.
The tools needed include:
General Purpose Tools
Tool
PT2-220 V or
PT2-110 V
PT3-220 V or
PT3-110 V
PT3-TPAM Acc. kit
TPLM
Display
Digital voltmeter
EIA breakout panel
Qty Part Nbr.
1 1749268
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
One of the following oscilloscope 1
Tektronix 454**
Tektronix 475**
Tektronix 2235**
Tektronix 2465 A**
High voltage probes 2
1749269
6406001
6406000
83X9300
1749290
1749270
8309874 or
8496278
453637
459559
453215
6428880
8309847
453698
ESD Kit
Part Name
ESD kit
This kit contains:
ESD mat
Wristband (small size)
(large size)
ESD ground cord
Part Nbr.
6428316
6428274
6428167
6428169
6428166
Appendix A. Maintenance Aids
A-3
Maintenance Aids
Shipping Group Tools
The following tools are shipped with the machine:
Tool
Segment board
Console wrap plug (31XX)
Console wrap plug (3727)
Console wrap plug (PC*/PS2*)
LIC 1-4 wrap plug
CA bus wrap plug (old) or
CA bus wrap plug (new)
CA tag wrap plug (old) or
CA tag wrap plug (new)
CA bus terminator
CA tag terminator
EPO plug
Cover keys
Bypass card type 1 (BPC1)
Bypass card type 2 (BPC2)
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty Part Nbr.
1
1
2
1
1
1
5997533
6398697
2667737
26F0320
65X8927
03F4301
1
1
26F1755
03F4300
26F1754
2282675
2282676
8482303
1643894
03F4372
66X0965
The following tools are shipped when an HPTSS is installed in the machine:
V.35 Wrap Plug
X.21 Wrap Plug
ESS Wrap Plug
1
1
1
58X9349
58X9354
70X8670
The following tool is shipped when a LIC3 is installed in the machine:
LIC3 wrap cable 1 65X8928
The following tools are shipped when a LIC5 or LIC6 is installed in the machine:
PT2 adapter cable
LIC5/LIC6 wrap plug (tailgate)
2
1
One of the following tools is also shipped:
11F4816
11F4815
LIC-5/6 wrap block (cable end) P/N according to the country.
Austria
Belgium
France
Germany
Hong Kong
Israel
Italy
Japan
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Switzerland
U.K.
U.S.A./Canada
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6162946
6162950
6162955
6162950
65X8070
66X1954
6162957
6124644
6162950
6162948
66X0748
65X8069
66X0807
The following tools are shipped when a
3746-900 is installed in the machine:
ESCON wrap plug
TIC-3 wrap plug
Filler (dummy card)
LIC11 wrap plug
LIC12 wrap plug for X.21
LIC12 wrap plug for V.35
LIC16 wrap plug
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5605670
6165899
2733278
58G9425
58X9354
58X9349
57G8097
Wrap plugs for testing ARCs and cables (these wrap plugs must be installed on ARC cables):
ARC V.35 DTE wrap plug
ARC V.35 DCE wrap plug
ARC V.24 DTE wrap plug
ARC V.24 DCE wrap plug
ARC V.24 DCE/DTE 3745 wrap plug1
ARC V.35 DCE 3745 wrap plug 1
ARC V.35 DTE 3745 wrap plug
ARC X.21 DTE wrap plug
1
1
ARC X.21 DCE wrap plug 1
ARC X.21 DCE/DTE 3745 wrap plug 1
1
1
1
1
61F4527
61F4526
61F4523
61F4522
61F4525
61F4528
61F4578
61F4530
61F4529
65X8927
Wrap plugs for testing ARCs assembly B (these wrap plugs must be installed at the rear of the ARCs):
ARC V.24 wrap plug
ARC V.35 Non 3745 wrap plug
ARC V.35 DTE 3745 wrap plug
ARC V.35 DCE 3745 wrap plug
ARC X.21 wrap plug
1
1
1
1
1
58G5660
58G5661
58G5658
58G5659
58G5662
The following tool is shipped with the service processor, which has an integrated modem installed:
Integrated modem wrap plug 1 74F4508
The following tools are shipped with the IBM controller expansion rack containing the service processor and/or the network node processor:
Spare fuse 2 58G5782
A-4
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Maintenance Aids
PKD (Portable Keypad Display) Maintenance Aids for LIC 5 and 6
Configuration:
On a LIC type 5 or 6, the configuration parameters are set from the PKD.
Refer to the "3745 Connection and Integration Guide" for the detailed procedure.
On a LIC type 5, the following configuration parameters are "service representative only":
MODE (native or CCITT), CD SENSIT (normal or low), and L XMIT LEVEL.
They must be set by using the 'B' command as follows:
1. Enter the B 300 at the PKD.
2. Press GO several times to get the desired option message.
3. Press ERASE and enter the new value if applicable.
4. Press GO to validate the new value.
B Commands (Only for LIC Type 5):
The following other B commands can be used by the CE for miscellaneous actions:
B 100 Reload default configuration.
B 555 Address a remote modem (using the modem serial number) to change some parameters.
B 666 Increase the time out from 30 seconds to 10 minutes.
B 703/704/705 CO/CS functions (allows remote commands).
B 730 Send a 1004 Hz tone on telephone line.
Manual Tests:
The following manual tests can be executed on a LIC type 5:
Local self-test
Remote self-test
Local status report
Remote status report
Analog test (line analysis)
Digital test (transmit/receive test)
Manual loopback.
The following manual tests can be executed on a LIC type 6:
Local self-test
Digital test (transmit/receive test)
Manual loopback.
Refer to the "3745 Connection and Integration Guide" for detailed procedures.
Appendix A. Maintenance Aids
A-5
Maintenance Aids
A-6
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Bibliography
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography
Service Personnel Definitions
Definition
Product trained CE (PT CE).
Hardware CE also able to fix problems in the microcode.
Also called:
CE1
1st Level CE
CE Phase 1
Uses
RETAIN console
3745 control panel
3745 console
3746-900 control panel
Service Processor
MIP
Service Functions Guide
Installation Guide
Parts Catalog
Basic Operations Guide
Problem Determination Guide
Connection and Integration Guide
Advanced Operations Guide
Wiring Diagrams (YZ Pages)
Same as PT CE, plus:
Hardware Maintenance Reference
Diagnostic Descriptions
Principles of Operation
Product support trained CE (PST CE).
Hardware CE also able to determine and fix problems in the microcode
Also called:
CE2
2nd Level CE
CE Phase 2
Specialist
Support
Hardware Central Service (HCS) may include:
Dispatchers
PT CEs
PST CEs
Program service representative (PSR): Also called:
Program support CE
Software CE
All 3745 tools and books
Operating systems, access methods, and NCP/EP library
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
B-1
Bibliography
Customer Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and
17A) and 3746 (Model 900)
Table B-1 (Page 1 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900
This customer documentation has the following formats:
B o o k s
Onli ne
B o o k s and
Di s k e t t es
Books and
CD-ROM
Finding Information
SA33-0142
Evaluating and Configuring
GA33-0138
GA33-0180
GA33-0183
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A
IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900
Customer Master Index
ñ
Provides references for finding information in the customer documentation library.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, and 170
Introduction
Gives an introduction about the IBM Models 130 to 170 capabilities, including
Model 160. For Model 17A refer to the Overview, GA33-0180.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A
ò
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
Overview
Gives an overview of connectivity capabilities within SNA, APPN, and IP networking.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A
ò
IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900
Migration and Planning Guide
Prepares 3745 Models A and 3746 Model 900 planning for:
Field upgrades
Network integration (NCP control)
Physical installation.
B-2
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Bibliography
Table B-1 (Page 2 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900
Preparing Your Site
GC22-7064
GN22-5490
Input/Output Equipment
Installation Manual-Physical Planning
Technical News Letter
Provides information on physical installation for the 3745 Models 130 to 610.
For 3745 Models A and 3746 Model 900, refer to the Migration and Planning
Guide, GA33-0183.
GA33-0140
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, and 170
Preparing for Connection
Helps for preparing the 3745 Models 130 to 170 cable installation. For 3745
Model 17A refer to the Connection and Integration Guide, SA33-0129.
Preparing for Operation
GA33-0400
IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Models
ó
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
Safety Information
ñ
Provides general safety guidelines.
SA33-0129
IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Models
ó
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Connection and Integration Guide
ñ
Contains information for connecting hardware and integrating network of the
3745 and 3746-900 after installation.
SA33-0416
SA33-0158
Line Interface Coupler Type 5 and Type 6
Portable Keypad Display
Migration and Integration Guide
Contains information for moving and testing LIC types 5 and 6.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller All Models
ó
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Console Setup Guide
ñ
Provides information for:
Installing local, alternate, or remote consoles for 3745 Models 130 to 610,
Configuring user workstations to remotely control the service processor for
3745 Models A and 3746 Model 900, using:
– DCAF program
– Telnet Client program
Customizing Your Control Program
SA33-0178
Guide to Timed IPL and Rename Load Module
Provides VTAM procedures for:
Scheduling an automatic reload of the 3745,
Getting 3745 load module changes transparent to the operations staff.
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography
B-3
Bibliography
Table B-1 (Page 3 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900
Operating and Testing
SA33-0098
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
All Models
ô
Basic Operations Guide
ñ
Provides instructions for daily routine operations on the 3745 Models 130 to
610.
SA33-0177
SA33-0097
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A
ò
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Basic Operations Guide
ñ
Provides instructions for daily routine operations on the 3745 Models 17A to
61A and 3746 Model 900 operating as an SNA node (NCP), APPN/HPR
Network Node, and IP Router.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
All Models
ó
Advanced Operations Guide
ñ
Provides instruction for advanced operations and testing, using the 3745
MOSS console.
On-line Information
SH11-3081
Controller Configuration and Management Application
Provides a graphical user interface for configuring and managing a 3746
APPN/HPR Network Node and IP Router, and its resources.
Is also available as a stand-alone application, using an OS/2 workstation.
Defines and explains all the 3746 Network Node and IP Router configuration parameters through its on-line help.
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
Controller Configuration and Management: User's Guide
õ
Explains how to use CCM and gives examples of the configuration process.
B-4
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Bibliography
Table B-1 (Page 4 of 4). Customer Documentation for the 3745 Models 130 to 17A and 3746 Model 900
Managing Problems
SA33-0096
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
All Models
ó
Problem Determination Guide
ñ
A guide to performing problem determination on the 3745 Models 130 to 61A.
On-line Information
Problem Analysis Guide
An on-line guide to analyze alarms, events, and control panel codes on:
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A ò
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950.
SA33-0175
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A
ò
IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 950
Alert Reference Guide
Provides information about events or errors reported by alerts for:
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A ò
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Models 900 and 950.
CD-ROM Bibliography
SK2T-6012
IBM Networking
Softcopy Collection Kit
Allows customer manuals consulting via CD-ROM viewer.
ñ Documentation shipped with the 3745.
ò
3745 Models 17A to 61A.
ó
3745 Models 130 to 61A.
ô Except 3745 Models A.
õ Documentation shipped with the 3746-900.
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography
B-5
Bibliography
Service Documentation for the 3745 (Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and
17A) and 3746 (Model 900)
Table B-2 (Page 1 of 3). Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746 Model 900
This service documentation has the following formats:
B o o k s
Onli ne
Books and
CD-ROM
SY33-2079
SY33-2067
SY33-2114
SY33-2116
SY33-2069
SY33-2070
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A
Service Master Index
ñ
Provides references for finding information in the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and
17A shipping group documentation.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, 170, and 17A
Installation Guide
ñ
Provides instructions for installing or relocating the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and
17A.
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Installation Guide
ò
Provides instructions for installing or relocating the IBM 3746 Model 900.
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 900
Service Guide
ò
Provides procedures for isolating and fixing the IBM 3746 Model 900 problems.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, and 170
Service Functions
ñ
Describes MOSS functions using the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and 17A consoles.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130 to 17A
Maintenance Information Procedures
ñ
Provides procedures for isolating and fixing the IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and
17A problems.
B-6
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Bibliography
Table B-2 (Page 2 of 3). Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746 Model 900
SY33-2115
IBM 3745 Communication Controller Models A
IBM 3746 Expansion Unit Model 900
ó
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller Model 950
Service Processor Installation and Maintenance
ô
(Based on the 3172, 9585, and 9577)
Provides information on installing and maintaining the service processor based on the PS/2 Types 3172, 9585, and 9577.
SY33-2112
SY33-2066
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
Network Node Processor Installation and Maintenance
ô
(Based on the 3172)
Provides information on installing and maintaining the network node processor based on the PS/2 Type 3172.
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130, 150, 160, and 170
Hardware Maintenance Reference
ñ
Provides in-depth hardware reference information on the IBM 3745 Models
1X0 and 17A. Also valid for the 3745 Model 17A.
On-line Information
Hardware Maintenance Reference
õ
Provides in-depth hardware reference information on the 3746 Model 900.
SY33-2075
SY33-2117
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
All Models
ö
External Cable References
ñ
Provides references to console and line cables used for connecting the IBM
3745 Models 130 to 61A.
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
External Cable Reference
÷
Provides references to console and line cables used for connecting the IBM
3746 Models 900 and 950.
S135-2015
S135-2012
IBM 3746 Nways Multiprotocol Controller
Models 900 and 950
Parts Catalog
÷
Provides reference information for ordering parts for the IBM 3746 Models 900 and 950.
3745 Communication Controller
Models 130 to 17A
Parts Catalog
ñ
Provides reference information for ordering IBM 3745 Models 1X0 and 17A parts.
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography
B-7
Bibliography
Table B-2 (Page 3 of 3). Service Documentation for the 3745 Models 1x0 and 17A, and 3746 Model 900
S135-2014
IBM Controller Expansion
Parts Catalog
Provides reference information for ordering parts for the controller expansion attached to the IBM 3746 Model 900 and 950.
CD-ROM Bibliography
ZK2T-8214
ZK2T-8187
IBM Networking
Softcopy Collection Kit
Allows service manuals consulting via CD-ROM viewer. EMEA version.
IBM Networking
Softcopy Collection Kit
Allows service manuals consulting via CD-ROM viewer. US version.
ñ Documentation shipped with the 3745.
ò Documentation shipped with the 3746-900.
ó
3745 Models 17A to 61A.
ô Documentation shipped with the processor.
õ Product integrated information.
ö 3745 Models 130 to 61A.
÷ Documentation shipped with the 3746 Models 900 and 950.
B-8
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Bibliography
Related Signal Converter Product Information
The following publications relate to IBM signal converter products and are currently available:
7861 Description and Planning Guide, GA33-0122.
7861 Setup, User's Guide, and Problem Determination, SA33-0123.
7861 Maintenance Information and Parts Catalog, SY33-2062.
7868 Guide to Operation, GA33-0134.
5822-10 Guide to Operation, GA33-0118.
5822-18 Guide to Operation, GA33-0136.
5858 Guide to Operation, GH11-3027.
5858 Maintenance Information and Parts Catalog, SY12-8246.
Link Problem Determination Aid, SY33-2064.
Power Supply and Telecommunication Connections, GA33-0054.
7855 Guide to Operation, GA33-0160.
IBM 7857 Modem, Guide to Operation, GA13-1839.
IBM Asynchronous/SDLC V.32 Modem/A: Installation, Operation, and Problem Determination Guide,
SA27-3955.
Appendix B. 3745 Bibliography
B-9
Bibliography
Related NCP Service Information
NCP and EP Reference Summary and Data Areas (LY30-3196 for V4R3.1 only)
NCP and EP Reference Summary and Data Areas (LY30-5603 for V5 only)
These manuals are for system programmers and IBM program service representatives. They provide quick access to often-used diagnostic and debugging information about NCP and EP in the PEP environment.
NCP, SSP, and EP Diagnosis Guide (LY30-5591)
This manual is designed to help customers and IBM program service representatives isolate and define problems in NCP Version 3, NCP Version 4, NCP V4 Subset, NCP Version 5, and EP in the PEP environment using SSP Version 3. The primary purpose of the manual is to help the user interact with the IBM
Support Center to resolve a problem. Procedures in these manuals describe how to:
Determine whether the problem is in NCP
Use relevant information to describe the problem
Gather appropriate documentation about the problem
Report the problem to the IBM Support Center
In addition, it includes detailed descriptions of how to use the programming tools available with NCP and
SSP.
NCP and EP Reference (LY30-5569 for V4R3.1 only)
NCP and EP Reference (LY30-5605 for V5 only)
These manuals contain reference material describing the internal organization and function of the NCP and the EP in the PEP environment. These manuals provide information for customization and diagnosis.
World Wide Web
You can access the latest news and information about IBM network products, customer services and support via the internet, at the Universal Resource Locator (URL): http://www.ibm.com
B-10
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Abbreviation
bps
BRC
BSC
CA
CAB
CADR
AUI
BASA
BASB
BASC
BAT
BATRY
BCCA
BCLE
BER
BPC1
List of Abbreviations
A
AC
ACK
ACPW
ACUN
AC1
AC2
AFD
AIO
ARC
ASCII
BPC2
CADS
CAL
CBC
CBSA
ampere
1) alternating current
2) address compare affirmative acknowledgment (BSC) ac power box access unit (token ring access unit such as the IBM 8228) ac power box (ACPW) installed in position 1 of the 3746-900 ac power box (ACPW) installed in position 2 of the 3746-900 airflow detector adapter-initiated operation active remote connector
American National Standard Code for
Information Interchange access unit interface basic board A basic board B basic board C basic assurance test
FRU name of the battery
Buffer chaining channel adapter buffer control list element box event record
FRU name of the bus propagation card to replace the CAL card bus propagation card to replace the TRM card bits per second
BER reference code binary synchronous communication channel adapter channel adapter board
FRU name of the channel adapter driver receiver card
Channel adapter data streaming
FRU name of the channel adapter logic card controller bus coupler controller bus and service adapter
CSC
CSCE
CSCW
CSG
CSGH
CSGL
CSP
CSR
CBP
CBTRA
CBx
CCITT
CCU
CCW
CD
CDF
CDG
CDS
CE
CEPT
CID
CLDP
CLP
CNM
CO/CS
CPN
CP
CPx
CRP
CRU
CS
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997 controller bus and service processor controller bus and token-ring adapter
FRU name of circuit breaker number x
Comite Consultatif International
Telegraphique et Telephonique central control unit channel command word carrier detector (signal) configuration data file concurrent diagnostic configuration data set (NCP/EP) customer engineer
Comite Europeen des Postes et Telecommunications channel interface display function controller load/dump program communication line processor communication network management contact operate / contact sense customer problem number
1) communication processor
2) control program
FRU name of circuit protector number x check record pool customer replaceable unit
1) cycle steal
2) communication scanner
3) connectivity switch
1) FRU name of the scanner for medium-
/low-speed lines
2) connectivity switch cable connectivity switch cable extension cycle steal control word cycle steal grant cycle steal grant high cycle steal grant low
FRU name of the communication scanner processor associated with the
FESH card for high speed lines
(CSC scanner for the medium-/low-speed lines) cycle steal request
X-1
Abbreviation
CSRH
CSRL
CSS
CTS
dc
DCAF
DCE
DCDP
DCPW
DCREG
DE
DFA
DIF
DMA
DMUX
cycle steal request high cycle steal request low control subsystem clear to send (signal) direct current
Distributed Console Access Facility data circuit-terminating equipment dc distribution and protection box dc power box
FRU name of the dc regulator card device end (channel status)
FRU name of the disk file adapter card disk function direct memory access
FRU name of the double multiplex card
DRS
DSI
DTE
DTR
EAC
EC
EIA
ELA
data rate select data store interface data terminal equipment data terminal ready (signal)
Ethernet adapter card engineering change
Electronic Industries Association
Ethernet line adapter
ENQ
EPO
ERC
ESCA
enquiry (BSC) emergency power-OFF error reference code
ESCON channel adapter. An ESCA consists of an ESCON channel processor
(ESCP) and an ESCON channel coupler
(ESCC)
ESCC
ESS
ESCON channel coupler. A communication controller hardware unit which is the interface between the ESCON channel processor and the ESCON fiber optic cable
ESCON channel coupler type 2
ESCC2
ESCON channel A channel having an Enterprise
System Connection* channel-control-unit interface that uses optical cables as a transmission medium
ESCP
ESCON channel processor. A communication controller hardware unit which provides the channel data link control for the
ESCON channel adapter
Ethernet sub-system
IPL
IR
IRR
ISO
IFT
IML
in.
INN
IOC
IO
IOH
IOHI
HSB
HSS
HW
Hz
IBE
ID
IEEE
ETG
FAN1
FAN2
FCC
FDD
FE
FESH
FRU
ft
GPT
GTF
HCS
HDD
HDR
hex
HLIR
HPP bus
HPTSS
Ethernet tail gate
FRU name of the power supply box fan
FRU name of the logic box fan
Federal Communications Commission
FRU name of the flexible disk drive field engineering
FRU name of the front-end scanner
(high-speed) field-replaceable unit foot generalized PIU trace generalized trace facility
Hardware Central Service
FRU name of the hard disk drive header hexadecimal high-level interrupt request high-performance parallel bus high-performance transmission subsystem high-speed buffer (cache) high-speed scanner hardware
Hertz internal box error identifier
Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers internal function test initial microcode load inch intermediate network node input/output control input/output input/output halfword (instruction) input/output halfword immediate (instruction) initial program load interrupt request interrupt request removed
International Organization of Standardization
X-2
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
KB kbps
kg
kHz
LA
LCBB
LCBE
LCEB
LCEE
LCPB
LCPE
LED
LIB
LIB1
LIB2
LIB3
LIB4
LIC
LICx
LSS
LSSD
m
mA
MAC
MB
MCC
MCF
LID
LLIR
LPDA
LS
LSAR
LSR
MCT
MDOR
MES
MHz
Abbreviation
kilobyte (1024 bytes) kilobits per second kilogram kilohertz
1) load address (instruction)
2) line adapter line connection box base line connection box expansion line connection enclosure base line connection enclosure expansion line connection power base line connection power expansion light-emitting diode line interface coupler board
LIC board type 1 for LICs 1, 3, and 4
(models A and B)
LIC board type 2 for LICs 5 and 6
(models A and B)
LIC board type 3 for LICs 1, 2, and 3
(model C)
LIC board type 4 for LICs 5 and 6 (model
C) line interface coupler card
FRU name of line interface coupler card type x line interface display low-level interrupt request
Link Problem Determination Aid local storage local storage address register local storage register (CSP) low-speed scanner level-sensitive scan design meter milliampere
MOSS adapter card for 3745 model 17A megabyte; 1 048 576 bytes
FRU name of the MOSS control card microcode fix machine configuration table
MOSS data operand register miscellaneous equipment specification megahertz
NCCF
NCP
NCTE
NLDM
NMVT
NPDA
MPC
MSA
MSAU
MSC
MUX
mV
NAK
min
MIO
MIOC
MIP
MLA
mm
MMIO
MOSS
MOSS-E
PCF
PKD
PIO
PNLC
POR
PRC
PROM
NPSI
oc
OLT
ov
PANEL
PC
PCC
PS minute
MOSS input/output
MOSS I/O control bus
Maintenance Information Procedures
MOSS LAN adapter millimeter memory mapped input/output maintenance and operator subsystem maintenance and operator subsystem extended
FRU name of the MOSS processor card machine status area multistation access unit
FRU name of the MOSS storage card multiplex function millivolt negative acknowledgment character
(BSC)
Network Communications Control Facility
Network Control Program network communication terminal equipment
Network Logical Data Manager network management vector transport
Network Problem Determination Application network packet switching interface overcurrent online test overvoltage
FRU name of the control panel personal computer
FRU name of the power control card primary control field (storage) portable keyboard display program-initiated operation
FRU name of the panel card power-ON reset processor
FRU name of the programmable readonly memory module power supply
List of Abbreviations
X-3
Abbreviation
RIM
RNIO
ROS
RPO
RSF
RTS
R/W
SALC
SAR
SAT
SCTL
SDLC
SIM
SMUXA
SMUXB
SNA
SNRM
SPDn
SPS
SRC
STO
SVC
SWx
PCSS
PSTCE
PS1
PS2
PTCE
PTT
PUC
PV
RAC
RCV
RD
RETAIN
RFS
RI
power control subsystem product support trained CE
FRU name of power supply number 1
FRU name of power supply number 2 product-trained CE
Post, Telephone and Telegraph (agency)
FRU name of the CCU card parity valid (signal) repair action code receive receive data (signal)
Remote Technical Assistance Information
Network ready for sending (signal)
1) register to immediate operand
(instruction)
2) ring indicator (same as CI) request initialization mode (SDLC)
OS/VS VTAM IO trace read-only storage remote power-OFF remote support facility request to send (signal) read/write scanner ALC (Airline line control) storage address register specific assurance test
FRU name of the storage control card
Synchronous Data Link Control set initialization mode (SDLC)
FRU name of the single multiplex card for LIC board type 2
FRU name of the single multiplex card for LIC board type 2
Systems Network Architecture set normal response mode (SDLC) signal and power distribution card service and power support system reference code
FRU name of the storage (card) supervisor call
FRU name of switch number x
T
TA
TCM
TD
TERMC
TERMD
TERMI
TERMR
TI
TIC
TIC1
TIC2
TIC3
TPS
TRA
TRM
TRP
TRSS
TSS
T1
UA
UC
UEPO
URSF
V
VB
VAC
VDC
VH
VTAM
V.24
V.25
V.28
V.35
transmit (signal) tag address
1) thermally-controlled module
2) trellis coded modulation
1) tag data
2) transmitted data (signal)
FRU name of the terminator/channel signals card (IOC)
FRU name of the DMA terminator card
FRU name of the IOC terminator card
FRU name of the terminator/redrive card
(IOC) test indicator (signal) token-ring interface coupler
FRU name of the TIC card type 1 (4
Mbits only)
FRU name of the TIC card type 2 (4 and
16 Mbits)
FRU name of the TIC card type 3 (4 and
16 Mbits) two-processor switch token-ring adapter
FRU name of the token-ring multiplexer card that controls up to two TICs token-ring processor token-ring subsystem transmission subsystem
US service for very high speed transmissions at 1.5 million bps unnumbered acknowledgment (SDLC) universal controller unit emergency power-Off universal remote support facility volt valid byte (signal) volts, alternating current volts, direct current valid halfword (signal)
Virtual Telecommunications Access
Method
CCITT V.24 recommendation
CCITT V.25 recommendation
CCITT V.28 recommendation
CCITT V.35 recommendation
X-4
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
WLOB
XI
wire lobe (cable connecting token-ring adapters to token-ring access units)
X.25 SNA interconnection
XID
X.21
X.25
Abbreviation
exchange identification
CCITT X.21 recommendation
CCITT X.25 recommendation
List of Abbreviations
X-5
Abbreviation
X-6
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Glossary
Glossary
This glossary defines all new terms used in this manual.
It also includes terms and definitions from the
IBM Dictionary of Computing, GC20-1699.
adapter-initiated operation (AIO). A transfer of up to
256 bytes between an adapter (CA or LA) and the CCU storage. The transfer is initiated by an IOH/IOHI instruction, and is performed in cycle stealing via the
IOC bus.
alarm. A message sent to the MOSS console. In case of an error a reference code identifies the nature of the error.
alert. A message sent to the host console. In case of an error a reference code identifies the nature of the error.
autoBER. A program to automatically analyse a BER file.
automaint. A function that uses autoBER to isolate failing FRUs.
box event record (BER). Information about an event detected by the controller. It is recorded on the disk/diskette and can be displayed on the operator console for event analysis.
block multiplexer channel. A multiplexer channel that interleaves blocks of data. See also byte multiplexer channel. Contrast with selector channel.
byte multiplexer channel. A multiplexer channel that interleaves bytes of data. See also block multiplexer channel. Contrast with selector channel.
cache. A high-speed buffer storage that contains frequently accessed instructions and data; it is used to reduce access time.
central control unit (CCU). In the 3745, the controller hardware unit that contains the circuits and data flow paths needed to execute instructions and to control its storage and the attached adapters.
channel adapter (CA). A communication controller hardware unit used to attach the controller to a host processor.
clear channel. Mode of data transmission where the data passes through the DCE and network, and arrives at the receiving communication controller unchanged from the data transmitted. The DCE or network can modify the data during transmission because of certain network restrictions, but must ensure the received data stream is the same as the transmitted data stream.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1989, 1997
communication controller. A communication control unit that is controlled by one or more programs stored and executed in the unit. Examples are the IBM 3705,
IBM 3725/3726, IBM 3720, and IBM 3745.
communication scanner processor (CSP). The processor of a scanner.
communication subsystem. The part of the controller that controls the data transfers over the transmission interface.
configuration data file (CDF). A MOSS file that contains a description of all the hardware features (presence, type, address, and characteristics).
control panel. A panel that contains switches and indicators for the use of the customer's operator and service personnel.
control program. A computer program designed to schedule and to supervise the execution of programs of the controller.
control subsystem (CSS). The part of the controller that stores and executes the control program, and monitors the data transfers over the channel and transmission interfaces.
data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE). The equipment installed at the user's premises that provides all the functions required to establish, maintain, and terminate a connection, and the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal equipment (DTE) and the line. For example, a modem is a DCE (see modem.)
Note: The DCE may be separate equipment or an integral part of other equipment.
data terminal equipment (DTE). That part of a data station that serves as a data source, data link, or both, and provides for the data communication control function according to protocols.
direct attachment. The attachment of a DTE to another DTE without a DCE.
high-performance transmission subsystem
(HPTSS). The part of the controller that controls the data transfers over the high-speed transmission interface (speed up to 2 million bps).
high-speed scanner. Line adapter for lines up to 2 million bps, composed of a communication scanner processor (CSP) and a front-end high-speed scanner
(FESH).
X-7
Glossary
initial microcode load (IML). The process of loading the microcode into a scanner or into MOSS.
initial program load (IPL). The initialization procedure that causes 3745 control program to commence operation.
input/output control (IOC). The circuit that controls the input/output from/to the channel adapters and scanners via the IOC bus.
internal clock function. A LIC function that provides a transmit clock for sending data, and retrieves a receive clock from received data, when the modem does not provide those timing signals. When the terminal is connected in direct-attach mode (without modem) the ICF also provides the transmit and receive clocks to the terminal, via the LIC card.
line adapter (LA). The part of the TSS, HPTSS, or
TRSS that scans and controls the transmission lines.
Also called scanner.
For the TSS the line adapters are low-speed scanners
(LSSs).
For the HPTSS the line adapters are high-speed scanners (HSSs).
For the TRSS the line adapters are token-ring adapters
(TRAs).
line interface coupler (LIC). A circuit that attaches up to four transmission cables to the controller.
low-speed scanner. Line adapter for lines up to 256 kbps, composed of a CSC card.
maintenance and operator subsystem (MOSS). The part of the controller that provides operating and servicing facilities to the customer's operator and the IBM service representative.
NetView
. An IBM licensed program used to monitor a network, manage it, and diagnose its problems.
Network Control Program (NCP). An IBM licensed program that provides communication controller support for single-domain, multiple-domain, and interconnected network capability.
operator console. The IBM Operator Console that is used to operate and service the communication controller (CC) through the MOSS. Optionally an alternate console may be installed up to 120 m from the CC, or a remote console may be connected to the (CC) through the switched network.
scanner. A device that scans and controls the transmission lines. Also called line adapter.
selector channel. An I/O channel designed to operate with only one I/O device at a time. Once the I/O device is selected, a complete record is transferred one byte at a time. Contrast with block multiplexer channel, multiplexer channel.
Systems Network Architecture (SNA). The description of the logical structure, formats, protocols, and operational sequences for transmitting information through a user application network. The structure of
SNA allows the users to be independent of specific telecommunication facilities.
token-ring subsystem (TRSS). The part of the controller that controls the data transfers over an IBM
Token-Ring Network.
The TRSS consists of one token-ring adapter (TRA).
token-ring adapter (TRA). Line adapter for an IBM
Token-Ring Network, composed of one token-ring multiplexer card (TRM), and two token-ring interface couplers (TICs).
transmission subsystem (TSS). The part of the controller that controls the data transfers over low- and medium-speed, switched and non switched transmission interfaces.
The TSS consists of up to six low-speed scanners
(LSSs) associated with the LICs units (LIUs), through serial links (SLs).
two-processor switch (TPS). A feature of the channel adapter that connects a second channel to the same channel adapter.
V.24. CCITT V.24 recommendation
V.25. CCITT V.25 recommendation
V.35. CCITT V.35 recommendation
X.20 bis. CCITT X.20 bis recommendation
X.21. CCITT X.21 recommendation
X.25. CCITT X.25 recommendation
YZxxx.. wiring diagram
X-8
3745 Models 130 to 17A: MIP
Readers' Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You
IBM 3745 Communication Controller
Models 130 to 17A
Maintenance Information Procedures
Publication No. SY33-2070-09
Please send us your comments concerning this book. We will greatly appreciate them and will consider them for later releases of the present book.
If you prefer sending comments by FAX or electronically, use:
FAX: 33 4 93 24 77 97
E-mail: FRIBMQF5 at IBMMAIL
IBM Internal Use: LGERCF at LGEPROFS
Internet: [email protected]
In advance, thank you.
Your comments:
Name
Company or Organization
Phone No.
Address
Readers' Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You
SY33-2070-09
IBM
Cut or Fold
Along Line
Fold and Tape
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
IBM France
Centre d'Etudes et Recherches
Service 0798 - BP 79
06610 La Gaude
France
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
PLACE
POSTAGE
STAMP
HERE
Fold and Tape
Cut or Fold
Along Line
SY33-2070-09
IBM
Part Number: 03F5017
Printed in Denmark by IBM Danmark A/S
SY33-2ð7ð-ð9
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project